district procedures and design guidelines

Transcription

Design & Construction Standards:
DISTRICT PROCEDURES
AND DESIGN GUIDELINES
00 00 01 Use of Standards
00 00 02 Procedures
00 00 03 Drawing & Specification Standards
00 10 00 General Design Considerations
00 11 00 Finish Color Standards
00 12 00 Accessibility Standard
00 20 00 Exterior Building Envelope
00 21 00 Superstructure
00 30 00 Interior Wall Systems
00 40 00 Plumbing Design Guidelines
00 41 00 Fire Protection Guidelines
00 50 00 HVAC Design Guidelines
00 60 00 Electrical Design Guidelines
00 70 00 Technology Guidelines
00 80 00 Security Design Criteria
00 90 00 Site Design Guidelines
00 91 00 Playground Standards
FACILITY MANAGEMENT
April 2016
SECTION 00 00 01
PERMITTED USE OF STANDARDS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A. STANDARDS shall mean “Denver Public Schools – Design and Construction standards.
B. A/E or ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: The Architect of Record (or prime consultant) and/or any of his subconsultants (as appropriate for the comment or instruction given).
C. CONTRACTOR: The general contractor performing the construction and/or any of the trade contractors
performing work under sub-contract with the general contractor.
D. ENGINEER: Any sub-consultant of the Prime A/E.
E. DPS, FACILITY MODERNIZATION, PROJECT MANAGER:
Manager for the specific project.
F.
The Denver Public Schools Project
PROJECT: The construction, renovation, remodeling or maintenance replacement described by the
Construction Documents.
G. DPS PROJECT MANGER: The designated representative of Denver Public Schools for the specific project.
H. PROJECT ARCHITECT: The primary contact between the Architect firm and Denver Public Schools.
1.02
INTENT
A. Standards are intended to be used to inform Architects and Engineers of DPS preferences and processes to
be followed in the process of developing designs and administering the project.
B. Standards are not intended to limit the use of quality materials, products or processes.
encouraged to recommend possible variations from the standards.
The A/E is
C. Variations from standards desired by the Architects / Engineers must be reviewed and approved in writing
by DPS.
D. The Architect (prime consultant) is responsible to distribute standards to all his Engineers and subconsultants and to assure that standards are current.
E. It is the intent of the Denver Public Schools that the standards contained herein be used as a reference to
assist the design professional in determining the desires of Denver Public Schools as they relate to the
processes, materials and products to be used in the design, documentation and administration of construction
projects.
F.
The standards are not intended to be used as a specification in whole or in part.
G. These standards are the property of the Denver Public Schools and shall not be reproduced without
permission.
1.03
USE
A. The Standards are, by reference, a part of the Agreement between Denver Public Schools and the Design
Professional. The Design Professional will produce finished Contract Documents which adhere to the
Standards.
1.04
RELIANCE ON STANDARDS
A. The Design Professional shall review the Standards and request in writing, variances to these standards he
deems appropriate. The Design Professional shall bring all concerns to the attention of the Denver Public
Schools Project Manager.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management
District Procedures
00 00 01
Page 1 of 2
Use of Standards
Update: April 2016
B. The Design Professional shall not rely on these Standards as being complete nor shall he rely on any of the
provisions included in the Standards as being sufficient to conform to Building Codes or other regulatory
requirements of any entity having code enforcement jurisdiction over the design and/or construction of
Denver Public Schools projects.
1.05
1.
It is the responsibility of the Design Professional to determine that all Contract Documents developed
using the Standards comply with all applicable ordinances, codes statutes or other regulations.
2.
Where specific standards are in excess of regulatory requirements, the Design Professional shall adhere
to the Standards unless otherwise directed in writing.
3.
Where specific standards are insufficient to meet regulatory requirements, the Design Professional shall
bring these items to the attention of the Denver Public Schools Project Manager. In all cases the
Contract Documents shall comply with regulatory requirements unless otherwise directed in writing by
Denver Public Schools.
LIABILITY
A. Each Design Professional remains liable to the extent provided by law for all design decisions made with
respect to an individual site or project.
B. The existence of the Standards shall not constitute a waver of responsibility or disclaimer of liability of the
Design Professional for design negligence or any other legal or equitable claim against Denver Public
Schools, any of its officers, agents, employees or contractors.
C. Neither review of the Contract Documents nor approval of Contract Documents by an agent of the Denver
Public Schools shall constitute a waver of any of the Design Professional’s contractual and ethical
obligations.
D. Variation from the Standards without written approval shall be considered as an error of commission and the
Design Professional shall be responsible for any and all costs of changes required to bring the finished
construction into compliance with the standards.
END OF SECTION 00 00 01
District Procedures
00 00 01
Page 2 of 2
Use of Standards
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 00 02
PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.01
COMMUNICATION
ROLES:
A. District Project Manager
1.
Coordinate with the District’s Departments and the Design Team in order to oversee the design and
construction process and ensure the District’s Standards are being met for the project.
2.
Oversees the entire design and construction process.
3.
Has the authority to administer decisions to the Design Team on behalf of the District.
B. Project Architect
1.02
1.
The primary Design Team contact between the District Project Manager and the Design Team.
2.
Oversees the entire design process.
3.
Has the authority to administer instructions from DPS’s Office of Facility Design and Construction.
4.
Continues as the Project Architect throughout the design and construction administration phases.
5.
The Project Architect shall not be changed without the written approval of the District’s Project
Manager.
LINE OF COMMUNICATION:
A. All communication between the design team and the District will be routed through the Project Architect to
the District.
B. All communication between the District’s Departments and the design team will be routed through the the
District to the Project Architect.
C. All meetings shall be set up through the District.
1.03
CORRESPONDENCE:
A. All communication should have the District’s Parent Project Number, the School Name, and the Date noted
on each correspondence.
B. The Design Team will prepare written minutes for every meeting held during the design and construction
process. This includes all meetings with the District, Design Reviews, all Building Department/Jurisdiction
meetings, and all Construction Meetings.
1.
Send finalized minutes to the District.
2.
Send minutes to Building Department with signature block for the Building Department with
“approved by” notation. Include statement similar to “If you are in agreement…. Please sign and
return… .”
3.
Send copy of minutes with Building Department sign-off to DPS.
C. During the course of the design process, the Design Team might need to coordinate aspects of the project
with the following District Departments. All coordination must be made through the District.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 00 00 02
District Procedures
Page 1 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
DISTRICT DEPARTMENT LIST:
Quality Assurance / Quality Control:
General, Administrative
QA/QC
Structural
QA/QC
ADA, Other
QA/QC
Electrical
QA/QC
Fire Alarm
Facility Design & Construction
Protective Coatings
QA/QC
Plumbing, Fire Sprinklers
QA/QC
Grounds
QA/QC
HVAC
QA/QC
Accessibility (ADA):
ADA Database
Facility Planning
ADA Technical Guidelines
Maintenance
ADA Scoping – Students
Student Services
ADA Scoping - Staff
Human Resources
Additional Work Requests, Additional
Project Requests
First Call Center (FCC)
Art Department / Teaching + Learning
Art & Music
Athletics
Athletics
Audio Visual
Audio/ Visual
Career & Technical Ed (CTE)
Career & Technical Ed
Community Outreach, DAGs, PACs,
School Naming
(Manager of City Affairs)
Early Childhood Education (ECE)
Early Education
Educational Programs
Operations Support Services (OSS)
Educational Specifications
Facility Planning
Educational Technology, Tech Labs,
Interactive White Boards (Promethean
Boards)
DoTS
Emergency Egress, Areas of Rescue
Assistance, Fire Drills, Kilns, Cooking
in Classrooms, Safe Routes to School,
etc.
Safety and Security -
Environmental: Asbestos, Lead
Environmental: Other
Environmental:
quality)
Wastewater (water
Emergency Preparedness (formerly with
Risk Management)
District Procedures
Page 2 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
Facility Operations (Custodial)
Operations
Gardens, Greenhouses, Urban Farms
Sustainability
Health Clinics
Nursing Services
Kitchens
Food & Nutrition Services
Libraries
Educational Resource Services
Physical Education
Arts & Physical Education
Risk Management: Insurance Claims
Risk Management
Risk Management: Playground Safety,
Traverse & Climbing Walls, General
School Safety, etc.
Risk Management
Science
Curriculum & Instruction
Security Systems
Safety & Security
Special Education
Student Services,
Special Education
PART 2
2.01
Summer Use, Community Use
Customer Communication Center (CCC)
Sustainability
Sustainability
Telecom, IT
DoTS
Transportation
Transportation
Warehouse, Moving (DPS)
Enterprise
Warranties, D&C Standards
Maintenance
PROCESS
PROGRAMMING
A. Once awarded the project, the Project Architect will coordinate with the District to confirm the project’s
expectations and overall Project Schedule. This includes Design Review expectations.
B. The Project Architect will work with the District to determine what Authorities Having Jurisdictions (AHJ)
need to be contacted for the projectes. Jurisdictions may include:
1.
Colorado Division of Fire Prevention & Control
2.
Department of Regulatory Agencies
3.
City of Denver
4.
Denver Fire
5.
Denver Water
6.
Denver Health Department
C. The Project Architect shall become familiar with all the District Standards, including:
1.
Education Specifications
2.
Design & Construction Standards
3.
Construction Safety Standards
District Procedures
Page 3 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
D. The Project Architect will coordinate a time to visit the Space Planning Office with the District in order to
obtain the appropriate existing documents for the project.
E. Project Schedule:
1.
Prepare a detailed schedule for the entire project, which meets the project requirements. The schedule
should include key milestones, including design and construction phases.
2.
The District will review the schedule.
3.
Schedule to be approved in writing by District.
4.
The Project Architect shall update the schedule monthly (or more frequently for short duration
projects).
F. Programming:
1.
Design Team to collect necessary information from building users while also following the District’s
Education Specifications.
2.
Program parameters to be documented by the Project Architect and accepted by the District.
G. Owner Provided Data (see A/E Agreement):
1.
Survey
a)
Existing survey may be used for additions.
b) If the existing survey is not adequate, the Design Team to identify survey information required.
2.
Soils Investigation
a)
The Design Team will to provide dimensioned test hole locations on site plan.
b) Owner will provide 3 copies to the Project Architect upon completion.
2.02
DESIGN REVIEWS
A. Provide (1) full size and (1) half size copy of every drawing set submitted for review.
B. Provide (1) bound copies of every manual/narrative book for every drawing set provided.
C. Schematic Design Review Deliverables:
1.
Provide the following drawings as appropriate for the project. Refer to Drawing Standards section for
drawing format and room numbering.
a)
Site Plan.
b) Floor Plans that indicate the layout, room numbers, and square feet.
c)
2.
Code plan with occupancy groups, construction types, allowable and actual floor areas, important
requirements and/or restrictions, water control analysis, zoning requirements (parking, setbacks,
etc.), and utility analysis.
Systems Descriptions that include:
a)
Building shell finish materials (include samples of unique materials)
b) Wall types and construction
c)
Roofing System including typical flashing and termination
d) HVAC system(s)
e)
Fire Alarm
f)
Clock & Bell
g) Primary Electrical (for remodel or additions with primary electrical changes)
District Procedures
Page 4 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
3.
Probable Bid Cost Estimate that reflects the level of development of the plans. Minimally provide:
a)
Building cost
b) Site development cost
c)
4.
Utility service cost
Updated Design & Construction Schedule
D. Design Development Design Review Deliverables:
1.
Provide the following drawings as appropriate for the project. Refer to Drawing Standards section for
drawing format and room numbering.
a)
Code Plan
b) Plans
i)
Site Development Plan showing the building location, property lines, walks, drives, parking,
landscaping, hard surface play areas, play apparatus areas, signage locations, trash enclosures,
fences, retain walls, loading docks, steps, accessible routes, utility routing (including existing
and required new easements), and the preliminary drainage characteristics including the
calculations.
ii) Overall Floor Plans that show the room numbers, general space layout, general furniture
layout (ie cafeteria tables, auditorium seating, library, kitchen layout, offices, and bleachers),
general finishes as well as fire walls, door locations, drinking fountains, fire extinguishers,
roof hatches, lockers, shelving, windows, wall types, elevation changes, ramps, elevators.
c)
Major Building Elevations that show roof top mechanical equipment screens, gutters,
conductor heads, downspouts, signage, sun screens, mechanical grilles, louvers, other
openings, expansion joint locations.
d) Major Building Sections that show the relationships to floor, ceiling, roof, and parapets. Target
elevation to be 100’-0”.
e)
Reflected Ceiling Plans
f)
Large Scale Plans:



Typical Classroom that

shows all of the

casework, coat racks,
visual display boards, and 
furniture layout.

Toilet Rooms

Administrative Offices
Fire Control Rooms

Computer Labs
Library

Science Labs
Gymnasium
Stage/Platform
Vocational Shops
g) Major Details
h) Casework Elevations (typical classrooms)
i)
Stair sections that show number of risers and treads, handrails, and stair heights. Stairs should
be dimensioned from the wall and meet the code requirements for headroom and landing
widths.
j)
Structural Plans that show the basic system that show the primary beam lines and building grid
lines as well as span directions, dimensioned column locations, and expansion joints.
k) Electrical Plans that show the room numbers, grid lines, panel locations, device layouts and
telephone boards.
l)
Electrical Reflected Ceiling Plan with the lighting layout.
District Procedures
Page 5 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
m) Mechanical Plans that show the room numbers, grid lines, equipment locations, duct and shaft
locations, fire alarm, clocks, and bells.
2.
Provide a Narrative describing the following intent:
a)
Reconstruction and repair required as a result of asbestos abatement or other work preceding
General Construction.
b) Systems Descriptions for:
i)
Building shell finish materials (include samples of unique materials)
ii) Wall types and construction
iii) Roof systems including typical flashing and termination
iv) HVAC System(s)
v) Fire Alarm
vi) Clock & Bell
vii) Primary Electrical (for remodel or additions with primary electrical changes)
3.
Outline Specification
a)
Include Table of Contents (all sections to be included in final specification).
b) Each outline spec section should list all materials and manufacturers as well as the general
areas of product use and the areas of product applications.
4.
Provide a finishes board for review by the District (if applicable).
5.
Probable Bid Cost Estimate that reflects the level of development of the plans. Minimally provide:
a)
Quantity survey with unit price type estimate.
b) Organize estimate by the CSI format.
c)
6.
Discuss any potential allowances, unit prices, or alternates.
Updated Design & Construction Schedule. Discussion should also start to evaluate:
a)
Asbestos Abatement
b) Telecom Installation
c)
Furniture Move-in
d) Long Lead Time Items
E. Preliminary Construction Documents Design Review Deliverables:
1.
Provide the following drawings as appropriate for the project. Refer to Drawing Standards section
for drawing format and room numbering.
a)
Code Analysis
b) Site Plan
c)
Landscape Plan
d) Demolition plans (should be separate from construction plans)
e)
Overall floor plan w/ primary dimensions.
f)
Roof plan
District Procedures
Page 6 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
g) Reflected Ceiling Plan
h) Enlarged Plans
i)
Exterior Elevations
j)
Primary Building Sections
k) Primary Wall Sections
l)
Interior elevations
m) Detail Plans for the Kitchen, Library, a Typical Classroom, and the Administration Area
n) Schedules—Athletic Equipment, Door Schedule, Finish Schedule, and Kitchen Equipment
Schedule.
o) Coordinated consultant plans
p) Structural Plans
q) Mechanical Plans
i)
Large scale layouts of mechanical rooms.
ii) Mechanical Equipment Schedules
iii) Plumbing Fixture Schedules
iv) Mechanical Calculations: (two (2) complete sets)
r)

Water service size (if applicable)

Sewer service size (if applicable)

Fixture unit calculations. (two (2) complete sets)

Gas consumption calculations. (two (2) complete sets)
Electrical Plans
i)
Large scale electrical equipment room
ii) Light fixture schedules
iii) See electrical STANDARDS for additional requirements
iv) Electrical Calculations: (two (2) complete sets)
s)
Kitchen Consultant Plans
2.
Specifications, including a Hardware specification with a Hardware Schedule.
3.
Probable Bid Cost Estimate
a)
Organize estimate by the CSI format.
b) Confirm all allowances, unit prices, and alternates.
c)
4.
Confirm all AHJ Submission Fees with DPS.
Updated Design & Construction Schedule. Discussion should also determine:
a)
Asbestos Abatement
b) Telecom Installation
c)
Furniture Move-in
District Procedures
Page 7 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
d) Long Lead Time Items
e)
2.03
Bidding Dates
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS / AHJ PERMIT SUBMISSION:
A. Project Architect makes final corrections and submits final documents to the District.
B. Project Architect submits final documents for permitting through the appropriate jurisdictions. Some
reviews are coordinated through the State of Colorado, and some are through the Denver Building
Department. A copy of each application must be submitted to the District for their records.
C. The Project Architect will submit to the District a receipt for submission fee payment for straight passthrough reimbursement on the next Pay Application.
D. DPS reviews schedule and plan status and determines a “document release date”, “pre-bid site visitation
date” and “bid opening date”. Note: coordinate dates with other DPS projects and (if possible) with
other school district’s bidding plans.
E. DPS requests “advertisement for bids” be prepared.
PART 3
3.01
1.
This document should be included in the bid sets issued by the architect.
2.
All of the dates, including the pre-bid site visitation” should be included in the advertisement.
3.
Deadline for submittal of requests for substitutions must be included in advertisement.
BID PHASE
TYPICAL PROJECT BID PROCESS:
A. Project Architect must upload electronic/PDF version of Contract Documents to a location contractors
can download when provided a User Name and password. This information is provided to the District
several days prior to the pre-bid meeting with the General Contractors.
B. Pre-Bid Site Walk (must be conducted for all additions and renovations).
1.
Project Architect to take notes and include items of discussion and list of attendees in the
forthcoming addendum.
C. Request for Substitutions can only be made before Bid Opening Day, per terms listed in DPS
procurement documents.
D. Release of Addenda
3.02
1.
The Project Architect prepares addenda and submits to the District for issuance.
2.
Addenda to be issued for all clarification and/or change items during bid period. Include any
information requested by individual Contractors over the phone. Advise Contractors to look in
addenda for interpretations. Avoid answer of significant questions by phone, etc.
3.
Number all addenda items (i.e. Addenda 1, Item 1 or Addenda item 1.01).
4.
Cloud any revision and place the correct delta number next to the cloud on specifications or
drawings.
5.
Place the delta number, date, revision description in the title block of the drawings.
BID OPENING AND CONTRACT AWARD PROCESS:
A. The Bid Opening will be conducted by DPS at the place and time designated in the Advertisement for
Bids.
B. The District and the Project Architect will evaluate bid proposals and make a recommendation to the
District’s Board of Education or other approval authority.
District Procedures
Page 8 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
C. The Project Architect will deliver to the District:
1.
(1) electronic copy of the consolidated document set (inclusive of all changes during Bidding).
2.
(1) full size and (2) half size hard copies of the consolidated document set that are stamped.
3.
(2) hard copies of the consolidated Project Manuals.
D. When authorized by the Senior Director of Facility Modernization, and after the DPS Legal review, the
DPS Office of Design and Construction will issue the GC Agreement for Contractor signature.
1.
The agreement must list all contract documents including addenda.
2.
Include the issue dates of all documents.
E. The Contractor will then return (3) original copies of the Agreement, Bond, and Insurance to the DPS
Office of Design and Construction.
F. The District will:
PART 4
4.01
1.
Review Bonds and Insurance and verify that amounts are in conformance with the General
Conditions.
2.
If the Bond, Insurance, and signed/sealed Agreements appear to be in order, the documents will be
routed to Office Support for creation of a “Red Folder” package that includes an Executive
Summary (if contract requires Director of Facilty Management or above approval), legal review email, and Senior Director of Facility Modernization approval.
3.
Upon approval by DPS Legal, the District will cause the Notice to Proceed to be prepared and this
will be forwarded to the Contractor for signature and return.
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE (GENERAL)
A. Attendees:
1.
Contractor
2.
Architect & engineers
3.
DPS
4.
DPS Safety Department
5.
Facility manager and/or principal (optional)
B. Documentation:
1.
The project architect to keep minutes of meeting and distribute to contractor and DPS.
2.
Document attendees, general discussion items and procedures review.
C. Points to be discussed (minimum):
1.
Remodeling and addition projects:
a)
Review construction sequence and building disruptions.
b) Scheduling of disruptions of utilities.
c)
Review of construction fencing, barricades, dust-proof partitions, etc.
d) Review of contractor access and staging.
District Procedures
Page 9 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
2.
All projects:
a)
Construction fencing locations
b) Project safety
c)
Contractor’s office facilities.
d) General scheduling.
3.
4.02
DPSs to review pre-construction checklist for additional items.
PRE-PHASE CONFERENCES (START OF NEW PORTION OR TRADE ON SITE)
A. The purpose of this meeting is to review the project requirements with each major trade prior to their
beginning work on the project site and to verify their understanding of the specifications and drawings.
B. Contractor to schedule conferences.
C. Attendees:
1.
DPS
2.
Architect
3.
Engineers and sub-consultants as appropriate
4.
Contractor
5.
Trade contractor
6.
DPS Quality Control/Quality Assurance
D. Architect to keep minutes and distribute.
4.03
ARCHITECT SITE VISITATIONS:
A. Frequency:
1.
As required by A/E agreement.
2.
As required to resolve construction issues.
B. Critical required observations shall be conducted as defined the A/E agreement.
C. Consultant observations:
1.
Consultants will observe work when a particular trade or portion of the work is starting (to
determine if initial work complies with contract requirements).
2.
Periodic observations shall be conducted (to verify contract compliance and monitor
workmanship).
3.
As required to resolve construction issues.
D. Site visit protocol:
1.
Schedule visits when work is in progress.
2.
Contact project superintendent upon arrival (if not present, notify trade contractor superintendent
or forman).
3.
Document:
a)
Status (progress of each phase of the work)
b) Deficiencies
District Procedures
Page 10 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
c)
Corrections required:
i)
Clearly specify expected corrective action.
ii) Specify who is responsible for action (i.e. Architect to provide PR, or contractor to
replace…”).
d) Weather
e)
4.04
Visitation date
4.
Advise general contractor of problems and corrections required before leaving site.
5.
Send site observation report to DPS and contractor within two days of site visitation (consultants to
submit to A/E).
PAY REQUESTS TO BE PROCESSED BY ARCHITECT PRIOR TO SUBMISSION TO DPS.
A. Architect to review amounts requested with DPS and contractor at project meeting immediately
preceding pay request submission.
B. Architect to review and sign contractor’s pay application and forward to DPS for processing.
C. DPS will REVIEW THE PAYMENT APPLICATION PER THE Payment Verification Matrix and
forward to Office Support for processing.
4.05
1.
Any changes in contract completion dates corresponds to change orders extending contract
completion.
2.
No change orders are to be included in pay applications which have not been completely processed.
CHANGES
A. Use AIA standard format (or similar) for change request documentation.
1.
Proposal request (PR)
a)
To be approved by DPS prior to issue. Copy DPS at time of issue.
b) Preferred method of initiating construction change.
c)
To be used when there is sufficient time to review costs and approve change without delaying
progress of the work.
d) To be used when the change is not essential.
e)
2.
To be used when various solutions may be available to remedy a construction problem.
Construction change directive (CCD)
a)
To be issued only after approval by DPS.
b) To be issued only when:
i)
Construction delays would result from issue of a PR.
ii) There are no options other than to make the change to construction.
3.
Architect’s Supplemental Instructions (ASI)
a)
To be issued only after approval by DPS.
b) To be issued for no time/cost impact clarifications.
B. Architect is to document all changes (whether initiated by architect or by others).
1.
Do not combine unrelated items on a single change request (PR or ccd).
District Procedures
Page 11 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
2.
Include all components of a change on one change request (i.e. If change involves various trades
and disciplines, all items required to complete the anticipated change are to be included in a single
change request (PR or ccd).
3.
If not initiated by architect, review with DPS as to type of change document to be used (PR or ccd).
4.
All changes shall be complete including appropriate details, standards of performance and
references to project specifications.
5.
Change item referencing:
a)
Architect to sequentially number all change documents. (PR 01, PR 02, etc.)
b) Architect to cross reference all preceding documents relating to change, such as “request for
information”, “supplemental instructions”, etc.
c)
Architect to document with PR or CCD all change items not initiated by the Architect. Change
items which started as request for Supplemental Information, Architects Supplemental
Instruction, or as a Contractor’s Change Request are to be converted to PR format when they
become a cost or time issue.
C. Architect to prepare change cost & time estimate at the time of change initiation and forward to DPS.
D. DPS shall track change items in budgets as soon as a change issue is known.
E. Change order (preparation and processing):
PART 5
1.
The contractor will determine when change items have reached a sufficient number to justify
processing a change order.
2.
Change order is prepared by the DPS after review from the Architect and contractor about items to
be included in the change order.
3.
Use DPS change order form (electronic copy is available).
4.
Consolidate several “change items” in a single change order.
5.
Architect shall number each item in the change order and cross reference it to the initiating pr (ccd).
Example: item co-4.01: (description of work) as identified in PR-17. This would refer to the first
item in change order #4.
6.
Contractor signs change order and sends to Architect for signatures.
7.
Contractor sends signed change order to DPS for processing.
8.
DPS to verify that notification is sent to the contractor when change order processing is complete
(p.o. Modification returned from purchasing) so that he may invoice for the change items.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Architect to submit to the District (1) thumb drive or CD that includes electronic AutoCAD and PDF files of
the record drawings as well as the Operation and Maintenance Manuals (PDF or Word Format). Follow the
District’s Drawing and Specification Standards (00 00 03).
B. Submit (1) complete set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in a 3-ring binder and deliver to the
project’s school building. If multiple buildings are within a project; provide individual manuals for each
building. All manuals (electronic and printed) should include the following:
1.
Product Warranty for not less than 24 months.
2.
Manufacturer’s complete maintenance instructions including routine and preventive maintenance
schedule for each component.
3.
Wiring diagrams and schematics where applicable.
District Procedures
Page 12 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
4.
PART 6
Manufacturer’s printed operating instructions.
POST CONSTRUCTION
A. 9-month inspection to be conducted by the Project Architect, Contractor and District.
1.
Architect to prepare list of items requiring correction.
2.
Contractor to make corrections under warranty.
3.
DPS & Architect to verify corrections have been made.
B. 17-month inspection to be conducted by architect, contractor and DPS.
1.
Architect to prepare list of items requiring correction.
2.
Contractor to make corrections under warranty.
3.
DPS & architect to verify corrections have been made.
District Procedures
Page 13 of 13
Procedures
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 00 03
DRAWING & SPECIFICATION STANDARDS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL DRAWING GUIDELINES
DRAWING SIZE AND FORMAT (BID-READY AND RECORD DRAWINGS)
A. DPS Standard Title Block to appear on every sheet.
1.
Electronic copy available from DPS.
2.
Place title block in lower right corner of each sheet.
a)
3.
DPS title block label shall be placed on right edge of title block, vertically on every sheet.
DPS title block label as follows:
a)
All record drawings shall be labeled with DPS title block label accordingly.
b) File label is as follows:
Building ID – DPS Parent Project number – DPS Project Code – Sheet Number
i)

Example: 458-8513-ME-E.01
ii) Only (one) DPS Project Code is used for the overall projected. Refer to the following list for the
project codes:
DPS PROJECT
CODES
DEFINITION OF CODES
OR
ORIGINAL RECORD DRAWINGS
AD
ADDITIONS
RVI
RENOVATIONS / INTERIOR (ex: finish
improvements, updates w/no structural
change)
RVE
RENOVATIONS / EXTERIOR
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 1 of 10
Drawing and Specification Standards
Update: April 2016
4.
ARV or ADA
ADA RENOVATIONS
RI
REMODEL / INTERIOR
(ex: physical, w/
structural changes; walls, etc..)
RE
REMODEL / EXTERIOR
HV
HVAC IMPROVEMENT/REPLACEMENT
ME
MECHANICAL
IMPROVEMENT/REPLACEMENT
PL
PLUMBING
EL
ELECTRICAL
IRG
IRRIGATION
RF
ROOF
IMPROVEMENT/REPLACEMENT/REPAIR
UT
UTILITY
IMPROVEMENT/REPLACEMENT/REPAIR
SI
SITE IMPROVEMENTS (ex: Learning
Landscape, Parking lots, etc…)
TO or SS
TOPO – SITE SURVEYS
MOD
MODULAR BUILDINGS
COT
COTTAGE BUILDINGS
ST
EXTERNAL STORAGE BUILDINGS
(NOT ATTACHED TO OR APART OF
MAIN BLDG)
MS
MISCELLANEOUS SETS NOT
DESIGNATED OR FALL INTO A
PROJECT CODE
IMG
IMAGE REFERENCES FOR PROJECTS
(ELECTRONIC FILES ONLY)
FDS
FIRE SUPRESSION AND OR FIRE
DECTION
SGN
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
NUMBERING ONLY)
SOL
SOLAR PANELS
(ROOM
Leave three inch (3”) minimum empty space above title block for the documentation of changes and asbuilt notes and/or notations.
a)
All drawings produced at a scale to be legible at one-half reduction.
b) All CAD drawing must use National CAD Standard Layers naming conventions and National CAD
Standard pen weights.
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 2 of 10
Update: April 2016
1.02
DRAWING CONTENT
A. Plan Drawings (All large or small scale Project Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical & Structural Plans, Detail
Plans, Reflected Ceiling Plans, etc.) shall contain:
1.
North Arrow
a)
If building is oriented other than true North, show True North and Reference North on all plans.
b) All references to compass directions in the documents (i.e. building elevations) are to be titled to refer
to Reference North.
1.03
2.
Scale
3.
Graphic Scale
4.
Column Lines (or Building Grid Lines)
5.
Room Numbers
6.
Key Plan (if entire building is not represented on the sheet)
ROOM NUMBERING STANDARD
A. Room numbering plans shall be approved by the Space Management Office. All room number changes shall
reflect on the Record Drawings and shall be included in close-out documents.
1.
Rooms shall be numbered in a logical sequence which will permit the building visitors to determine from
room numbers that they are getting closer (or farther) from the desired room.
2.
Additions to existing buildings shall have rooms numbered to extend the existing room numbering scheme
where possible. No changes to existing building room numbers are permitted without the approval of the
Space Management Office.
3.
Room numbering shall match the fire alarm control panel and DFD (Denver Fire Department) door tags
mounted on door frame above door as well as the DPS Master Drawings Standards.
4.
Rooms with more than one entry shall have DFD room sign at entries. Center sign on head of door frame.
B. Verify room numbering in existing buildings prior to setting numbers for remodeling or additions.
C. All rooms shall be numbered; all attempts shall be made to use the best scenario of keeping as many current
numbers in place as possible. For new buildings, all number series shall be required to follow DPS numbering
process.
D. All numbering shall also meet Denver Fire’s requirement that every exterior door shall be tagged (inside &
outside), including all doors on the roof.
E. All rooms to have individual numbers including:
F.
1.
Corridors
2.
Mechanical Rooms
Room numbers shall indicate the floor upon which the room is located. Floors shall be designated per IBC floor
determination. Room number series shall be as follows:
1.
Basement – 000 series
2.
Sub-Basement – 0000 series
3.
Garden Level – 00 series
4.
First Floor – 100 series
5.
Second Floor – 200 series
6.
Roof/Penthouses – Shall be numbered with one series above the floor immediately below (if above second
floor; penthouses shall be numbered with 300 series).
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 3 of 10
Update: April 2016
7.
Mezzanines – Shall be consistent with primary floor series (ex: first floor mezz = 100 series).
8.
Rooms internal to other rooms such as walk-in closets, offices, etc. accessed from a room are numbered
with the main room only number followed by an alpha character(s). (ex: main room 100 – has internal
room(s) 100A, 100B both have an independent door). If a room is within an internal room it will use the
internal room number followed by an alpha character (ex: internal room 101A – has a sub-internal room(s)
101AA).
9.
Storage rooms and/or closets not designed as a walk-in, do not need to be numbered unless required for
location of fire detection or sensor.
10. Modulars/Cottages – shall be numbered beginning with an even count number plus ten beyond the last
number used on the first floor and stay sequential for all additional buildings. (Ex: First floor ends with 127
– modular #1 will start with 140 and ends with 146, modular #2 will start with 150).
G. Wings shall not be numbered with prefixes except when approved by the Space Management Office.
H. Numbering of rooms shall be planned to permit building additions at the end of winds to be constructed and
numbered without changing original room numbers. Alternating room numbers on opposite sides of corridor
are acceptable. Room numbering shall be required to stay in sequence; do not jump series of numbers to
separate wings of floors, but if needed a number may be omitted. A number may only be used once per
building, per floor, an internal or sub-internal room with an alpha character will make it the unique number
being used once per floor.
I.
Stairways shall be designed with letters and designated the same on all floors accessed. Example: “Stair A the
identification of a stairway shall be the same on ALL corresponding floors. (Ex: First floor “Stair A”, second
floor “Stair A”).
J.
Corridors, lobbies and other spaces which are not generally identified with signage shall be assigned numbers
and be numbered consistent with rooms. The main corridor or lobby shall start the corresponding series (Ex:
main corridor first floor “100”, main corridor second floor “200”). Building support rooms accessed from
corridors and hallways will be numbered accordingly to the corridor / hallway id (ex: Corridor 100 has a
restroom, mechanical room, custodial closet, etc…. would be 100A, 100B, 100C, etc…. and sub-internal rooms
to those rooms would be 100AA, 100AB, etc… if applicable).
K. Room numbering plans shall be approved by the Facility Space Planning Office Manager. All room number
changes shall reflect on the record drawing drawings and shall be included in close-out documents.
L. Occupancy in assembly areas shall have “maximum” signage to reflect the DPS day-to-day standard. Note:
Assembly occupancy counts area approximations intended for day-to-day internal DPS operations and shall not
be used for design.
a)
Assembly spaces include:

All purpose room

Auditorium

Balcony

Cafeteria

Community room(s)

Main gymnasium(s)(excluding auxiliary gymnasiums)

Gymnasium bleacher(s)(including linear benches and/or preformed seats)

Libraries(LMCs/IMCs)

Outdoor bleacher(s)(including linear benches and/or preformed seats)

Swimming pool

Swimming pool deck
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 4 of 10
Update: April 2016
b) Basic calculations for the day-to-day maximum assembly occupancy are as follows:

Auditoriums, Balconies, Bleachers [indoor or outdoor] with fixed or preformed individual
seats
o

Auditoriums and Balconies without fixed seating
o

Main basketball court area [boundary] divided by 7
Library [LMC/IMC]
o

Total Room square feet (wall to wall) divided by 15
Main Gymnasiums
o

Linear feet is divided by 18” times the number of rows
All Purpose, Cafetoriums, Cafeterias, Enclosed Courtyards, Community Rooms, Swimming
Pool Decks
o

Total room square feet minus 3 foot perimeter but to front edge of stage or balcony
divided by 7
Bleachers [indoor or outdoor] without preformed seating
o

*No calculation, total of actual seat count
Total room square feet (wall to wall) divided by 50
Swimming Pool
o
Total water area square feet (pool edge) divided by 50
Note: *Where a calculation results in a fraction of an occupant greater than .5; the
occupant count is rounded up. Accessibility for individuals with disabilities is managed
separately and is not a part of this effort.
c)
Signs indicating maximum occupant loads are required by the code in assembly spaces with more than
50 occupants.
M. Square feet in each room (net area from interior face of walls).
1.04
REFERENCING
A. Consecutively number all sheets (example: “m-2.1 sheet 23 of 45”).
B. Number all drawings including plans, sections, and details so that any Drawing can be referenced by reference
mark or note to other Drawings in the set.
C. Provide reference marks or notes on Drawings to identify where sections and details were taken.
D. Grid Lines:
1.
Provide column lines referenced to the building structure
2.
Column lines to appear on all Plan Drawings:
a)
Project Architectural
b) Structural
c)
Mechanical
d) Electrical
3.
Reference exterior walls and/or major building offsets where column lines do not exist.
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 5 of 10
Update: April 2016
1.05
PROJECT ARCHITECT COORDINATION
A. Coordinate format and content of Drawings:
1.
Consultant Coordination.
2.
Plan Orientation Coordination:
a)
Same orientation for Project Architectural and Consultant Drawings.
b) Same orientation for large and small scale Drawings.
1.06
3.
Scale Coordination: Project Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Floor Plans shall be drawn at the
same scale(s).
4.
Project Architect to review drawings to eliminate vague “by-others” notations and to assure that work is
shown in the portion of the Drawings that the trade involved will be using most. (I.e. notes on mechanical
drawings referred to “by Electrical” should be shown on electrical drawings.
DRAWING REVIEWS
A. DPS will record comments for backchecking.
B. Project Architect will return all “red-marked” drawings to the DPS no later than the time of the next review
submittal and at delivery of bid ready documents.
C. No variations from the approved drawing standards are allowed.
1.07
BID-READY DRAWINGS
A. Label every sheet (above title block), “issue for bid and construction” with date of issue noted.
B. All drawings to have same issue date.
PART 2
2.01
SPECIFIC DRAWING REQUIREMENTS:
ARCHITECTURAL:
A. Cover and Abreviations/Notes sheet shall include:
1.
Project location map
2.
Building data
a)
Floor areas, area separations, etc.
b) All code related information as required by Building Department
3.
Index to drawings
4.
Materials legend (purge any materials not used in the Drawings)
5.
Symbols legend including room and door numbering symbols
a)
Standard symbols shall be used throughout drawings
b) Include mech. and elec. symbols on the first sheet of their respective sections
c)
6.
Purge any symbols not used in the Drawings
Name, address and phone number & fax number and point of contact of A/E and all Consultants.
B. Site Plan(s) shall include:
1.
Soils test information:
a)
Hole locations
b) Soils information which might affect the cost of construction
c)
Statement that complete soils report is available for inspection at offices of Owner and A/E
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 6 of 10
Update: April 2016
2.
All existing underground utilities (Manholes to include rim, inlet and outlet invert elevations).
3.
Property lines
4.
Easements
5.
Adjacent streets
6.
Building location dimensioned from property line
7.
All site improvements
8.
Existing and new contours
9.
Grading plan(s) shall be separate from other site development plans
a)
Elevation references (USGS datum or Denver Datum to Finish First Floor = (100’-0”)
b) Provide spot elevations at critical grade conditions such as “top of curb”, “flow line”, etc.
2.02
SURVEY DRAWING:
A. DPS will provide a reproducible or electronic copy of the survey drawing for inclusion in the Construction
Drawings. Label drawing "FOR INFORMATION ONLY".
2.03
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS:
A. SHEET S-1 (first structural sheet of set):
1.
General Notes:
2.
Along right side of sheet include in a General Notes block:
a)
Design loads - List all design live loads used in structural calculations
b) Floor loads
c)
Roof loads
d) Wind loads
3.
e)
Seismic zone
f)
Any other pertinent design loads
Material strengths - List strengths of structural materials used in design calculations
a)
Concrete strengths
b) Reinforcing steel strengths
c)
Structural steel strengths (and weld strengths)
d) Masonry mortar strengths
e)
4.
Other structural materials
Structural notes - include general structural notes on:
a)
Foundation systems
b) Drilled piers
c)
Column
d) Masonry bearing wall notes
5.
2.04
Symbols Legend
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS:
A. SHEET M-1 (first mechanical sheet):
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 7 of 10
Update: April 2016
1.
Mechanical Site Plan
2.
Symbols Legend (purge any symbols not used in the Drawings)
3.
General Mechanical Notes
B. Separate HVAC Plans from Plumbing Plans
C. Coordination:
2.05
1.
Provide match-lines or other means to identify the continuation of mechanical piping and duct work
between various partial plans.
2.
Include column line reference numbers as shown on Project Architectural Drawings.
3.
Show room numbers matching Project Architectural.
PLUMBING DRAWINGS:
A. Show all supply and waste lines including valves, cleanouts, shock absorbers, unions, etc.
B. Isometrics are required for:
2.06
1.
Toilets
2.
Kitchens
HVAC DRAWINGS:
A. Show all HVAC components including:
1.
Registers & grills
2.
Ductwork and devices including dampers, mixing boxes, fire dampers and other duct connected devices
3.
HVAC piping
B. Air Handling equipment:
2.07
1.
All HVAC equipment including boilers, condensers, chillers, etc.
2.
Show sections and/or elevations at large air handling units.
3.
Plans and sections through Boiler Rooms and other Mechanical Rooms.
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS:
A. SHEET E-1 (first electrical sheet):
1.
Electrical Site Plan
2.
Symbols Legend (purge any symbols not used in the Drawings)
3.
General Electrical Notes
B. Other Electrical
1.
Separate Power Plans, Lighting Plans and Fire Alarm / Communications Plans
2.
Coordination:
a)
Provide match-lines or other means to identify the continuation of electrical piping between various
partial plans.
b) Include column & grid line reference numbers as shown on Project Architectural Drawings.
c)
PART 3
3.01
Room Numbers as shown on Project Architectural Drawings.
GENERAL PROJECT MANUAL / SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES
GENERAL
A. All specifications shall be submitted during Design Reviews.
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 8 of 10
Update: April 2016
B. All revisions made after the Construction Document Phase shall be clearly marked by bolding, underlining or
other method to indicate all changes made including deletions and additions.
3.02
FORMAT
A.
Produce specifications on 8-1/2" x 11" sheets
B. CSI Format
C. Project Cover must exactly match the drawing’s title block information. Cover format shall include:
PROJECT MANUAL
for the construction of
<project title>
<SCHOOL NAME>
PARENT PROJECT NUMBER <0000>
<school address>
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
School District Number 1
Denver, Colorado 80202
<date> (same as drawings)
<A/E NAME AND ADDRESS>
<set number>
3.03
ORGANIZATION
A. Organize the Manual according to the index contained in the General Conditions of the Contract.
B. Procedural and Contract Documents will be furnished by the District’s Project Manager for inclusion in the
Project Manual. Documents will include:
1.
Advertisement for Bids
2.
DPS PROJECT MANAGER will furnish dates to be inserted in Advertisement.
3.
ARCHITECT will insert information.
4.
Instructions to Bidders
5.
Base Proposal
6.
Bid Bond
7.
Agreement
8.
Contractor’s Performance Bond
9.
Notice to Proceed
10. Notice of Contractor’s Settlement
11. General Conditions of the Contract
C. Technical Specifications are to follow the Contract and Procedural Documents.
D. Page Formate to include specification section numbers and page numbers in the heading or footing of each
page.
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 9 of 10
Update: April 2016
3.04
REFERENCING
A. All references to recognized industry standards such as ASTM, National Bureau of Standards, Federal
Specifications, etc. shall be identified by specific type, grade, class, year, etc.
B. Where recognized national standards are used, the A/E shall make copies of such standards available to the DPS
Project Manager and the Contractor.
C. Individual specification sections shall contain numbers or other referencing devices in order to specify location
of specific sub-paragraphs, subsections, etc.
D. Nomenclature:
3.05
1.
Coordinate nomenclature between the various portions of the Specification.
2.
Eliminate references to "General Contractor", "Mechanical Contractor", "Subcontractor", etc. Use the term
"Contractor" for all references to the entity performing the work.
3.
Where reference to a specific trade is required to produce proper results, use the term "Trade Contractor" or
provide statements such as "by trade performing work under this section".
PROJECT ARCHITECT COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Specifications with Drawings, Bid Form(s), General Conditions and other established Contract
Document forms.
B. General Conditions Modification
1.
All modifications to the General Conditions shall be made in the Supplemental General Conditions.
2.
All changes to the General Conditions shall be approved in writing by DPS.
C. Supplemental General Conditions
3.06
1.
Prepared by Architect.
2.
Approved by DPS.
SUBMITAL REQUIREMENTS
A. List all required submittals, testing requirements, spare parts, etc. in the same subsection of Part 1 of each
specification section.
B. Prepare a summary of all above requirements and compile them into a table to be inserted in appropriate section
of Division 1.
3.07
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Product Based Specification
1.
Two products minimum.
2.
Include as many critical performance-based criteria as possible.
3.
Include minimum information required for approval of equals.
B. Performance Based Specification
1.
Specify critical characteristics only.
2.
Include (minimum) and (maximum) where appropriate.
District Procedures
00 00 03
Page 10 of 10
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 10 00
GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATION
PART 0 - PURPOSE
A. Describe broad guidelines for design of schools.
B. Establish materials qualities and applications.
C. Describe materials and conditions which do not easily fit into specific specification sections.
D. See specific sections of Design and Construction Standards for additional requirements.
PART 1 - SAFETY
A. Safety is a primary concern. All design work shall consider the safety of building occupants.
B. Follow the District’s Construction Safety Standards and the DPS Safety Department.
C. Specific Issues:
1.
Fire extinguisher cabinets - see Section 10 44 00.
2.
Exterior Conditions
a.
Exterior walking surfaces subject to wet or freezing conditions shall be non-slip textured.
b.
Exterior stair nosings shall be bullnose, broomed finishes (no embedded nosings).
3.
Interior Stair Nosings – non-slip, resilient tread / nosings
4.
Stair Railings:
5.
a.
Avoid open railings – provide solid walls between adjacent flights of stairs.
b.
Avoid open guardrails at landings.
Floor level changes:
a.
By ramp if less than 1’-0” (code requirement).
b.
By ramp wherever possible (ADA compliance).
PART 2 - MAINTENANCE
A. Low maintenance materials shall be used throughout construction. Exposed surfaces should be resistant to damage
and easily cleaned.
B. All public areas (exterior and interior) should be considered as subject to vandalism. Graffiti and intentional
damage should be considered as possible in these areas.
C. Exterior Maintenance:
1.
Provide for snow removal and storage.
2.
Provide for trash pick-up by front loading trash truck.
3.
Provide for maximum sod areas mowable by large tractor mower (limit hand mower areas).
PART 3 - ASBESTOS REMEDIATION
A. The DPS Environmental Services will arrange for testing to determine whether existing roofing materials are
asbestos containing.
B. The DPS Environmental Services will determine whether removal of asbestos roofing materials is to be in the
construction contract or will be handled under separate contract.
C. Consult with the DPS Environmental Services before specifying removal of asbestos-containing materials.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 1 of 31
General Design Considerations
Update: April 2016
PART 4 - MATERIALS
A. Exterior Finish Materials
1.
2.
3.
Walls:
a.
Hard, durable, low maintenance materials such as brick, pre-cast concrete, etc.
b.
Cleanable materials; removal of graffiti may be necessary.
Exterior Doors:
a.
painted hollow metal
b.
half-light or solid
Salvage Materials
a.
A/E shall coordinate with DPS Maintenance through DPS to determine what materials and products are to
be salvaged for the District.
b.
When project involves significant number of items to be salvaged, the A/E shall develop a schedule of
those items:
(1.) Indicate original location, final location, item description and any special notations required to assure
proper removal and reinstallation or delivery to Owner.
(2.) Identify items requiring routine maintenance, special storage requirements, cleaning before storage
and/or before reuse in the project.
c.
A/E shall distinctly define differing salvage requirement including:
(1.) Items to be removed by Contractor and reinstalled under the Contract.
(2.) Items to be removed by Contractor and delivered to the Owner.
(3.) Items to be removed by Contractor and stored by Contractor for Owner collection.
(4.) Items to be removed by Owner.
(5.) Items to be partially salvaged by Owner with remainder becoming property of the Contractor.
d.
Where items are to be salvaged by the Contractor for the Owner, documents shall state if Contractor is to
deliver or store or stockpile the materials. If Contractor is to stockpile or store materials, a maximum
period of storage shall be specified so that the Contractor knows how long he must maintain the materials
in a suitable conditions before delivery to or collection by the Owner.
PART 5 - BUILDING AREAS WITH SPECIFIC NEEDS
A. Entries
1.
Security Lighting: Provide security lighting at all building entries. Break resistant materials (tempered glass).
2.
Exterior stairs to below grade entrances shall be enclosed with doors at grade level.
3.
Avoid steps at entries.
B. Exterior Walls
1.
Durable, cleanable materials such as brick (no block), concrete, etc.
2.
Projecting Elements - avoid any elements which would assist in the climbing of building walls.
3.
Minimum parapet height (above adjacent grade) shall be 14' - 0".
C. Classroom Technology
1.
Refer to Division 27 Standards.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 2 of 31
Update: April 2016
D. Furnishings
1.
Pre-manufactured plastic laminate-faced casework is to be used for general classroom and office cabinetry.
2.
Areas of frequent high moisture should not use plastic laminate-faced casework.
3.
Do not use premium color laminates.
4.
Maximum width of cabinets shall be 48” wide.
5.
Avoid glass doors, and under-cabinet appliances unless approved in writing by DPS.
6.
Architect shall coordinate all plumbing and electrical requirements with the casework, including heights, cutouts and any required grommets.
7.
Architect shall coordinate cabinets that are to have a lock function. Generally, all cabinets shall be lockable
except under-sink cabinets.
8.
Countertops
9.
a.
Provide backsplash at all adjoining surfaces, including ends, minimum 4” in height.
b.
Specify all Countertops under one specification section (Division 12-12 36 00).
c.
High School Science labs require chemical resistant tops.
d.
Middle School science labs require chemical resistant plastic laminate countertops.
Architect to coordinate ADA (adult and children’s) requirements for countertops used as work surfaces and
under-cabinet equipment.
a.
To provide accessibility at sink cabinets, place faucet on side of sink instead of at back of sink, and do not
provide wheelchair knee space beneath sink.
10. A maximum of 5 laminate face colors are to be used per school. Contrast countertops with cabinetry.
11. Types of countertops
a.
General use: Standard plastic laminate
b.
High school chemistry labs: Chemical resistant resin or solid surface
c.
Middle school chemistry labs: Chemical resistant plastic laminate
d.
High abuse areas (high abuse areas vary according to specific project needs): Scratch resistant plastic
laminate
e.
Restrooms: Solid surface
f.
Exterior window sills shall not be plastic laminate (use solid cast plastic material)
g.
Wall caps on half walls shall be plastic laminate
12. Pre-manufactured plastic laminate-faced casework is to be used for general classroom and office cabinetry.
13. Areas of frequent high moisture should not use plastic laminate-faced casework.
14. Do not use premium color laminates.
15. Maximum width of cabinets shall be 48” wide.
16. Avoid glass doors, and under-cabinet appliances unless approved in writing by DPS.
17. Architect shall coordinate all plumbing and electrical requirements with the casework, including heights, cutouts and any required grommets.
18. Architect shall coordinate cabinets that are to have a lock function. Generally, all cabinets shall be lockable
except under-sink cabinets.
19. Coordinate heights of countertops with ADA requirements.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 3 of 31
Update: April 2016
20. Radius corners are required in high traffic areas.
21. Architect shall coordinate seating locations, both in folded and deployed condition with game and athletic court
line painting and size requirements. Provide minimum 5’ safety zone beyond court.
22. Architect shall coordinate with DPS, the required seating capacities for each type of school, as the specific
requirements will vary by type and location.
23. Architect shall coordinate any power requirements with the electrical engineer. Any telescoping seating over
six rows high (7 or more) shall be powered.
24. Pool areas shall have aluminum framing only, and seats made of plastic or aluminum, and will be only manually
operated.
25. Architect shall coordinate school colors and logos (where available) with that of standard options for seating.
26. Architect shall coordinate ADA requirements with telescoping seating.
27. Seating shall be lockable in its folded and open configuration to avoid accidental deployment or tampering.
Partial deployment of rows shall not be allowed.
28. Locks shall be keyed and allow for replacement cylinders.
29. Architect shall coordinate anchor methods with substrate and finished flooring materials as well as wall
anchorage with framing and materials. Provide reinforcement details where substrate is otherwise inadequate
for anchorage.
30. Architect shall confirm requirements for aisles with the Denver Building Department.
31. Architect shall coordinate doors into the space that is to have the telescoping seating, providing removable
mullions and proper height to allow for delivery and installation.
32. Portable seating shall have a maximum height of 6’-6”.
33. Bleachers shall always be set on a concrete or asphalt pad, sloped to drain. Refer to other Division 3 standards
for paved pads.
34. All bleachers shall be permanent fixed structures.
35. Provide seating for up to 200 people, with larger capacities requiring DPS approval.
36. Do not locate bleachers over or under site utilities.
37. Assure that all safety requirements are met.
38. Meet building code requirements including, but not limited to, configurations and design loads.
PART 6 - METAL FABRICATION
A. Consider provision of foot scrapers at main building entrances from playgrounds. DPS standard detail may be
used.
B. Metal gratings
1.
Ensure compliance with ADA accessibility guidelines in pedestrian areas.
a)
Maximum 3/4” clear opening (sufficient to prevent a ¾” sphere from passing through) in other
pedestrian and play areas including grass fields and other landscape areas.
2.
Individual grating sections maximum 120 pounds weight.
3.
Detail gratings with bolt-down accessories to prevent easy removal.
C. Manhole frames and covers: Non-rocking design with machined bearing surfaces to prevent movement or noise
under traffic.
D. Bollards / guard posts
1.
Bollards shall be fixed, not removable, and shall be filled with concrete.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 4 of 31
Update: April 2016
2.
Removable bollards are to be used only where unavoidable, and reviewed with DPS.
a)
Design removable bollards with fittings so they can be locked using padlocks.
b) Where bollard removal is required for emergency vehicle access, provide fittings to permit double
locking (pad locks by DPS and the emergency response agency) so that either DPS or the Emergency
Response agency may remove bollard by unlocking their padlock only.
E. Stage dressing and other overhead open grids.
F.
1.
At stages and platforms, 4'-0" o.c.,perpendicular to stage opening.
2.
Grid at other locations.
3.
Mount with open side down.
Expansion joint covers should be metal. Resilient type expansion joint covers/fillers are not preferred.
G. Metal stairs
1.
Metal pan type with concrete fill (use interior only, not acceptable exterior).
2.
Closed riser, w/ rounded nosings.
3.
Bolt connected to surrounding structure.
H. Penthouse access
1.
I.
J.
Penthouse access shall be by interior ship’s ladder with railing.
Ladders
1.
Sturdy, rigid rails.
2.
1" minimum diameter rungs.
3.
Rungs shall be deformed rebar or other non-slip design.
4.
Ladders shall have landing support over parapet tops or gravel stop edges.
5.
Ladder designs shall meet OSHA standards.
6.
Provide roof access ladders where roof levels change by more than 3 feet.
7.
Where ladder terminates in a roof scuttle hatch, consider provision of ladder stringer extension device (also
see standards Section 07 70 00).
Stage risers shall have handrails.
K. Railings
1.
Stainless steel pipe (no tubing) at swimming pools and lunchroom serving lines.
2.
All other railings shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe.
L. Bollards
1.
Steel pipe, minimum 4” diameter galvanized schedule 40.
2.
Ornamental/architectural bollards only with approval of DPS.
3.
Non-ornamental bollards shall be field painted safety yellow.
4.
Bollards shall be filled with concrete (non-ornamental only), unless the bollard is to be removable.
M. Detailing
1.
Detail all anchorage conditions.
2.
Detail all special fabrication details.
3.
Detail all embed conditions.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 5 of 31
Update: April 2016
N. Material specs
1.
Specify metal type and gauges for all components of each fabrication.
2.
Specify prime painting and touch-up at damaged paint.
O. Anchorages (specify based on substrate)
1.
Use of percussion powder actuated fasteners is prohibited.
2.
Nelson studs for concrete substrates.
3.
Metal plates w/ anchor bolts for masonry substrates.
4.
Provide solid blocking w/ plaster ring for plaster and gypsum board substrates.
5.
Provide metal wall bracket filler plates wherever mounting brackets are attached to supporting structure or
blocking through gypsum board, plaster or tile.
6.
Where railings are set in concrete foundations, walks or walls; core drill anchorage sleeves and install
railings with non-shrink, non-metalic grout formed to create positive drainage away from the installation
point.
PART 7 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. In general work in this section is not specified in other sections and is not exposed to normal view.
B. Wood frame construction is not preferred in DPS facilities. Use of wood frame construction requires A/E
coordination with building code requirements and approval of DPS.
C. Provide continuous fire-retardant treated ¾” plywood or OSB continuous lumber blocking at all mounting
locations including but not limited to:
1.
Handrails and guardrails
2.
Door stops
3.
Hold opens
4.
Grab bars
5.
Architectural specialties
6.
Plumbing fixtures
7.
Toilet accessories
8.
Luminaires (wall mounted)
9.
Surface mounted devices
10. Casework and shelving (wall and base cabinets at the top of each unit)
11. Industrial shelving
12. Markerboards and tackboards
13. Projection screens
14. Wall-mounted door holders (magnetic and mechanical)
15. Miscellaneous equipment
16. All other surface-mounted items as required for proper anchorage
17. Coordinate with the library furnishings planner and supplier (separate contract through DPS) so that
blocking is installed by the General Contractor for all shelving and custom casework provided under the
Library Furnishings Contract.
D. Indicate on the drawings the mounting heights for projection screen blocking.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 6 of 31
Update: April 2016
PART 8 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve A/E of contract responsibilities.
B. Coordinate the specific fireproofing requirements of the building with DPS at the beginning of the project.
C. Provide fireproofing that meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) and those of the Denver
Building Department for specific hour(s) rated protection. Identify fire ratings and UL numbers on the
drawings and/or specifications.
D. Avoid the use of spray-on fireproofing whenever possible.
E. Provide finished covered surfaces to conceal spray-on cementitious fireproofing unless specifically approved in
writing by DPS that it is an acceptable exposed surface condition.
F.
Use of intumescent coatings shall be limited to special exposed steel structures only, and shall not be used
throughout a project. Use only with written approval by DPS.
G. Mineral fiber is prohibited for use in spray-on or trowel applied fireproofing.
H. Cementitious fireproofing.
I.
Medium density for interior applications only.
J.
High density for interior or exterior applications.
K. Mineral wool board fireproofing shall be used for interior applications only.
L. Clearly indicate, on both the architectural and structural drawings, areas and elements that are to be fireproofed.
M. Coordinate the steel finish and primer requirements of the fireproofing manufacturer with that of the steel
manufacturer.
N. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve A/E of contract responsibilities.
O. Coordinate the specific type of firestopping to be used for each location.
1.
Through penetration firestopping in fire rated barriers, including both empty openings and openings
containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits and other penetrating items.
2.
Construction gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire-rated construction.
3.
Construction gap firestopping at the top and base of fire-rated barriers, and fire rated door and window
frames.
P. DPS may have firestopping requirements in excess of the International Building Code or the Denver
Amendments; A/E shall coordinate.
Q. Provide firestopping that meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) and those of the Denver
Building Department for specific hour(s) rated protection. A/E shall specify UL fire rated assembly
designations in the construction documents.
R. Coordinate with mechanical, electrical, telecom, and other systems for types and locations of through-wall
penetrations to be firestopped.
S.
Detail and call out firestopping requirements at every construction joint and penetration in fire rated assemblies.
T. Provide detail when firestopping has to meet and/or wrap structural deck and members.
U. Allow for deflection in details.
V. Sealant and caulk applications include, but are not limited to:
1.
Exterior building wall joints
2.
Concrete expansion joints
3.
Flashing joints
4.
Door and window frame perimeters
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 7 of 31
Update: April 2016
5.
Thresholds (set in full bed of compound)
6.
All other seams, voids and junctures, required to be weathertight (exterior), sight-tight, sound-tight, or
vapor-tight (interior)
7.
Penetrations not required to be firestopped
8.
Wood trim juncture to irregular wall surfaces (joints over 1/32" in width at any point)
9.
Gypsum wallboard corners which are not taped
10. Junctures of dissimilar materials
11. Junctures of similar materials
12. Perimeter joints of plumbing fixtures
13. Joints between interior walls and structure not required to be firestopped
14. Pavement, curb, gutter and sidewalk joints
15. Joints of countertops and backsplashes to each other and the adjacent wall
16. Joints between exposed cabinet surfaces and the wall
17. Interior jionts in masonry
18. Interior joints around hollow metal, including joint between hollow metal and hard surface flooring
19. Inside corner joints at wall tile
20. Other joints as indicated or as required for neat appearance
W. Coordinate sealant requirements with the various building materials used on the project, both interior and
exterior. It is strongly recommended that the A/E prepare a comprehensive sealant schedule that correlates
specific materials, locations, and detail conditions.
X. Investigate special sealants required by special design circumstances.
Y. Avoid use of silicones in exposed joints.
Z. Coordinate detailing with maximum infill size permitted by manufacturer for each product used.
AA. Avoid the use of latex sealants Kitchen, Toilet Rooms, Locker Rooms and other wet areas.
BB. Coordinate with gypsum board specifications for acoustical sealant requirements in walls.
CC. Joint profiles should be simple, with opposing flat parallel surfaces.
DD. Three and four point sealant contact conditions are prohibited unless otherwise approved by sealant
manufacturer.
EE. Design joints to permit future maintenance (resealing).
FF. Insulation shall be designed to provide a complete, unbroken thermal building envelope.
GG. Use of structure when boiler room is located.
HH. At minimum, provide insulation types and thicknesses based on composite insulation value of R-19 for walls
and R-38 for roof and roof-ceiling assemblies.
II. Prefer insulation of boiler room ceilings under occupied spaces.
JJ. Coordinate code requirements for proper ratings for both exposed and hidden conditions.
KK. Exterior insulation and finish systems (EIFS) are prohibited on DPS facilities.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 8 of 31
Update: April 2016
PART 9 - DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
1.
Doors constructed of hollow metal shall be used where a Rating exceeding 3/4 hour is required by local
building codes.
2.
Any door over 4'-0" x 7'-0" reviewed with DPS.
3.
Architect shall review DPS requirements for electric hardware for the project prior to DD documents.
4.
Exterior Doors:
a)
Shall be Hollow Metal with expanded polystyrene insulation.
b) Shall be positioned to swing against walls where possible (provide with wall stops).
c)
Shall be flush top to prevent water pooling and inverted bottom channel to allow for cutting of door.
d) Shall always be double doors.
5.
Kitchen Doors:
a)
Provide stainless steel insect screening in screen door which is mounted in same frame as the kitchen
entrance door. Make sure that frame depth is sufficient to accommodate both doors.
b) Guards shall be provided for screens on both interior and exterior side of the door.
c)
Each door shall be 4'-0" wide (minimum).
d) Undercutting is limited on fire rated doors. Review requirements of NFPA Bulletin 80.
6.
Door Lights:
a)
Door headrails must be at least 9 inches high.
b) Door lights must begin 3'-6" above floor.
7.
Prohibitions:
a)
Two doors hung from same mullion are prohibited.
b) Knock-down frames (unless approved by DPS prior to construction documents).
c)
8.
Hollow metal doors and frames are not to be used in pool environments.
Frames:
a)
Hollow metal throughout (unless otherwise approved by DPS prior to construction documents).
b) Removable mullions shall be provided as hardware products.
c)
Provide removable mullions only where necessary for equipment movement shall include, but not
limited to the following location (and as approved and coordinated with DPS):
(1.) Cross-corridor doors (unless a "no mullion" condition is indicated).
(2.) Main entry doors (coordinate with DPS prior to construction documents).
(3.) Auditorium to corridor near stage (and to exterior if available) .
(4.) Multi-purpose room to corridor (one pair at a minimum).
(5.) Cafeteria to corridor (one pair at a minimum).
(6.) Service entrance to exterior.
(7.) Gymnasium to corridor (and gymnasium to exterior).
(8.) Provide cutout in frame to allow for installation of Concealed Electrical Power Transfers as
required.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 9 of 31
Update: April 2016
9.
Finishes:
a)
Factory Primed.
b) Field painted- Avoid dark- high gloss finishes.
c)
For new buildings and expansions the paint shall be a DTM semi-gloss.
B. Wood Doors
1.
Wood doors to be used only where they can be provided with applicable fire rating as a wood based
particleboard core door. Mineral core applications are not acceptable.
2.
Wood doors are to be used on building interiors only.
3.
Door lights may not be within 9" of head, 42" of floor, or within 8” of latch stile.
4.
Door lite mouldings to be metal and equal to Stamping #110 or Anemostat LoPro.
5.
Wood doors shall not be used in pool areas.
C. Access Doors And Panels
1.
Provide access doors where required to service, use, maintain concealled valves, dampers, motors,
balancing devices furnished in divisions 15 and 16.
2.
Architect shall coordinate with Mechanical and Electrical Engineers to locate panels so as to minimize
visual impact on public spaces as much as possible and avoid locations with public access.
3.
Use both recessed and flush mounting where appropriate for building materials.
4.
Architect shall coordinate where fire-rated doors are required.
5.
Furnish sizes suited to conditions but not less than 16” x 16” for hand access and 24” x 24” for person
access, 36” x 36” for floor access.
6.
Finishes other than painted must be approved by DPS.
D. Coiling Doors And Grilles
1.
Avoid use of coiling door where pairs of doors will suffice.
2.
Coiling door located on the exterior of the building shall be insulated.
3.
Coiling grilles are to be used on building interiors only.
4.
Coiling grilles are not to be used to enhance security of the building- locking off areas of the building
during after hours unless approved in writing by DPS.
5.
Use of coiling grilles and doors shall not interfere with required egress of the building or sections thereof.
6.
Coiling counter fire doors shall be used within all fire rated corridors and be linked to the automatic fire
alarm system.
7.
Coiling doors may be used in fire separation walls were allowed by the local code.
8.
Coiling fire doors shall not be used where high cycle applications are needed.
9.
Locate coiling hood on the secure side of public spaces.
10. Install coiling door for ease of operation and maintenance of motor assembly.
E. Fire-Rated Coiling Doors
1.
Fire-rated coiling doors shall be activated by the building fire alarm system only (fusable link activation is
not permitted).
2.
Fire-rated coiling doors shall be electrically operated with manual operation possible in the event of a
power failure.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 10 of 31
Update: April 2016
3.
Fire-rated coiling doors shall automatically reset to full operating condition when the fire alarm system
returns to normal condition (not in alarm).
PART 10 - HARDWARE
A. Due to the extent of detail provided in this standard, the A/E may choose to edit this standard and incorporate
portions of this standard in the construction documents. To obtain an electronic copy of this standard in
Microsoft Word format, contact DPS.
B. Revisions to hardware must be approved by DPS QAQC or Structural Department.
C. Published model numbers for lockset functions may have changed since this publication. Architects shall verify
that function numbers match intended operation.
D. Stated functions, products, operation and keying should remain unchanged.
1.
All new locksets shall have interchangeable/removable core cylinders.
2.
Architect shall coordinate with the DPS QAQC, Structural Department, or DPS to obtain the lockset and
cylinder manufacturer and keyway information for exising buidlings.
3.
All new lever trim (locksets and panics) must be “Free Wheeling”.
E. A/E shall include complete hardware schedule in Contract Documents.
F.
Multiple door entries should have keyed access on one leaf only.
G. Exterior Custodial Entry shall have a Corbin H08 keyway. Consult w/ DPS for location.
1.
All MDF/IDF and DOTS rooms shall be able to accept a Best small format 7-pin interchangable core.
H. Removable Mullions:
I.
J.
1.
Install keyed removable mullions at all double door sets in all locations except stairways.
2.
Removable mullions are to be hardware type with cylinder latch for mullion removal. Latch cylinder shall
be a keyed removable core cylinder.
3.
All mullions are to be steel (aluminum is not allowed).
4.
Do not paint new mullions. Factory painted finish is allowed.
Door Swings:
1.
Arrange doors to swing to fixed wall where possible so stops can be wall mounted.
2.
Avoid recessing frames in masonry or concrete more than 1/2" on hinge face.
3.
Install all doors for 180 degree swing where possible. Coordinate detailing of door frame installations to
enable 180 degree door swings.
Door Stops:
1.
Locations in order of preference are:
a)
Wall - (design doors/walls for wall bumper application).
b) Floor – (place at maximum swing and out of traffic flow).
c)
2” x 2” grouted bollards must be installed at all exterior doors and interior back to back entry doors.
Bollards must be 42 inches high from finished surface.
d) Overhead (not permitted w/o Owner approval). Use surface mount devices only with DPS approval.
2.
Uses
a)
Wall protection.
b) Hardware protection.
c)
Safety against wind damage.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 11 of 31
Update: April 2016
d) Provide stops for miscellaneous doors which are not part of normal doors specification (i.e. walk-in
coolers, special casework gates).
e)
Cautions: Locate stops away from traffic flow. Avoid trip hazard at floor stops.
K. Closers
L.
1.
All closers shall have parallel arm mounting.
2.
No mountings exposed to weather.
3.
All closer arms to be "extra heavy duty" solid steel.
4.
Closers to be mounted for maximum door swing.
5.
Power operated closers (ADA Access) shall not be installed in any location without the approval of the
Project Manager and QAQC Dept.
Locksets
1.
All locksets shall be “free wheeling” cylindrical type (lever handles only) with interchangeable/removable
core cylinders.
2.
All locksets shall be compatible to accept the interchangable core/removable cylinder designated for that
building by the DPS Structural Department.
M. Controlled Access Entrances
1.
Refer to Division 17 standards for guidelines on entrances to receive controlled access hardware.
a)
Controlled access hardware includes:
(1.) 12v Electric strikes only.
(2.) A video camera (see Division 27 with integrated video camera information).
(3.) An intercom between the entrance and the operation location (normally the building secretary)
provided under the contract for construction.
(4.) Signage.
2.
DPS will eventually install controlled access hardware at all major building entrance points. New buildings
and rehab of existing entrances shall provide for future retrofit of controlled entrance hardware.
N. Owner Provided Materials
1.
Security key box (for GM Entry, Custodial Entry) will be furnished and installed by DPS.
2.
DPS will provide key(s) for Security key box. Installation will be by the DPS Lock Shop. Keys to be
provided to DPS Security.
O. Cylinders
1.
Cylinders shall all be interchangable/removable cores with DPS approved restricted keyways. Contact
Project Manager, QAQC, or Structural Department for approved restricted keyways.
2.
Exterior door groups shall have only one keyed leaf. The keyed leaf shall always be the right hand reverse
leaf.
P. Keying
1.
DPS will coordinate keying requirements and key schedule with DPS Locksmith Shop and the Architect.
2.
Keying shall be per Owner's instructions.
3.
The Architect shall include keying schedules as part of the Door Schedule. Information will be provided
by DPS. The Architect will coodinate and document keying information.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 12 of 31
Update: April 2016
4.
Provide maintenance manuals per Division 1 requirments containing full finish hardware information for
this job. The maintenance information shall be included in the Project Record Documents and shall
include:
a)
Name, address & phone number of hardware supplier.
b) Maintenance instructions and parts list for each type of operating hardware.
c)
Warranties.
d) Final bitting charts including additional, unused combinations organized into master keying subsets.
Include listing of all unused bitting combinations within each grand master, master and sub-master
keying combinations. Submit complete masterkey systems setup information including:
(1.) Top master key bitting
(2.) Control key bitting.
(3.) System rotation or progression
(4.) Complete bitting array
(5.) Extended bitting charts
Q. Magnetic Hold-Open Devices:
1.
The hardware schedule shall include magnetic hold-open devices at all classroom to corridor doors and at
other locations as directed by DPS.
2.
The Architect shall coordinate voltages and other device requirements with fire alarm designer/specifier.
3.
Doors with magnetic hold-open devices shall be equipped with a hold-open release switch mounted
adjacent to light switches and wired to disrupt power to the magnetic hold open when pressed. Release of
the button will restore magnetic hold open power. See Section 16721 for specific product information.
R. Automatic Flush Bolts: Automatic flush bolts are NOT to be used at any location.
S.
Manual Surface Flush Bolts: Where fixed leaf of door pairs is needed, manual surface flush bolts or cremone
bolts shall be used where possible. See specification below.
T. Knox Box (for Fire Department): Architect shall include one (1) Knox Box in hardware specification for each
building where the Knox Box does not already exist, and where building entry (Fire Department Entry) is
changing due to addition or remodeling. Consult with DPS for requirements at existing buildings.
U. Coordinators
1.
Coordinators are not to be used at any location.
V. Continuous Hinges
1.
Continuous hinges shall be used as approved by DPS. See spec text 2.05 for generally preferred locations.
2.
Continuous hinges shall be surface mount only. Use a minimum of nine thru-bolts for installation.
3.
Coordinate locations requiring use of continuous hinges with DPS, QAQC, or Structural Department.
W. Special Conditions
1.
Kitchen Exterior Door
a)
Kitchen exterior doors are required to have screen door and solid door in same frame. (See section 08
11 13 for door frame notes.) A/E shall coordinate hardware on these two doors to facilitate operation
of the doors.
2.
Astragals required on all double storage room doors.
3.
Alarmed Exits: Where exits are required for code purposes only and are not to be used for routine access
to/from spaces, alarmed panic devices may be used. Where permitted, battery powered alarmed panic
devices shall be provided.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 13 of 31
Update: April 2016
X. Existing Buildings
1.
PART 11 -
Architect shall coordinate with DPS, QAQC, or Structural Department regarding lockset style, function and
finishes for work in existing buildings. All new hardware shall be US 26D.
GLAZING
A. Glazing for DPS buildings should consist of the following assemblies.
PART 12 -
1.
Interior non rated glazing should be tempered glass.
2.
Use of wire glass is prohibited. Use fire-rated glazing from TGP or equivalent.
3.
Interior double-glazing should be used only where sound isolation is critical. Where double glazing is
required, provide tempered glass at exterior pane except where required to be fire resistive. Where required
to be fire resistive, use one pane of tempered and one pane of fire-rated glass.
4.
Exterior glazing in doors should be tempered.
5.
Exterior window glazing (double pane) may not be sealed insulating units. Use one pane of tempered glass
and one pane of float or plate glass.
6.
No sealed insulating units should be used anywhere. Use two panes of the appropriate glazing instead.
7.
Plastic glazing may be used only where high impact risks are expected such as in Gymnasiums, etc. If
double glazing is desired, use plastic on the impact side only.
8.
Spandrel glass is not to be used without prior approval by DPS.
EXTERIOR GRILLES AND SCREENS
A. Provide grilles on all ground floor windows in areas where protection is a concern, and as approved and
coordinated by DPS in writing. The need to provide grills varies widely.
B. Locations possibly requiring grilles:
1.
windows within five feet of adjacent to roofs having easy access.
2.
windows that face and are in close proximity to playgrounds and ball fields or other areas that may be
exposed to flying objects.
C. Architect shall coordinate with the Denver Fire Department where such devices may be prohibited.
D. Architect shall design grilles to accommodate window air conditioning units in buildings not having air
conditioning.
E. Architect shall design grills to accommodate out swing windows.
F.
Existing grilles removed will be replaced or reinstalled- confirmed with DPS and the Denver Fire Department.
G. Window grilles over eight by four feet shall be manufactured in multiple sections. Large grill operation and
sectionizing must be reviewed by DPS.
H. Finish of grilles is as approved in writing by DPS.
I.
PART 13 -
The size of any individual component of a window grille shall not exceed 4’ x 8’ unless approved in writing by
DPS. Grills should be sized and mounted for easy removal and re-installation.
FINISHES
A. Portland Cement Plastering
1.
Exterior applications for soffits are to be cement plaster only, white Keene Cement finish coat, smooth
finish, no paint.
2.
Architect shall develop details to properly ventilate concealed spaces above exterior soffits and provide
insect screening.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 14 of 31
Update: April 2016
3.
Provide cement plaster ceilings only in all Locker and Shower rooms, white Keene Cement finish coat,
smooth finish, no paint.
4.
Architect shall in general avoid the use of plaster on interior surfaces with the exception outlined above.
No other locations shall receive plaster without approval by DPS.
5.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS any other locations that may require plaster, other than that listed
above.
6.
Architect shall provide ample control joints to avoid cracking. Construction Documents shall indicate joint
patterns and spacing.
7.
Control joints shall not carry over structural systems.
8.
Architect shall coordinate the requirements where fire rated ceiling assemblies occur.
9.
Architect shall coordinate metal framing requirements and those of this section.
10. All plaster shall be three coat system minimum 7/8” thick.
B. Tile
1.
Provide 4” X 4” glazed wall tile to a height of 6’-8” AFF or as required by code and the Health
Department.
2.
Provide 6” x 6” or 8” x 8” unglazed quarry.
3.
Povide 2” x 2” or quarry tile unglazed floor tile in student restrooms and shower rooms.
4.
Architect shall review the locations of all ceramic tile with DPS.
5.
Balance any patterned layouts centered in each room. Avoid complex patterns and patterns requiring the
cutting of tile within the field of the surface being tiled.
6.
Elementary schools require cut-out of quarry tile base around toilets.
7.
Architect shall show control and isolation joints on the plans.
8.
Slope shower drains individually so that water from one stall does not flow to the adjacent one.
9.
Slip resistant tile (grit embedded materials) is prohibited.
10. Grout sealers shall not be used on any tile systems.
11. Epoxy grout shall be used for all tile grout in kitchens, restrooms or other applications. Other grout systems
are prohibited.
a)
All grout must meet ANSI A118.3 Standard.
b) Follow manufacturers instructions for allowable cure time for epoxy grout.
C. Acoustical Ceilings
1.
Architect shall provide 2’ X 4’ non directional fisured boards, with square edges unless otherwise approved
by DPS.
2.
Color of tile and suspension grid shall be white.
3.
Architect shall provide paper faced units as standard, vinyl coated in kitchens is acceptable. All restroom
ceilings shall be gypsum board hard lid.
4.
Architect shall specifiy that both tiles and suspension system is provided with hold-down clips within 10
feet of an exterior door only.
5.
Do not use acoustical tile ceilings as a vertical soffit element.
6.
Avoid use of acoustical tiles in areas less than 9 feet in height.
7.
Balance layout centered in each room.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 15 of 31
Update: April 2016
8.
Architect shall coordinate and specify tenting of speakers and lighting where fire rated ceilings are
required.
9.
Architect shall provide vibration isolation where ceilings are located under kitchens, mechanical rooms,
elevator rooms, gymnasiums.
10. Architect shall detail all special conditions on the project, i.e. around an overhead door.
11. Tectum ceilings shall be used only in special areas requiring additional strength and abuse-resistance.
Proposed Tectum ceiling areas must be reviewed by DPS.
D. Wood Flooring
1.
Avoid use in areas with exposure to high heat, wet areas, and chemicals.
2.
Coordinate transitions to adjacent flooring surfaces, paying close attention to ADA requirements for
thresholds.
E. Resilient Flooring
1.
Colors and patterns
a)
Minimize complex patterns requiring acute angles and curves.
b) Use a maximum of 10 colors at a given building.
c)
Specify manufacturer’s standard colors are preferred. Custom colors must be review by DPS.
d) Trim accessory colors shall be limited to black, brown or dark bronze.
e)
Refer to DPS Finish Standards.
2.
Specify chemical-resistant resilient flooring where flooring may be exposed to chemicals.
3.
Coordinate adhesive with substrate materials and coatings.
4.
Specify remedial substrate treatment for renovation and retrofit projects.
5.
Sheet products shall not be used.
6.
Slip resistant resilient flooring locations must be reviewed by DPS.
a)
Non-abrasive only.
b) Select for easy cleaning.
c)
F.
Areas may include, but not limited to, ramps, vestibules, stair treads, stair and ramp landings.
7.
Avoid short returns on base outside corners (for example where walls are thicker than frames at CMU
radius bullnose conditions) for maintaining proper adhesion. Coordinate hollow metal details to provide
frames which extend beyond wall surfaces to avoid short returns.
8.
For flooring retrofit projects, coordinate removal and reinstallation of furniture and equipment with the
scope of the construction contract. Under no circumstances will the custodial staff be allowed to move
furniture and equipment for construction purposes. Moving and staging of furniture and equipment will be
accomplished by outside vendors or will be included under the general construction contract.
9.
Coordinate moisture and alkalinity testing requirements with other design and specification requirements.
Resilient Athletic Flooring
1.
Coordinate each type of flooring with DPS prior to selection for use in the project. Resilient athletic
flooring will be considered for Elementary Schools only.
2.
Coordinate requirements of wood athletic flooring with those found in Section 09 64 00- Wood Flooring.
G. Fluid Applied Flooring
1.
Must review locations with District.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 16 of 31
Update: April 2016
2.
Use of product in kitchens, shower rooms, or locker rooms is prohibited.
H. Carpeting
1.
Carpet appearance is preferred to be on an overall multi-color, random tweed. Design to be reviewed and
approved by the District.
2.
Carpeting should be installed only in appropriate classrooms and accessory spaces. Carpet shall not be
installed in:
a)
Corridors or other high-traffic.
b) Lunchrooms, cafeterias, or other food service spaces.
c)
Within two feet of plumbing fixtures.
d) On stairs or nosings except in low traffic areas where necessary for acoustic performance.
e)
On vertical surfaces.
f)
Separate carpet cushion shall not be used in any application.
g) Carpet-over-carpet retrofit is prohibited.
PART 14 -
3.
Welded seam carpet is preferred. Carpet tile may be used only in special circumstances and will need to be
approved by the District. If carpet tile is used, install the product with with releasable adhesive.
4.
Specify appropriate underlayments. Gypsum based underlayment products shall not be specified and
subrate specific.
5.
Ensure that resilient base and accessories are specified in a separate section.
6.
For carpet retrofit projects, coordinate removal and reinstallation of furniture and equipment with the scope
of the construction contract. Under no circumstances will the custodial staff be allowed to move furniture
and equipment for construction purposes. Moving and staging of furniture and equipment will be
accomplished by outside vendors or will be included under the general construction contract.
PAINTING
A. Review paint with shops.
B. Murals and graphics: Consult with Facility Modernization and the Protective Coatings Department regarding
protecting or painting over murals, graphics, and logos. DPS will consult with the Planning Manager regarding
murals that may be considered historic or otherwise noteworthy.
C. Paint color selections
1.
Generally, ceiling color shall be “ceiling white” only.
2.
Refer to DPS Finish Color Standards.
3.
Prepare color boards for review by DPS and specified advisory committees. Final color approvals must be
reviewed through DPS prior to presentation to color committees.
4.
Select Field and Accent Colors from Approved DPS Recommended Color Palettes
a)
5.
Wall Paint (Field Colors):
a)
6.
See Exhibit “A” at end of Section 09 91 00.
Select maximum one (1) field paint color per project.
Accent Paint:
a)
Select maximum three (3) accent paint colors per project.
b) Large expanses of accent colored walls and surfaces are not desirable. Accent paints are intended to be
used for graphics, striping, or to emphasize architectural elements. One wall of accent paint may be
allowed in each room.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 17 of 31
Update: April 2016
D. Provide anti-graffiti sealer at the following surfaces:
1.
Interior ground-face concrete block (CMU).
2.
Interior exposed brick.
3.
Exterior exposed brick, at locations coordinated with DPS.
E. Repainting of existing facilitites:
1.
Generally, include repainting of acoustic ceilings in building repainting projects.
2.
Replace damaged or missing ceiling panels and tiles in preparation for painting of acoustic ceilings.
Typical acoustic ceilings may include lay-in acoustic panels, adhered 12” x 12” acoustic tiles, and Tectum
panels.
3.
Include signage replacement in repainting projects, including panel signs and vinyl lettering. Include all
types of signage, including but not limited to room numbers, accessibility signage, and door and frame
signs.
a)
4.
PART 15 -
Refer to Section 10 14 00.
Include painting of exposed fire sprinkler pipe in public and finished areas. Color shall match adjacent
colors.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
A.
Coordinate requirements with the District’s Education Specifications.
B.
Chalkboards are prohibited. Use of chalkboards are not to be used unless directed in writing by DPS, and then
only in specific approved locations.
C.
All Markerboards and Tackboards shall be mounted with perimeter trim and abutted to each other. No
‘T’molding is permitted.
D.
Gymnasiums shall get one (1) 4’ by 4’ markerboard with tray (minimum 12” long) mounted at the top of the
board and with rounded edge trim.
E.
Classroom Markerboards
1.
Typical classrooms shall have at least two (2) markerboards of at least 12’ length.
2.
Mount markerboards on opposing walls.
3.
Preferred Mounting Height (to bottom of the board)
a)
Kindergarten/ECE: 25” AFF. Per Children’s ADA standards.
b) Grades 1 and 2: 27”AFF. Per Children’s ADA standards.
c)
Grades 3 to 5: 30” AFF. Per Children’s ADA standards.
d) Grades 6 to 12: 36”AFF. Per ADA standards.
F.
Classroom Tackboards
PART 16 -
1.
Provide a minimum of Four (4) tackboards of 4’ width in each classroom.
2.
Location: at each end of markerboards where possible.
3.
Locate a minimum of 3’-0” from egress doorway.
SIGNAGE
A. Architect shall coordinate the specific sign requirements with the District at the beginning of the project
(Schematic Design). Confirm if bi-lingual signs need to be used.
B. Provide a Corner Stone containing a document box (time capsule) and marked by a bronze plaque in a location
directed by DPS.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 18 of 31
Update: April 2016
C. One bronze plaque is required for each new building.
1.
See standard drawings for plaque details. Coordinate text with DPS.
D. A single style and color (may be multi-colored) shall be developed for the entire project.
E. Rooms with more that one entry shall have a room wall sign at all entries.
F.
Site Signage shall be coordinated with the project Civil Engineer and be in conformance with the City of
Denver Signage Ordinance as well as the requirements of both, Denver Transportation and the Denver Fire
Department, as well as ADA.
1.
Post and Panel signs may be required for projects to indicate directions along access drives to provide way
finding for service entrance, visitor and staff parking, and secondary entries, accessible route, etc. Use only
as approved by DPS.
2.
Street/Traffic Signage: Standardized Street signage may be required for the facility, and shall include, but
not be limited to: Stop, Yield, No Parking, ADA Parking, Bus Loading Zone, Staff Parking, etc. Architect
shall coordinate these requirements with the City of Denver Traffic Division and DPS. Must be installed
on DPS property, not in the right of way.
G. Interior Way Finding Signs: The intent of the signage system is to direct visitors from the main building
entrance to their destinations with the building.
1.
2.
Directional:
a.
Room Ranges: Signs will be placed at each corridor junction in each building, indicating, which
direction to go for ranges of room numbers (i.e. 101-120). The system shall focus upon room numbers
and symbols, and avoids the use of unit names to minimize sign system maintenance over time. The
signs shall direct major spaces such as Libraries, Cafeteria, Gymnasium and Auditoriums.
b.
Compass Direction: As each building dictates, a direction sign will be placed at the main passenger
elevators on each floor providing a north, south, east, and west direction. This may be substituted with
a floor directory with graphic floor plan as outlined above.
Room Identification or Title:
a.
Room titles shall be limited to those rooms which have specialized uses which are not likely to change.
b.
Rooms which shall have room titles include, but not limited to: Library (LMC), Cafeteria, Locker
Room, Gymansium.
c.
Room titles such as “Principal’s Office” shall not be used. Office rooms shall contain only room
number and insert slots for names and titles.
d.
Room titles are in addition to room numbers. All signage shall include the room number.
e.
Classrooms shall not have room titles, but shall contain two insert slots for further identification, such
as grade level and teacher’s name.
3.
Room Identification: The room identification number sign will be required only on the side of the door that
faces the corridor or room it is accessed from. One sign per entry door. The purpose of this sign is to
identify specific facility locations for recording information on uses and function. In addition to room
number sign; DFD tags shall be required above the door centered on head of metal door frame. The
purpose of this sign is to identify locations by the DFD and building security.
4.
Restroom Identification: Signs will be installed on the corridor side and will designate room use for men,
women (staff areas only) boys, girls or unisex. Sign Information will show ADA accessible graphic
designation.
H. Safety/Code Compliance/Regulatory Signs:
1.
Elevators: Each building elevator is designated with a number if multiple elevators exist. Signage shall be
provided indicating the number for each elevator.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 19 of 31
Update: April 2016
2.
Signage instructing occupants to use stairways in the event of fire, both written and in graphics, shall be
posted at each elevator, on each floor.
3.
Room Capacity: Any room having an occupant load of 50 or more, as determined by the IBC, shall have a
sign indicating the rated capacity of the room.
4.
Stairs/Stairwells:
a.
Each building stairwell is assigned an identifier for location purposes. Signage for outside the stairwell
will be provided for this information and along with a stair symbol, identify each stair with room
number as described above (i.e. “Stair A”).
b.
Signage for inside the stairwell will be provided for the stair identifier, the appropriate floor number
and other information as to use and extend of the stair as required by local codes. (i.e stair to roof).
5.
Areas of Rescue Assistance: If required by local codes due to building height, singage leading to and
signage within area shall be provided in accordance to ADA requirements and the local code.
6.
Evacuation plan: Located at each classroom door.
a)
In the elevator lobby show graphic of floor plan, ‘you are here’ designation and routes to the stair wells
and exit doors.
b) Provide a clear plastic sleeve that allows for inserts size 8.5”x11”. Architect must provide primary
(red) and secondary (blue) routes to exits. Space Management team has AutoCAD blocks for egress
to provide, and all routes must be approved by DPS Department of Security.
7.
PART 17 -
Staging Area.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Provide overhead braced type partitions only.
B. Metal toilet partitions are preferred. Phenolic and Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC) and other
materials are prohibited.
C. All toilet partitions, hardware, etc., shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.
D. Architect shall coordinate layout with plumbing installation to assure proper clearances and drain locations.
E. Architect shall coordinate toilet accessories locations for proper ADA clearances. Refer to section 00 70 00
regarding ADA children’s requirements.
F.
Architect shall ensure proper ADA clearances and mounting heights are maintained in designated stalls.
G. Provide zero sight lines when detailing partitions; pilaster-to-panel spacing shall not exceed ½". Panel-to-wall
spacing shall not exceed 1".
H. Architect shall coordinate layout of partitions so that doors are not obstructed from full movement by toilet
accessories and fixtures.
I.
Colors: Maximum of one (1) color per room and two (2) colors for the entire project may be selected.
J.
Non-ADA stalls shall be minimum 2’-8” clear inside dimensions.
K. Urinal screens
PART 18 -
1.
Confirm locations of urinal screens with the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs) and with the DPS.
2.
Provide floor-to-ceiling mounted pilasters at urinal screens, in addition to continuous wall brackets.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Heights
1.
Where ADA requirements conflict with published DPS Standards, use DPS Accessibility Standards.
B. All equipment provided for toilet accessories should be of high durability and vandal-resistant.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 20 of 31
Update: April 2016
C. Architect shall confirm wall depths to ensure recessed accessories will fit wall cavity.
D. Architect shall confirm and correctly detail fire rated walls where recessed accessories are to be located.
E. Wall-mounted waste receptacles are prohibited. DPS will provide waste receptacles under separate contract.
F.
Provide sanitary napkin disposal units at restrooms used by female Middle School students, female High School
students, and female adults.
G. Sanitary napkin dispensers require DPS approval prior to installation.
H. Provide minimum one mirror in each restroom.
I.
Architect shall review all locations for the installation of accessories, and should verify that items are shown
on Drawings and/or included in this Section. Normal distribution of equipment is as follows.
1.
Paper towel holders
a)
One (1) or two (2) per wash fountain.
b) One (1) per classroom sink.
c)
One (1) per lavatory or pair of lavatories, depending upon layout.
2.
Toilet paper holders: one (1) per water closet.
3.
Soap dispensers
a)
One (1) per hand wash sink in kitchens.
b) One (1) per pair of lavatories.
c)
4.
PART 19 -
One (1) or two (2) per wash fountain, depending upon layout.
All dispensers to be obtained from one source.
CORNER GUARDS
A. Architect shall provide wall and corner guards at all building service areas and corridors that are to receive or
move supplies and equipment on a regular basis.
B. Provide wall guards minimum 12 inches high in receiving areas.
C. Provide a corner guard on all outside drywall corners subject to damage in high traffic areas.
D. Flush mounted corner guards shall not be used.
E. Provide Stainless steel in kitchen areas, galvanized steel in other areas.
PART 20 -
FLAGPOLES
A. Locate flagpoles in a prominent location at main entry or in front of the building.
B. Approaches to the flagpole shall be ADA accessible.
C. A minimum of two (2) flagpoles shall be utilized for each school (one each for the US and State Flags).
D. A maximum of one (1) flag may be flown per flagpole.
E. Maximum height of each flagpole shall be 40 feet.
F.
Maximum flag size shall be (5’x7’).
G. All flagpoles are to be a single one-piece tapered construction.
H. Arrangement of flagpoles shall conform to Federal flag flying guidelines.
PART 21 -
GRANDSTANDS AND BLEACHERS
A. Bleachers shall always be set on a concrete or asphalt pad, sloped to drain. Refer to other Division 3 standards
for paved pads.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 21 of 31
Update: April 2016
B. All bleachers shall be permanent fixed structures.
C. Provide seating for up to 200 people, with larger capacities requiring DPS approval.
D. Do not locate bleachers over or under site utilities.
E. Assure that all safety requirements are met.
F.
PART 22 -
Meet building code requirements including, but not limited to, configurations and design loads.
LOCKERS
A. Architect shall coordinate with DPS the type, layout and size of lockers required on the project.
B. Varsity athletic lockers shall be fully vented on all sides and be used only for varsity athletic lockerooms, not
for P.E.
C. Architect shall coordinate locker installations with both the Children’s and Adult ADA guidelines, depending
on the project.
D. Architect shall specify type of base to be provided and provide details for mounting.
E. All locker doors shall be free of any obstructions.
F.
Architect to coordinate depth of locker and cavity depth when using recessed conditions.
G. All lockers not recessed are to receive sloped tops.
H. Provide not more than six separate colors in a single school.
I.
No open leg lockers shall be permited.
J.
Minimum locker dimensions for lockers:
1.
Standard locker: 15”W x 18”D x 72” high single tier.
2.
Varsity athletic locker: 18”W x 18”D x 72” high single tier.
3.
P. E. locker: 18” W x 18” D x 72” high double tier.
K. Consult with DPS for locker sizes and layouts.
L. Include DPS numbering preferences.
PART 23 -
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
A. Coordinate heights of countertops with ADA requirements.
B. Radius corners are required in high traffic areas.
C. Architect shall coordinate seating locations, both in folded and deployed condition with game and athletic court
line painting and size requirements. Provide minimum 5’ safety zone beyond court.
D. Architect shall coordinate with DPS, the required seating capacities for each type of school, as the specific
requirements will vary by type and location.
E.
Architect shall coordinate any power requirements with the electrical engineer. Any telescoping seating over six
rows high (7 or more) shall be powered.
F.
Pool areas shall have aluminum framing only, and seats made of plastic or aluminum, and will be only manually
operated.
G. Architect shall coordinate school colors and logos (where available) with that of standard options for seating.
H. Architect shall coordinate ADA requirements with telescoping seating.
I.
Seating shall be lockable in its folded and open configuration to avoid accidental deployment or tampering. Partial
deployment of rows shall not be allowed.
J.
Locks shall be keyed and allow for replacement cylinders.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 22 of 31
Update: April 2016
K. Architect shall coordinate anchor methods with substrate and finished flooring materials as well as wall anchorage
with framing and materials. Provide reinforcement details where substrate is otherwise inadequate for anchorage.
L.
Architect shall confirm requirements for aisles with the Denver Building Department.
M. Architect shall coordinate doors into the space that is to have the telescoping seating, providing removable mullions
and proper height to allow for delivery and installation.
N. Portable seating shall have a maximum height of 6’-6”.
O. Comply with ADA accessibility guidelines, applicable codes including elevator codes, Denver Wastewater
Management (DWM) requirements, Denver Landmark Commission, and requirements of other Authorities Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ).
P.
Coordinate elevator delivery, installation, and testing and inspection periods with the construction schedule.
1.
It may be necessary to require elevator submittals to be delivered early in the construction period.
Q. Elevator locations
1.
New two-story and taller buildings shall have elevators.
2.
Two-story additions to existing buildings without elevators shall have elevators.
a.
The requirement to provide elevators in one-story additions to two-story (or taller) existing buildings
will be determined by DPS.
b.
If it is determined that an elevator will be added in the future, consider construction of shaft and
machine room for future installation of elevator.
3.
Locate elevators for optimum ADA access.
4.
Installation in existing split-level schools shall be placed to accommodate all levels if possible.
5.
Locate elevators for multiple-function use (freight, ADA, custodial).
R. Wheelchair/Vertical Platform lifts must be approved by DPS QAQC and Planning prior to installation.
S.
Limited use / limited application (LULA) type elevators are prohibited.
T.
Elevator size and capacity
1.
For buildings over two stories in height, coordinate with AHJs for the possible requirement to accommodate
stretchers/gurneys.
U. Hydraulic elevators are preferred. If traction elevators are contemplated, confirm acceptability with DPS.
V. Durability and maintenance: Select only equipment suitable for potential heavy uses. (Elevators needed for
occasional use by physically-impaired individuals are most often used for other uses, i.e. convenience, freight, etc.)
Provide vandal-resistant buttons, indicators and panels. Lightweight equipment will not last.
W. Emergency power: Coordinate requirements for emergency power, etc., for elevator and elevator recall function as
required by the AHJ.
X. Communications, controls, and alarms: Coordinate with the HVAC, electrical, telecommunications, and security
systems.
Y. Elevator machine rooms
1.
Machine rooms shall comply with applicable code requirements for lighting, ventilation, convenience power,
clearances to equipment, headroom, fire ratings, etc.
2.
Machine rooms shall be adjacent to shaft wherever possible, and designed to maximize service convenience.
3.
Design systems to maintain proper operating temperature for equipment in machine rooms.
a.
b.
Coordinate possible code requirement for a dedicated machine room cooling system.
Ensure that the HVAC temperature controls system monitors machine room temperature.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 23 of 31
Update: April 2016
Z.
4.
Machine room must be properly sound isolated from adjacent classrooms or offices.
5.
Avoid routing of services through machine room that do not serve the machine room.
6.
Do not provide a high temperature alarm in the machine room (although this was a previous standard).
Smoke doors: Applicable codes may require elevators to have separate smoke doors separating the elevator cab
doors and the corridor.
1.
If not required, do not provide elevator smoke doors.
2.
Elevator smoke doors may be at the elevator openings or between a vestibule and the corridor.
3.
Smoke doors at elevator doors shall be equipped with magnetic hold-open devices controlled by the fire alarm
panel.
4.
Coordinate with electrical for line voltage requirements.
AA. Car controls: Provide one car interior control panel at each car door.
BB. Hall call stations
1.
Coordinate with DPS for type of hall call controls to be used on each project.
a.
b.
2.
Previous standard was keypad operation.
Standard may be changing to card reader operation.
Cab call panel shall be equipped with a key for selection of “automatic,” “manual” or “off” operation.
CC. Handrails: Cab handrails shall meet code requirements.
DD. Fire sprinklers: Determine during design phase whether the AHJs will require the machine room and hoistway to
receive fire sprinklers.
1.
Determine applicability of requirement for shunt-trip protection of fire sprinklers in machine room and
hoistway areas, and design accordingly.
EE. Fire recall feature
1.
When the building fire alarm is activated, the elevator shall move to the “primary” designated floor, the doors
open, and the elevator become inactive.
a.
The primary level is the “fire access” level, and shall be equipped with a “fire key” function and a “smoke
vent” key function at the hall call station.
2.
When the fire alarm is activated by the smoke detctyor in the corridor or vestibule at the primary level, the
elevator shall go to a designated “alternate” floor, the doors open and the elevator become inactive.
3.
Coordinate elevator with fire alarm system. Verify compatibility and provision of necessary equipment.
FF. Custodial override: Provide a keyed override (run/stop switch) of the door open alarm feature to accommodate
cleaning.
GG. Emergency telephone
1.
Meet ADA accessibility requirements.
2.
Confirm with DPS programming for automatic dialer emergency number (usually DPS Safety & Security at
720-423-3911).
HH. Vents and vent controls
1.
Verify AHJ requirements to vent elevator shafts (hoistways).
2.
Where ventilation is required, ventilate to the exterior.
3.
Vents shall be closed by motorized damper and open automatically by:
a.
Alarm from the elevator hoist way smoke detector (and only that detector); or
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 24 of 31
Update: April 2016
b.
II.
Keying: All elevators shall be keyed alike within each school. Coordinate with DPS for type of cylinders and
keyway.
1.
JJ.
A power failure.
Verify which keys are required to be delivered to the Denver Fire Department for placement in the Knox Box.
Each elevator pit shall have a pit ladder.
KK. Sump pumps: Elevator pits shall be equipped with sump pumps only if required by the AHJ, or if necessary due
to high water table or other groundwater problems. Avoid sump pumps where possible.
1.
Verify requirements with AHJs including DWM.
2.
Verify groundwater with the geotechnical investigation.
3.
Provide power as required by the AHJ.
4.
Pump shall be activated by a float switch in sump.
5.
Where required by DWM, discharge from elevator sump to sanitary sewer via a sand and oil interceptor.
LL. Moisture sensors: Elevator pits may be equipped with moisture sensors only with specific approval of DPS.
1.
Water in elevator pits leads to mold, odors, and rust.
2.
If a moisture sensor is provided, coordinate alarm and reporting requirements with the security and
telecommunications systems.
3.
If a moisture sensor is provided, it shall be completely independent of the flood controller (if any) for the
backflow prevention system. There shall be no interconnection between detection of moisture in the elevator
pit and flood control for the backflow prevention system.
MM. Comply with ADA accessibility guidelines, applicable codes including elevator codes, Denver Wastewater
Management (DWM) requirements, Denver Landmark Commission, and requirements of other Authorities
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
NN. Coordinate elevator delivery, installation, and testing and inspection periods with the construction schedule.
1.
It may be necessary to require elevator submittals to be delivered early in the construction period.
OO. Elevator locations
1.
New two-story and taller buildings shall have elevators.
2.
Two-story additions to existing buildings without elevators shall have elevators.
a.
The requirement to provide elevators in one-story additions to two-story (or taller) existing buildings will
be determined by DPS.
b.
If it is determined that an elevator will be added in the future, consider construction of shaft and machine
room for future installation of elevator.
3.
Locate elevators for optimum ADA access.
4.
Installation in existing split-level schools shall be placed to accommodate all levels if possible.
5.
Locate elevators for multiple-function use (freight, ADA, custodial).
PP. Wheelchair/Vertical Platform lifts must be approved by DPS QAQC and Planning prior to installation.
QQ. Limited use / limited application (LULA) type elevators are prohibited.
1.
For buildings over two stories in height, coordinate with AHJs for the possible requirement to accommodate
stretchers/gurneys.
RR. Hydraulic elevators are preferred. If traction elevators are contemplated, confirm acceptability with DPS.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 25 of 31
Update: April 2016
SS. Durability and maintenance: Select only equipment suitable for potential heavy uses. (Elevators needed for
occasional use by physically-impaired individuals are most often used for other uses, i.e. convenience, freight,
etc.) Provide vandal-resistant buttons, indicators and panels. Lightweight equipment will not last.
TT. Emergency power: Coordinate requirements for emergency power, etc., for elevator and elevator recall function
as required by the AHJ.
UU. Communications, controls, and alarms: Coordinate with the HVAC, electrical, telecommunications, and security
systems.
VV. Elevator machine rooms
1.
Machine rooms shall comply with applicable code requirements for lighting, ventilation, convenience power,
clearances to equipment, headroom, fire ratings, etc.
2.
Machine rooms shall be adjacent to shaft wherever possible, and designed to maximize service convenience.
3.
Design systems to maintain proper operating temperature for equipment in machine rooms.
a.
Coordinate possible code requirement for a dedicated machine room cooling system.
b.
Ensure that the HVAC temperature controls system monitors machine room temperature.
4.
Machine room must be properly sound isolated from adjacent classrooms or offices.
5.
Avoid routing of services through machine room that do not serve the machine room.
6.
Do not provide a high temperature alarm in the machine room (although this was a previous standard).
WW. Smoke doors: Applicable codes may require elevators to have separate smoke doors separating the elevator cab
doors and the corridor.
1.
If not required, do not provide elevator smoke doors.
2.
Elevator smoke doors may be at the elevator openings or between a vestibule and the corridor.
3.
Smoke doors at elevator doors shall be equipped with magnetic hold-open devices controlled by the fire alarm
panel.
4.
Coordinate with electrical for line voltage requirements.
XX. Car controls: Provide one car interior control panel at each car door.
YY. Hall call stations
1.
2.
Coordinate with DPS for type of hall call controls to be used on each project.
a.
Previous standard was keypad operation.
b.
Standard may be changing to card reader operation.
Cab call panel shall be equipped with a key for selection of “automatic,” “manual” or “off” operation.
ZZ. Handrails: Cab handrails shall meet code requirements.
AAA. Fire sprinklers: Determine during design phase whether the AHJs will require the machine room and hoistway
to receive fire sprinklers.
1.
Determine applicability of requirement for shunt-trip protection of fire sprinklers in machine room and
hoistway areas, and design accordingly.
BBB. Fire recall feature
1.
When the building fire alarm is activated, the elevator shall move to the “primary” designated floor, the doors
open, and the elevator become inactive.
a.
The primary level is the “fire access” level, and shall be equipped with a “fire key” function and a “smoke
vent” key function at the hall call station.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 26 of 31
Update: April 2016
2.
When the fire alarm is activated by the smoke detctyor in the corridor or vestibule at the primary level, the
elevator shall go to a designated “alternate” floor, the doors open and the elevator become inactive.
3.
Coordinate elevator with fire alarm system. Verify compatibility and provision of necessary equipment.
CCC.
Custodial override: Provide a keyed override (run/stop switch) of the door open alarm feature to accommodate
cleaning.
DDD. Emergency telephone
1.
Meet ADA accessibility requirements.
2.
Confirm with DPS programming for automatic dialer emergency number (usually DPS Safety & Security at
720-423-3911).
EEE.
Vents and vent controls
1.
Verify AHJ requirements to vent elevator shafts (hoistways).
2.
Where ventilation is required, ventilate to the exterior.
3.
Vents shall be closed by motorized damper and open automatically by:
FFF.
1.
a.
Alarm from the elevator hoist way smoke detector (and only that detector); or
b.
A power failure.
Keying: All elevators shall be keyed alike within each school. Coordinate with DPS for type of cylinders and
keyway.
Verify which keys are required to be delivered to the Denver Fire Department for placement in the Knox Box.
GGG. Each elevator pit shall have a pit ladder.
HHH. Sump pumps: Elevator pits shall be equipped with sump pumps only if required by the AHJ, or if necessary
due to high water table or other groundwater problems. Avoid sump pumps where possible.
1.
Verify requirements with AHJs including DWM.
2.
Verify groundwater with the geotechnical investigation.
3.
Provide power as required by the AHJ.
4.
Pump shall be activated by a float switch in sump.
5.
Where required by DWM, discharge from elevator sump to sanitary sewer via a sand and oil interceptor.
III.
Moisture sensors: Elevator pits may be equipped with moisture sensors only with specific approval of DPS.
2.
Water in elevator pits leads to mold, odors, and rust.
3.
If a moisture sensor is provided, coordinate alarm and reporting requirements with the security and
telecommunications systems.
4.
If a moisture sensor is provided, it shall be completely independent of the flood controller (if any) for the
backflow prevention system. There shall be no interconnection between detection of moisture in the elevator
pit and flood control for the backflow prevention system.
PART 24 -
EQUIPMENT
A. Laboratory Equipment
1.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS the specific types and quantities of equipment required and
differentiate FF&E items from those provided in this section.
2.
Architect shall coordinate requirements and locations for electrical power for all laboratory equipment.
3.
Architect shall coordinate special HVAC requirements for Laboratory equipment.
a)
Coordinate vents with fire-rated shaft constuction where required by Codes.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 27 of 31
Update: April 2016
b) Coordinate make-up air to maintain air balance when hoods are running or stopped.
4.
Architect shall coordinate special services, such as gas and water and compressed air.
5.
Architect shall coordinate special plumbing requirements, such as deep sinks, and lab faucets.
6.
Architect shall coordinate heights, widths, and weights of bench mounted equipment with that of base
cabinet construction- including anchoring to walls.
7.
Architect shall coordinate proper venting of flammable material storage. Flammable and other hazardous
materials storage cabinets shall not be vented unless required by Code Authorities.
8.
DPS Environmental Services will provide A/E with expected quantities for new facilities or current
quantities for existing facilities.
9.
Coordinate acid waste piping requirements with plumbing.
10. Fume Hoods
a)
Provide intergral base cabinet or non-combustable countertop for all hoods.
b) Hood must provide a minmum face of 100 FPM velocity.
11. Chemical Storage Cabinets:
a)
Acid and Corrosive cabinets may be constructed of materials other than steel provided they are UL
certified for intended use.
b) Flammable storage cabinets shall be steel.
B. Vocational Shop Equipment
1.
Architect shall contact Denver Fire Department on requirements for paint booths at the beginning of the
project.
2.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS the locations, sizes, and type of paint booths to be used. Typical areas
of use are wood shop, and art classrooms.
3.
Architect shall coordinate with the electrical engineer where such devices may require power operation.
Life safety tie-ins shall also be coordinated.
4.
Architect shall coordinate with mechanical engineer special venting requirements of the manufacturer and
local codes.
5.
Provide fire rated chases for plenums or adjacent floors when duct work travels through them. Use direct
side wall discharge as much as possible to avoid penetrating floors for venting. Avoid where possible,
penetration of fire rated assemblies.
6.
Architect shall coordinate all booth, room and exhaust duct sprinkler requirements.
7.
Paint booths may require a separate monitored sprinkler branch, with a bag protected head.
8.
Place paint booths on floors or benches made of non-combustible materials.
9.
Where a pit is required for filtration on automotive booths, architect shall coordinate with Structural
engineer for foundation support requirements.
10. Architect shall locate paint booths mounted on work surfaces with proper floor and wall anchorage.
11. Provide at least three feet of clear space around unit.
12. No open flame shall be within twenty feet of a paint booth.
13. Coordinate the utilities required within or adjacent to paint booths. Compressed air shall be provided by
compressor dedicated to providing process air. Temperature control air compressors shall not be used to
supply paint booths.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 28 of 31
Update: April 2016
C. Stage Curtains
1.
Design of stage curtains should include side legs (tormentors), valances, cyclorama and main drape (for all
levels of schools).
2.
High Schools shall have a specialized consultant hired for the project for acoustics, lighting, rigging and
equipment.
3.
Architect shall Coordinate curtain layout with lighting, mechanical, catwalks and any supporting structure –
and ensure proper masking of such from audience view.
4.
Architect shall provide drawings (a section through the stage and a reflected ceiling plan) showing exact
location of all stage curtain components and fire sprinkler locations.
5.
Where stages have a folding partition closure, coordinate main drape with requirements for partition
stacking space.
6.
Architect shall coordinate location of projection screen so that curtains are not within the projection beam.
7.
Architect shall coordinate requirements for electrical power for curtain and rigging operation.
8.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS any special requirements for the stage set-up.
9.
Architect shall coordinate any special requirements for a curved curtain track.
10. Architect shall coordinate all structural bracing, support and blocking requirements of curtain track,
lighting and rigging.
11. Architect shall coordinate and incorporate any special requirements by the Denver Fire Department and
Building Department in relation to stage curtains for sprinkler and drop curtains for stages.
a)
details shall be provided at the Construction Document phase of the Project.
12. Curtain operation: Manual operating curtains via pulley, ropes and counterweights.
13. Stage Curtains
a)
Proscenium curtains
i)
Main Traveler or Grand Drape plus matching Grand Valence
b) Masking curtains
c)
Drops/cycloramas
d) Scrims
e)
Valances
f)
Mid and Upstage Traveler Curtains
g) Curtain tracks and associated hardware
D. Athletic and Recreation Equipment
1.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS the sports to be played at each school.
2.
Architect shall coordinate recreation program requirements with DPS for each school.
3.
Architect shall coordinate with Education Specification for quantity and size of equipment, playing fields
and courts not covered in the Playground Standard.
4.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS Section 32 18 23.
5.
Both outdoor and indoor playgrounds are possible. Coordinate with DPS Playground Standard 32 18 23 for
guidelines.
6.
Architect shall coordinate layouts, power supply, and mounting requirements for all FF&E items purchased
by DPS related to this section, i.e. cardiovascular equipment.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 29 of 31
Update: April 2016
7.
Architect to coordinate requirements of a Learning Landscape with DPS.
8.
Architect shall coordinate equipment design with accessibility (ADA) requirements and applicable codes.
9.
Equipment shall be age appropriate, and may require physical separation of ages.
10. Architect shall coordinate all equipment design with DPS Playground Standard 32 18 23.
11. Architect shall coordinate school colors and logos for incorporation into project.
12. Architect shall coordinate floor anchorage and in-floor mounting requirements for all indoor equipment
with area to be used.
13. Architect shall provide for proper structural blocking and support for all indoor mounted equipment.
14. Architect shall coordinate in-floor mounting and power requirements of equipment.
15. Architect shall coordinate requirements of game striping and sizing, both interior and exterior.
16. Architect shall coordinate equipment storage requirements.
17. Architect shall coordinate with DPS items that are to be fixed and/or moveable.
18. If a pool is involved, a pool consultant shall be hired and include associated equipment requirements for
lanes, diving boards, starting blocks, etc. Reference NFHS Swimming Rules for construction standards.
19. All outdoor poles in paved areas shall be painted safety yellow, coordinate with Section 09 91 00.
20. No motorized rigid partitions shall be used to divide interior recreation space.
21. Architect shall coordinate the requirements for an electronic scoreboard with DPS.
22. Coordinate with DPS if indoor Basketball goals are fixed or foldable.
23. If shooting and archery ranges are to be part of the scope, a specialized consultant shall be required for the
design of it.
24. The following materials are not permitted to be used on exterior play areas or equipment.
a)
Wood
b) Recycled plastic.
c)
Synthetic Lumber
d) Concrete- unless used for structure
PART 25 -
e)
Rubber Tires
f)
Non-commercial- ‘home made’ equipment
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A. Provide fire extinguisher, valve, and hose cabinets as required by the local Denver Building Codes enforced at
the time of design and in consultation with the Denver Fire Department.
B. Architect shall coordinate with Mechanical Engineer locations for fire valves and hose cabinets that may be
required.
C. Locate all fire extinguishers in glass/lever door cabinets when used in public spaces and at (but not limited to)
the following locations: corridors, classrooms that require them by the Denver Fire Department, Science Labs,
Computer Labs, Art Classrooms, Home Economics, Industrial Arts Shops.
D. Use both semi-recessed and flush mounting where appropriate for building materials.
E. Architect shall coordinate where fire-rated cabinets are required. Surface mounted units are prohibited.
F.
Architect shall review with both DPS and the Denver Fire Department the type and size of fire extinguishers
required.
G. Architect shall coordinate the wall depth with the cabinet depths.
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 30 of 31
Update: April 2016
H. Cabinets doors shall be free of any obstructions for door operation.
I.
Cabinets shall be located in conformance to ADA Guidelines for mounting heights and protrusion from wall.
J.
Use minimal glass dimensions for cabinet doors and provide with lever action opening device.
K. No full glass or solid doors are to be used.
L. Provide fire extinguishers in all Server Rooms and Electrical Rooms.
M. Provide fire blankets and cabinet in Science Rooms.
END SECTION 00 10 00
Design Guidelines
00 10 00
Page 31 of 31
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 11 00
FINISH COLOR STANDARDS
PART 0
PURPOSE
D. See specific sections of Design of Construction Standards for additional requirements.
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
APPLICATION OF THIS STANDARD
A. Extensive cross-referencing is required between these finish color standards and other sections of the DPS
Design and Construction Standards.
1.02
GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
A. General:
1.
Color schemes may vary between functional areas of the building, within reason. A maximum of two
separate color schemes is allowed for classrooms.
2.
DPS generally recommends against using pink or purple finish colors.
3.
Finish plans, finish schedules, and operations and maintenance manuals shall be updated with “as-built”
finish selections before Record Drawings are submitted to DPS.
B. Finish Color Selection And Approval Process
1.
Generally follow the following steps in selecting and obtaining approval for finish colors.
a)
DPS and A/E agree to specific project guidelines.
b) A/E recommends a few color schemes to the DPS. Refer to Color Scheme Standards at the end of this
section.
c)
DPS obtains approval of color schemes from DPS Operations & Maintenance.
d) School (or other facility) selects color schemes.
e)
A/E submits color sample boards (quantity of boards to be determined for each project) to DPS.
C. Exterior Building Finish Colors:
1.
No firm standards, except as discussed during design.
2.
Avoid primary (red, blue, yellow), secondary (green, purple, orange), and bright colors.
3.
Many dark, field-applied paint colors on doors and hollow metal tend to become chalky and faded in a short
period of time.
4.
Continue to review with DPS throughout design and construction as exterior finish colors are selected.
D. Playground Equipment: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
E. Site Furnishings, Light Poles, Etc.: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
F.
Carpet:
1.
Dark tones are preferred over medium or light tones.
2.
The Architect shall coordinate with the Contractor on lead time relative to construction schedule. Carpet
often needs to be selected before the remainder of finish colors are selected.
3.
At the project team’s option, up to two different carpet colors may be selected for the school.
Design Guidelines
00 11 00
Page 1 of 44
Finish Color Standards
Update: April 2016
G. Vinyl Composition Tile:
1.
Accent colors to be recommended by Architect / DPS will review and approve.
2.
Field colors should be medium or dark tones only; do not use light or white tile for field colors.
H. Quarry Tile:
1.
Kitchen: Traditional solid red tile (equal to Daltile “Diablo Red”), with dark (epoxy) grout.
2.
Other areas: Dark grout. Tile colors to be recommended by Architect.
I.
Ceramic Floor Tile: Dark epoxy grout. Tile colors to be recommended by Architect.
J.
Gym Floor Game Striping: See DPS gym striping layout (to be sent to the Architect during design).
K. Rubber Base, Accessories, Stair Treads, Etc.: Black, dark brown, or dark bronze only.
L. Ceramic And Porcelain Wall Tile: Dark or medium epoxy grout. Tile colors to be recommended by Architect.
M. Vinyl Wallcovering: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
N. Fiber Reinforced Plastic (Frp) Wall Panels: White or very light.
O. Operable Walls: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
P. Paint:
1.
Refer to Section 09 91 00 – Painting in the DPS Designing and Construction Standards.
Q. Ceilings:
1.
Suspended acoustic ceiling panels and grid, and adhered acoustic ceiling tiles: White
R. Hollow Metal Doors & Frames: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
S.
Railings & Metal Fabrications: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
T. Plastic Laminate: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
U. Solid Plastic Countertops: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
V. Wood Doors & Wood Trim (Clear Finish):
1.
Remodeling and retrofit projects: Wood species and finish to match existing
2.
New construction: No color standards
W. Acoustic Wall Panels: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
X. Interior Signage: Architect to recommend (also review ADA requirements) / DPS will review and approve.
Y. Lockers: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
Z. Toilet Partitions: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
AA. Coat Racks: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
BB. Window Coverings: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
CC. Stage Curtains: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
DD. MarkerboardS: White
EE. Tackboards: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
FF. Bleachers: Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
GG. Appliances: White
HH. Elevators: Due to schedule constraints, Architect will most likely need to select before remainder of color
palette is reviewed. Architect to recommend / DPS will review and approve.
II. Exposed Mechanical Equipment (Unit Ventilators, Unit Heaters, Baseboard Radiators, Etc.): Architect to
recommend / DPS will review and approve.
Design Guidelines
00 11 00
Page 2 of 44
Update: April 2016
JJ. Electrical Device Plates: Stainless steel.
KK. Electrical
Surface-Mounted
Conduit
Design Guidelines
In
Finished
00 11 00
Page 3 of 44
Areas:
Ivory
(factory-finished
Wiremold).
Update: April 2016
2016 MASTER COLOR LIST
Scheme 1
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS COLORS LIST
ANTIQUE WHITE Y-W12
PURE TURQUOISE M460-4
CHILLED WINE M310-5
OPTIMUM BLUE M540-7
Primary
Scheme 10
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS COLORS LIST
ARID LANDSCAPE N310-2
KEEMUN M330-6
THAI TEAL M460-6
Primary
ELEGANT NAVY M53
Scheme 2
SAIL CLOTH N300-1
RUMBA ORANGE M230-7
ENGLISH CUSTARD M290-5
DEEP FIRE M180-7
Primary
Scheme 11
SMOOTH SILK YL-W7
HIGH DIVE P480-5
TOP TOMATO P180-7
ANIME P340-5
Primary
Scheme 3
JOURNAL WHITE S310-2
SALAMANDER P370-6
HACIENDA BLUE P490-6
ENGLISH CUSTARD M290-5
ORIGINAL WHITE N290-1
LASER P350-6
TOUCAN P230-6
FLASHY SAPPHIRE P520-7
Primary
Scheme 12
JOURNAL WHITE S310-2
BOLD AVOCADO M360-6
TOUCAN P230-6
TOP TOMATO P180-7
Primary
ACCENT
XOXO P110-7
RACE CAR STRIPE P170-6
FLIRT ALERT P150-7
DASH OF CURRY M170-6
BRAZILIAN TAN N250-2
NIGHTINGALE GRAY N200-3
JAPANESE KOI P210-7
PRECIOUS STONE M470-6
Primary
ACCENT
JAPANESE KOI P210-7
BLAZING BONFIRE P250-7
SIZZLING SUNSET P200-6
FALL FOLIAGE M220-7A
OFF WHITE 73
SIZZLING SUNSET P200-6
BLING BLING P280-6
BEACON BLUE P510-7
Primary
ACCENT
SMILEY FACE P260-6
SUNNY SIDE UP P270-7
FUZZY DUCKLING P270-5
JOYFUL ORANGE P240-7
ROADSTER WHITE N370-1
HALF SEA FOG N470-3
SPRINGVIEW GREEN P380-6
TIDAL M510-6
Primary
ACCENT
LASER LEMON P290-7
LAZY LIZARD P350-7
PARK PICNIC P390-7
SPRINGVIEW GREEN P380-6
METEOR SHOWER N450-3
RAGING BULL M160-7
FLASHY SAPPHIRE P520-7
LITTLE SUN DRESS P280-5
Primary
ACCENT
MEGA BLUE P520-6
COSMIC COBALT P500-7
ADMIRAL BLUE M520-7
TROPICS P450-6
CONFIDENT WHITE GR-W12
LAZY CATERPILLAR P370-5
PIMENTO P180-6
INDIGO BATIK P530-6
Primary
ACCENT
WIZARD’S POTION P550-6
JUST A FAIRYTALE P560-6
PURPLE PARADISE PPU16-3
CARBON N520-7
Scheme 4
Scheme 5
Scheme 6
Scheme 7
Scheme 8
Scheme 9
1
Primary
Denver Public Schools 2016 All Schools Color Schemes
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME SELECTOR
1
Color Scheme 1
Color Scheme 2
Color Scheme 3
Color Scheme 4
Color Scheme 5
Color Scheme 6
Denver Public Schools 2016 Elementary Color Schemes
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
2
Color Scheme 7
Color Scheme 8
Color Scheme 9
Color Scheme 10
Color Scheme 11
Color Scheme 12
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
3
Accent Colors 1
Accent Colors 2
Accent Colors 3
Accent Colors 4
Accent Colors 5
Accent Colors 6
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 1
Click on the color name to visit Behr Color Smart web site to
view the color.
1
Denver Public Schools 2016 High and Middle Color Schemes
Click the arrow to return to the
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 2
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 3
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 4
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 5
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 6
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 7
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 8
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 9
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 10
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 11
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 12
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Accent Color 1
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Accent Color 2
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Accent Color 3
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Accent Color 4
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Accent Color 5
view the color.
1
selections
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
COLOR SCHEME
Accent Color 6
view the color.
1
selections
2016 MASTER COLOR LIST
HIGH/MIDDLE SCHOOLS COLORS LIST
Scheme
1
Scheme
2
Scheme
3
Scheme
4
Scheme
5
Scheme
6
AUTHENTIC TAN N290-2
HIGH/MIDDLE SCHOOLS COLORS LIST
Primary
NATURAL TWINE S310-3
CAMPING TENT N320-4
COLORFUL LEAVES M190-7
FALL FOLIAGE M220-7A
OPTIMUM BLUE M540-7
TOASTED PECAN S190-7
WHITE MOCHA OR-W11
Primary
Scheme 9
SEASONED SALT S330-3
DESERT KHAKI N310-4
NIGHT FLIGHT S520-7
JAPANESE KOI P210-7
COMPLEX GRAY N140-5
COFFEE BEANS N150-6
DOUBLE FUDGE N130-7
CREME FRAICHE S240-1
Primary
Scheme 10
ASHEN TAN N220-2
SONORAN DESERT N240-3
WOODCRAFT N200-5
RODEO TAN N240-5
TRUE COPPER S180-7
TORNADO SEASON S450-6
MAYAN RUINS N300-7
SLENDER REED S290-3
Primary
Scheme 11
CANVAS LUGGAGE N300-2
OCTOBER LEAVES S210-7
ELEGANT NAVY M530-7
CAMPING TENT N320-4
RUSTY GATE M200-7
SUBMARINE GRAY N470-7
ALFALFA EXTRACT M380-7
CASUAL KHAKI N300-3
Primary
Scheme 12
CAMPFIRE ASH N320-1
ROASTED CASHEW S250-5
RUMBA ORANGE M230-7
BITTER LEMON M310-6
OPTIMUM BLUE M540-7
SHIITAKE N220-4
BATTLESHIP GRAY N360-4
HAZY TRAIL N350-1
Primary
LONGMEADOW S430-5
ACCENT
ACCENT
PARK PICNIC P390-7
100 MPH P170-7
ICE CAVE M480-7
ACCENT
EXTREME YELLOW P260-7
ACCENT
CORNFLOWER P520-4
SPICED BERRY S150-6
ACCENT
ACCENT
VINTER M100-6
SHAMROCKGREEN P420-5
MIDNIGHT IN THE TROPICS S480-7
ACCENT
SPLENDOR GOLD P250-6
ACCENT
CALVARY BROWN N220-7
BATTLESHIP GRAY N360-4
Scheme
7
Scheme 8
COCO N270-3
SCROLL N280-1
ALMOND COOKIE S300-3
1
Primary
Denver Public Schools 2016 All Schools Color Schemes
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
HIGH and MIDDLE SCHOOLS
1
Color Scheme 1
Color Scheme 2
Color Scheme 3
Color Scheme 4
Color Scheme 5
Color Scheme 6
2
Color Scheme 7
Color Scheme 8
Color Scheme 9
Color Scheme 10
Color Scheme 11
Color Scheme 12
Accent Colors 1
1
Accent Colors 2
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 1
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 2
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 3
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 4
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 5
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 6
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 7
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 8
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 9
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 10
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 11
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Color Scheme 12
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Accents 1
view the color.
1
selections
COLOR SCHEME
Accents 1
view the color.
1
selections
Technical Construction Guidelines
00 11 00
Page 1 of 44
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 12 00
ACCESSIBILITY STANDARD
PART 0 - PURPOSE
PART 1 1.01
DESIGN STANDARDS
APPLICABILITY OF STANDARDS
A. New construction shall comply fully with all applicable accessibility standards and guidelines including
exceptions for alternative designs intended to provide substantially equivalent accommodations for children,
and shall meet requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs).
B. Existing facilities shall be brought into compliance as far as reasonable. The A/E shall consult with DPS
regarding the extent of accessibility modifications to be included in each project.
1.02
BACKGROUND - DPS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS FOR CHILDREN
A. ADAAG as published in 1991 did not provide requirements based on children’s dimensions. In 1992, new
recommendations were developed through a research project sponsored by the Access Board. The Center for
Accessible Housing (CAH) at North Carolina State University conducted this study.
B. DPS adopted some of the CAH recommendations, and those were included in the DPS Transition Plan dated
Nov. 4, 1996.
C. In 1998 the Access Board issued final guidelines to provide additional guidance to the Dept. of Justice and the
Dept. of Transportation in establishing alternate specifications for building elements designed for use by
children. These were included in the ADAAG Supplements published in 2002.
D. In September of 2010 the Department of Justice (DOJ) adopted standards that replace the original ADA
standards. The new standards take effect March 15, 2012. (The DOJ allows immediate use of the 2010
standards). The 2010 standards were coordinated with the International Building Code (IBC). The IBC requires
compliance with ICC/ANSI A117.1. The 2010 standards and the ICC/ANSI A117.1 are almost identical. The
A/E shall consult with DPS for direction in cases where ICC/ANSI A117.1 and the DOJ 2010 standards have
different requirements.
E. The ICC/ANSI A117.1 includes a provision for alternative designs that provide substantially equivalent or
greater access and usability of a facility. Alternate design standards for children fall under this provision and
include guidelines for fixture heights and reach ranges based on the smaller size of children. The A/E design
team and contractors shall follow all applicable exceptions. Likewise where DPS has a standard that falls
within code exceptions, but is more restrictive, designers and contractors shall follow the Table of DPS
Children’s Standards (below).
1.03
DPS ACCESSIBILITY PRIORITY LEVELS
A. The District has a goal of ultimately making all facilities accessible, and recognizes the need to establish
priorities to accomplish the work. DPS has created a three tiered ranking system assigning values of importance
to each type of barrier to access. The accessibility priority levels described below are included in the DPS ADA
Transition Plan.
B. DPS maintains a database of barrier removal work at each level of accessibility at each facility. For each
project, obtain ADA database information from DPS.
Design Guidelines
00 12 00
Page 1 of 5
Accessibility Standard
Update: April 2016
C. Level 1
1.
Level 1 addresses the accessible route from destination (arrival) points on the site and the path of travel into
and through the facility. This includes main level student toilet rooms, assembly spaces, playgrounds,
specialty classrooms, first floor elementary classrooms with sinks, stages, clinics, student locker rooms and
adult restrooms. Level 1 work involves installation of an elevator to provide access to one or more of the
functions mentioned above located above or below the main level. Level 1 includes areas of rescue
assistance.
2.
Level 1 work also includes:
a)
Accessible route from vehicle to building, including:
i)
Bus loading zone
ii) Passenger loading zone
iii) Curb ramps
iv) Bad sidewalk stones
v) Parking / access aisle
vi) Steep ramps
vii) Directional signage
viii) Building entrance
b) Main floor student toilet rooms
c)
Elevator as necessary to provide access for the rest of Level 1 issues, at most schools
d) Assembly spaces (IMC, gym, auditorium, cafeteria)
e)
Playgrounds
f)
Specialty classrooms: Science, photo, dance, art (clear width at access into room)
g) General classrooms at current accessible floors (clear width at access into room)
h) Stage
i)
School clinics
j)
Gym locker rooms
k) Adult restrooms at elementary schools
3.
Accessibility at Level 1 should include the primary functions provided at educational facilities. Level 1
work is deemed to have the highest importance.
D. Level 2
1.
Level 2 expands the range of uses of a facility by an individual with a disability. Level 2 includes
accessible classrooms and toilet rooms on all levels, accessibility at early childhood education and
kindergarten toilet rooms, replacement of existing non-conforming ramps, upgrades to natatoriums and
pool locker rooms and athletic fields. Also includes TDD phones, access to the main office area and health
offices, changes to specialty classroom sinks, door hardware upgrades, complying room signage, correctly
designed office transaction counters and approved drinking fountains mounted at an acceptable height.
2.
a)
Limited elevator work
b) Toilet rooms at all floors, at schools with existing elevators and schools to receive new elevators
c)
Kindergarten and ECE toilet rooms
d) Corridor doors, ramps, handrails, and lifts
e)
Natatorium and pool locker rooms
Design Guidelines
00 12 00
Page 2 of 5
Update: April 2016
f)
Athletic fields and team locker rooms
g) Phones (TDD, height, knee space, push buttons)
h) Main office / health (nurse’s office)
i)
Specialty classrooms: Science, photo, dance, art, gym, balcony (doors, alcoves, and maneuvering
clearance)
j)
General classrooms (doors, alcoves, and maneuvering clearance)
k) Restrooms where elevators are not required
l)
Specialty class sinks, counters, stoves, bench tops, and accessories (middle school and high school)
m) Door hardware
n) Room signage
o) Office transaction counter
p) Drinking fountains
q) Curb ramps, walkways, and crosswalks
r)
3.
Vertical clearance
Completion of work through Level 2 takes the extent of work through that which is the maximum extent
feasible. Level 2 work is deemed important and should be carried out as a part of the plan.
E. Level 3
1.
Level 3 completes work for compliance and extends accessibility beyond that which is ‘student specific.’
Work in Level 3 includes removing projections from corridors, providing accessible faculty toilet rooms,
changing coat hook and shelf locations, upgrading faculty workrooms, modifying general classroom sinks
in elementary schools, widening sidewalks, correcting flooring irregularities, modifying faculty lounges,
correcting deficiencies at the employee areas in the Administration Building, upgrading spaces where
ROTC programs are provided, retrofitting existing fire alarms, instlling complying cafeteria tray slides and
general maintenance work.
2.
a)
Corridor protrusions
b) Adult restrooms (middle school) and non-school floors other than main floor
c)
Coat hooks and shelves
d) Adult offices, workrooms, kitchens
e)
General class sinks (elementary school)
f)
Other transaction counters
g) Inadequate sidewalk width
h) Flooring irregularities
i)
Faculty lounge
j)
Non-school administrative areas
k) ROTC
l)
Retrofit of existing fire alarm system
m) Cafeteria tray slide
n) Miscellaneous maintenance work
o) Custodial office
p) Miscellaneous parking / athletic
Design Guidelines
00 12 00
Page 3 of 5
Update: April 2016
3.
1.04
Much of the work described in Level 3 falls under the requirements of Title I and relates to employees.
Due to the nature of this work, Level 3 deficiencies are not specifically scheduled for remediation under the
plan. However, if during the implementation period Phase 3 issues need to be addressed at any of the
District’s facilities, funding from the contingency budget could be considered.
TABLE OF DPS CHILDREN’S STANDARDS
ICC/ANSI A117.1 - IBC
DPS POLICY FOR PRE-SCHOOL,
KINDERGARTEN, AND ELEMENTARY
GRADE LEVELS
High forward and side reach: 36” AFF (max.)
Low forward and side reach: 20” AFF (min.)
308.1 Reach Ranges
ECE/Kindergarten: Use standard 36” AFF for general
and panic hardware.
404.2.6 Door and Gate Hardware
All Other Grades: Use standard 39” AFF for general
and panic hardware.
405.2 Ramp Slope
Provide 1:20 slope
IBC 1010
Comply when room is available.
EXCEPTION: Use 1:12 for prefabricated ramps at
modular classroom installations only.
505.4 Handrails
Use child rail at 26” AFF in addition to adult standard
railing.
602.4 Drinking Fountain - Low Spout Height.
30” with side (parallel) approach (see 602.2)
602.4 Drinking Fountain – High Spout Height
603.3 Mirrors
38”
30” AFF (max. to bot. Mirror) or as low as possible
w/o conflict w/ faucets or controls.
36” Max.
603.4 Accessible Shelves and Coat Hooks.
604.8.5 Toe Clearance at Toilet Stall.
Comply
12” at front and one side
(Exception for oversized stalls)
604.10.2 WC Location - Wall to CL
ECE/Kindergarten a.: Use 12”
All other grades:
Use 16” Max.(604.2) b.
604.10.3 Clearance @ WC
Comply
604.10.4 Water Closet Height: (measured to top of
toilet seat)
ECE/Kindergarten a.: Use 11” to 12”
604.10.5 Grab Bars: also see 609.4 Position of Grab
Bars
ECE/Kindergarten a.: Use standard of 25”
604.10.6 Flush Controls
604.10.7 TP Dispenser
Comply
ECE/Kindergarten a.: Use 14”
All Other Grades: Use 17”
604.10.8 Toilet Compartments
Comply (No 36” Stall Allowed as substitute)
605.2 Urinal Height
14” Rim Height
605.4 Urinal Flush Control
36” Max Height
Design Guidelines
00 12 00
Page 4 of 5
All other Grades:
Use 17” Max. (604.4) b.
All Other Grades: Use 33” Max. b.
Update: April 2016
606.2. (exc. #3) Lavatory Height and Clear Space
608 Showers
703.3.10 Sign Height
803.5 Coat Hooks and Shelves
902.4 Dining and Work Surfaces for Children
904.3 Checkout Counter
a.
b.
c.
Comply for Parallel Approach: 24” Knee Space and
31” Max. Rim Ht.
Children’s Showers c. in Elementary Schools:
Use 17” Seat Ht. standard
Control Height 38”
Use 27” Side Grab Bar Ht. (in addition to the standard
grab bar at standard height)
Comply - 48” to bottom of tactile letters
Provide 5% of Coat Hooks and Shelves at each
classroom at 36” max. height.
Comply
Library Checkout: Counter Height
Use 30” (one position)
ECE and Kindergarten restrooms in classrooms are not included in the required fixture count.
Water closets and grab bars for grade levels 1 through 5 shall be at minimum standard adult range.
Showers for children are limited to special needs programs where students will likely have assistance.
Design Guidelines
00 12 00
Page 5 of 5
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 20 00
EXTERIOR BUILDING ENVELOPE
PART 0 -
PURPOSE
PART 1 -
EXTERIOR FINISH MATERIALS
A. Walls:
1.
Durability - Hard, durable, low maintenance materials such as brick, pre-cast concrete, etc.
2.
Maintenance - Cleanable materials - removal of graffiti may be necessary.
3.
Texture - Avoid any high relief texture or projecting elements which would assist in the climbing of building
walls.
4.
Height - Exterior walls 14' height (min.)
5.
Parapet Caps:
6.
PART 2 -
a.
Sheet metal sloped to interior of roof. (preferred assembly), or;
b.
Pre-cast or stone caps sloped to interior of roof w/ sealant joints (DPS approval required).
c.
Do NOT use masonry wash caps or unit masonry caps.
Below Grade Protection:
a.
Membrane Waterproofing shall be applied to all below grade walls enclosing an occupied space. A/E to
select appropriate system dependent on site conditions.
b.
Multiple Systems - where both dampproofing and waterproofing are specified, clearly indicate the extent of
each.
c.
Membrane Waterproofing must be protected prior to backfill.
protection board.
d.
Dampproofing shall be applied to all foundation walls, grade beams etc. where utility trenches or crawl
spaces are adjacent.
Apply manufacturer's recommended
DOORS:
A. Exterior doors shall be painted hollow metal (steel).
B. See section 08 80 00 for glazing materials.
PART 3 -
BUILDING ENTRIES
A. Lighting - Provide Security Lighting
B. Durability - Provide break-resistant materials
C. Below Grade Entries - Avoid exterior stairs to below grade entries. Exterior stairs to below grade entrances shall be
enclosed with doors at grade level.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 1 of 10
Exterior Building Envelope
Update: April 2016
D. Avoid steps at all public building entries. Utilize ramps where possible.
E. Recessed Entries should be provided at major building entries to provide wind shelter. Construct entries for wall
stops on doors.
PART 4 -
ROOFING SYSTEMS
A. Roofing systems preferred by DPS, in order of preference:
1.
Built-up
2.
Fully adhered EPDM
B. Fully detail the roofing system. Details shall be custom designed to address the specific conditions present on the
building, including corners, changes in direction and differences in adjacent roof elevations. Manufacturer’s
standard details shall not be assumed to be adequate for the needs of DPS. Although details need to be acceptable to
the manufacturer, details may be different than the manufacturer’s standard details.
C. Where included in the scope of services, the A/E shall provide daily construction observation reports to DPS.
D. Equipment support systems
1.
Rooftop equipment shall be mounted to curbs that are flashed in to the roof system. Roof curbs shall be
specified in appropriate specification sections.
2.
Rooftop conduits shall be fastened to sheet metal triangle stands. Stands shall be mechanically fastened to
2’x2’x2” concrete pavers. Pavers shall be set on modified rolled roofing pads. One stand for every ten foot (10’)
of conduit and no more than one paver per stand. Supports shall not penetrate the roof membrane.
3.
Gas lines and electrical conduit over 2” shall be fastened to Unistrut stands. Stands shall be mechanically
fastened to 2’x2’x2” concrete paver. Pavers shall be set on modified rolled roofing pads. One stand for every
ten foot (10’) of gas line and no more than one paver per stand. See photo at end of section.
4.
A/E shall coordinate minimum heights and clearances with applicable codes.
5.
All condensing lines, suppy lines and electrical lines need to be run though separate cone jacks, or a dog house.
No pitch pans. See photos at end of section.
E. At base-flashing details where the roof deck/roof framing is not supported by the higher wall, a wall expansion joint
detail shall be used. This shall be achieved using a wood curb of continuous elevation, with 8” minimum height
above high point of adjacent insulation elevation, including any crickets/saddles that intersect the perimeter in
question. Wall expansion joint detail shall be sealed using a single-ply membrane drape and sheet metal cover, as
directed in Section 07 60 00.
F.
Exhaust all other options prior to approving or designing a pitch pan.
G. A/E shall lay out all roof penetrations and shall provide clear documentation of the acceptable minimum separation
between penetrations, considering flashing requirements.
H. Permanent walkway pads are required around the perimeters of major rooftop mechanical equipment (exhaust fans
excepted) and at roof access points.
PART 5 -
ROOF AND WALL SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Specify all roof accessories required for the completion of the project.
B. Roof curbs are specified elsewhere.
C. Fully coordinate roof scuttle hatch layouts, locations, and details, including the relationships between ladders and
scuttle hatches.
PART 6 -
ROOF ACCESSORIES
A. Indicate sizes and locations of roof curbs in the contract documents.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 2 of 10
Update: April 2016
B. Each curb shall be fabricated such that base plate follows slope of roof deck and top surface of metal construction
provides a level top surface for nailer and subsequent mounting of mechanical equipment. Coordinate equipment
orientation with roof slope direction to ensure proper fabrication.
C. Design roof framing to be continuous below the perimeter of each opening.
D. Field or custom fabricated wood roof curbs are acceptable if designed and detailed by the A/E.
E. Roof curbs shall have a minimum height of 12” above finished roof surface.
F.
No penetrations allowed through the top of metal curb caps. All condensating units, exhaust units shall be anchored
to Uni-Strut, the Uni-Strut to be fastened to the sides of curb.
G. Coordinate fire protection for roof curbs with building code requirements.
protection include those at kitchen exhaust hoods and roof scuttle hatches.
PART 7 -
Curbs commonly requiring fire
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
A. Design sheet metal to shed water.
B. Sheet metal coping caps shall be used at the top of parapet walls and masonry walls.
1.
Caps shall be sloped to the roof interior. Provide adequate pitch and edge detail to prevent drainage onto
exterior face of building.
2.
Provide continuous clip at exposed face.
3.
Provide 45-degree hemmed drip edge at bottom of exposed face.
4.
Provide continuous solid support under copings.
C. Reglets and counterflashing
1.
At masonry parapets, cast reglet into masonry joint and use cotton weep ropes and weep tubes to facilitate
removal of moisture from wall cavity.
2.
At surfaces other than masonry, two-piece, surface mounted reglet and counterflashing shall be used to
terminate completed base flashings, termination bars (EPDM system), and 3-course treatments (BUR system).
3.
Wherever possible, maintain constant reglet elevation at entire roof perimeter (avoid stepping reglet).
4.
Reglet elevation shall consider minimum flashing height required at high point of any insulation elevation,
including any crickets/saddles that intersect the perimeter details.
D. Edge metal shall have raised (gravel stop-style) edge to prevent water from draining onto exterior face of building.
1.
Provide continuous clip at exposed face.
2.
Provide 45-degree hemmed drip edge at bottom of exposed face.
E. Expansion joints shall be detailed using metal covers. Use of bellows-style covers is not approved, unless absolutely
necessary. If used, bellows-style covers shall be installed only after watertight, continuous; single-ply membrane
drapes are installed over the joints.
F.
Pre-manufactured fascia systems
1.
Pre-manufactured fascia systems are not recommended for use with built-up roof systems.
2.
Specify pre-manufactured fascia system at single-ply roof system.
3.
Verify the required face height and specify the model number accordingly.
4.
The pre-manufactured fascia system shall be supplied by the membrane manufacturer, and shall be included
under the total system warranty.
G. Joint type at each roof related sheet metal component shall be indicated in the detail drawings.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 3 of 10
Update: April 2016
H. Specify galvanized or stainless steel for all components that require field soldering or welding. Pre-finished steel
cannot be specified where a solder or weld joint is required. Examples include pitch pans, pipe jacks, and scupper
inserts.
I.
For most situations, specify pre-finished steel for components where soldering or welding of joints is not required,
including counterflashings, copings, edge metal, fascia extensions, expansion joint covers, control joint covers, etc.
Galvanized steel shall be used for associated concealed cleats.
J.
Gutters and downspouts are not recommended but may be used when necessary.
1.
Minimum one downspout per 50 lineal feet of gutter, or oversize gutter by 25% for every additional 10 lineal
feet of downspout separation.
2.
Provide overflow at header.
3.
Open front downspout style is preferred. Space braces far enough apart to prevent inadvertent creation of a
ladder.
4.
Design, detail, locate, and install to discourage vandalism and unauthorized roof access.
5.
Surface discharge onto sidewalks or pavement is prohibited.
K. Prohibited materials: Plastic, PVC, lead, zinc, and “weathering” type materials.
PART 8 -
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
A. Report selected insulation types and systems at Design Development Phase. Roof insulation thicknesses affect
design of adjacent building components (i.e. through-wall flashings, window sills, door thresholds, wall
penetrations, rooftop equipment/piping, etc.). It is the intent of DPS to prevent the need to redesign major adjacent
components due to roof insulation thicknesses not being accommodated.
B. All roof decks shall be numbered “001”, “002” , etc. Each distinct roof shall have a unique number. For existing
roof decks, use deck numbers previously established by DPS.
C. Conduct sufficient research to specify insulation by thickness. Insulation shall not be specified by R-Value. This
will ensure all bidders are basing their pricing on the same information, and eliminates the potential for
interpretation-based arguments. The minimum insulating value of the roofing assembly shall be R-38.
D. Roof slope
1.
Roof design shall provide 1/4” per foot roof surface slope for all roofing systems.
2.
Coordinate roof framing to create slope by use of the roof framing system where possible.
3.
Minimize the use of tapered insulation to provide field slope. Use tapered insulation to provide crickets/saddles
and drain sumps.
4.
Saddles and crickets shall be of same material as the base insulation materials.
5.
Crickets/saddles shall be designed to provide ¼” per foot minimum slope on the finished roof surface.
6.
Provide crickets at the upslope side of all rectangular penetrations greater than 2’-0” in width.
E. Roof drainage
1.
Locate roof drains in sunny roof areas wherever possible.
2.
Roof drains shall discharge into the storm sewer wherever possible. If surface drainage is necessary, consult
with Denver Wastewater Management.
3.
Overflow drainage provisions shall be incorporated such that no more than the code-required maximum limit of
ponding is possible on any portion of the roof before the overflow drainage system begins to prevent additional
ponding. A/E shall engineer the entire overflow capacity in accordance with governing building codes.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 4 of 10
Update: April 2016
4.
Overflow drainage may be provided either by overflow scuppers or by separate drainage system, designed to
meet building code requirements.
5.
Ponding water requirements by Denver Wastewater Management may necessitate greater water depths prior to
overflow drainage mechanisms becoming operational. These requirements would also require an increase in the
roof structure’s load carrying capacity. Avoid ponding of water on roof unless it is unavoidable. Utilize site
ponding where practical if retention of water is required. No roof ponding of water for retention purposes shall
be permitted without the prior written approval of DPS.
6.
Sump pans shall not be used for roof drains. Drain bowl rim and underdeck clamp shall bear directly on the
roof deck. A neat, round opening of the minimum size needed shall be cut in the steel deck at each roof drain
location. Circular openings in roof deck shall be supported by the roof structure.
7.
Primary drain and overflow drain shall both be located within a common rectangular flat area (4’ x 4’ square
recommended), with tapered insulation on all four sides to provide a smooth transition to the primary roof
insulation system. Tapered insulation within drain areas shall be factory fabricated, not field cut. Slope on
sides of transition shall not exceed 1” per foot. Minimum insulation thickness at drain rim shall be 1”. Ponding
is not allowed adjacent to drains.
8.
Overflow drain clamping ring shall be set level with roof surface elevation, in same 4’ x 4’ flat area as primary
roof drain. In no case shall overflow drains be sumped below the surrounding roof elevation unless the primary
roof drain is contained within the same sump area.
9.
Top of overflow standpipe shall be no more than the code-required elevation above roof level and no less than
2” above roof level. Top of overflow standpipe elevation shall be measured from roof elevation at top of drain
sump, not flat area within bottom of drain sump.
10. Overflow drainage may be provided at roof edges where roof slopes and layout permit. Gravel stop edges or
perimeter parapets less than 4" in height, located along the perimeter of lowest roof elevation, may be used to
provide all or part of the necessary overflow drainage provision. Provide adequate detailing to assure that roof
edge overflows operate only under overflow conditions.
11. Where upper roofs drain onto lower roofs, provide splash blocks on a pad.
F.
Use multiple layers of insulation as opposed to a single layer. Joints between layers shall be staggered.
G. Under-deck roof insulation is not recommended. If use is allowed for a specific project-related requirement, the A/E
shall design the roofing system to prevent condensation.
H. Determine whether current building code requires gypsum board within the roof insulation assembly.
I.
Specify demolition, removal and disposal requirements where re-roofing is required.
PART 9 -
MASONRY AND MORTAR
A. Mortar:
1.
In general, specify the weakest mortar that will meet project requirements.
B. Masonry Grout:
1.
High-lift grouting (over 4'-0" per lift) shall not be designed without cleanouts at the bottom of each grouting lift.
Temporary cleanouts must not be visible in finished construction. Cleanouts not required for self-consolidating
grout.
C. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements:
1.
Specify cold and hot weather requirements.
D. Inspections by others do not relieve the A/E of contract requirements.
E. Avoid grouted masonry where exterior face brick forms one or more sides of the grouted surface.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 5 of 10
Update: April 2016
F.
Bullnose
1.
Avoid bullnoses at door jambs where resilient base is to be applied. (return to jamb is too small to maintain base
adhesion). Frames or other trim should extend 1/2” beyond face of masonry so base can abut.
G. All masonry exposed on the interior of the building shall have a dense, smooth surface which is easily cleanable and
is resistant to marring.
1.
Wire cut, ribbed, or otherwise heavily textured or uneven brick or concrete masonry shall not be used in interior
applications.
2.
Interior concrete masonry units exposed and unpainted in the finished construction shall be dense, smooth,
ground face units.
H. Structural glazed tile masonry units may be used under special circumstances and in limited applications and review
with DPS.
I.
Glass unit masonry, thin brick veneer, and surface bonded masonry are prohibited.
PART 10 -
CONCRETE
A. Provide chamfers at top of foundation and at all outside corners of exposed formed concrete surfaces, including
structural and architectural concrete.
B. Formwork shall be tight at joints and corners to prevent leakage.
C. Form oil is prohibited where stucco, plaster or paint is to be applied to formed concrete surfaces.
D. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve A/E of contract responsibilities.
1.
Observe concrete pours.
2.
Observe formwork and reinforcing prior to concrete placement.
E. Coordinate design of exterior flatwork, walks and paving with other Division 32 standards.
F.
Use of pigmented and stained concrete is prohibited.
G. Special floor slab design requirements
1.
Provide a membrane vapor barrier below the slab to prevent the migration of moisture up through the slab.
2.
Design sloping requirements to floor drains and provide indications on the drawings showing the complete
thickness of the slabs in these areas.
3.
Refer to standard Section 03 35 00 for coordination of floor slab curing requirements with manufacturer’s
requirements for all flooring materials
H. Specify concrete finishes for all interior concrete whether covered with finish flooring or left exposed.
I.
Compound shall be resistant to de-icing chemicals.
J.
Specify a finished clear sealer for all interior slabs that are to remain exposed in the finished work (Exception:
Mechanical chases).
K. Scarification shall be accomplished by sandblasting or shotblasting of slab prior to installation of flooring.
L. Exposed aggregate and other heavy/rough exposed finishes are prohibited.
M. Use of pigmented sealers and concrete stains is prohibited.
N. Use of non-dissipating curing and sealing compound is prohibited.
O. Acid washing is prohibited unless fully extracted.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 6 of 10
Update: April 2016
PART 11 -
GROUT
A. Provide chamfers at top of foundation and at all outside corners of exposed formed concrete surfaces, including
structural and architectural concrete.
B. Coordinate grout strength with project requirements.
C. Coordinate the manufacturer’s recommended practices with the method of application, especially dry pack method.
PART 12 -
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
A. Use waterproofing or dampproofing for basements, elevator pit.
B. Use dampproofing for foundations.
C. Exterior applications shall receive protection board (or insulation) prior to back-fill in all cases.
D. Water repellents are prohibited on masonry surfaces. Other uses of water repellents must be approved by DPS.
E. Coordinate project specific requirements for both dampproofing and waterproofing with Getotechnical Data as
available.
PART 13 -
BRICK
A. Brick is the preferred material for exterior walls. Review other exterior cladding options.
B. “Modular” size (7-5/8” x 3-5/8” x 2-1/4”) brick is preferred.
C. Matching of existing brick, delivery time, and future availability often determine brick specification criteria.
D. Exposed brick is strongly discouraged for exterior horizontal applications with upward exposure such as copings,
caps, rowlocks, sills, and reveals.
PART 14 -
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. Concrete unit masonry shall not be used on the building exterior.
PART 15 -
METAL WINDOWS
A. Window sizes should be limited in both width and height so that operable sashes do not become too heavy for the
hardware.
B. Windowsills should be at least 32” above the finished floors, unless approved by DPS.
C. Tinted or special reflective glazing is not permitted unless approved by DPS.
D. Provide Hard Coat Low E glazing unless otherwise approved by DPS.
E. Window Characteristics:
1.
IBC 2015 and IECC 2015, triple glazed, energy compliant windows.
a)
U Factor = .38 maximum for fixed windows.
b) U Factor = .45 maximum for operable windows.
c)
SHGC = .40 maximum.
2.
All windows shall be aluminum frame windows with internal storm sash and internal blinds. Max 48” width on
glazing and integral blinds.
3.
Window finishes to be anodized clear unless approved by DPS.
4.
Color finishes (if approved) shall be 50 percent Kynar.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 7 of 10
Update: April 2016
F.
Window Types:
1.
Classrooms in air-conditioned schools shall have one operable window (or partially operable) per unit. All
other windows shall be fixed.
2.
Classrooms in non-air-conditioned schools and additions shall have sufficient operable windows to provide for
warm weather ventilation of the room. Maintain minimum of 90 percent of original operable configuration for
replacement windows.
3.
In-swinging hopper windows are preferred for operable sections. Out-swinging vent windows may be used
where the projected window does not present a hazard to people walking outside the building. All projectedtype vent windows shall have 9” limit stops incorporated.
4.
Single-hung or double-hung windows shall have openings limited to 9” in height. Preferred window operation
for replacement double hung windows is a sash-balanced operation where the lower sash is counterbalanced by
the upper sash through a pulley and cable system. When the lower sash is raised, the upper sash shall lower.
The sash-balanced system cannot be used when the upper and lower sash sizes do not match.
5.
Casement windows are to be avoided, except in historic buildings and when approved by DPS.
6.
All vent windows are required to have an ANSI/AAMA 101-97 minimum AW-70 rating. All single-hung and
double-hung windows shall have a minimum AW-50 rating.
G. Storefront and Curtain Wall Installations:
1.
Storefront and aluminum-framed curtain wall installations shall be reviewed with DPS early in the Project. The
use of these systems shall be limited to special areas of the building where the use of hollow metal frames is not
appropriate.
2.
No exterior doors are to be hung in aluminum storefront or curtain wall installations. Where aluminum framing
is approved for the Project and the framing is adjacent to door constructions, the design of the area shall provide
for masonry construction to separate the hollow metal door framing and the aluminum framing.
H. Windows will not be equipped with screens except as required hereafter:
1.
Provide window bug screens at all operable sashes in:
a)
Cafeterias
b) Kitchens
c)
Home economics areas
I.
The A/E shall review installation details so that surrounding construction does not limit access to operators.
J.
Avoid operable sashes that weight more than 60 pounds.
K. Retrofit of historic windows will require individual considerations, and A/E shall coordinate with DPS for window
appearance, operation, and hardware.
L. Retrofit Historic Casement/Projected windows shall be AW-70 minimum rating and shall be able to accommodate
both historic exterior trapezoid applied muntins as well as internal blinds.
M. Casting Cover system (Historic Panning and Trim) which replicate historic exterior brick mould and interior trim
shall be used for installing retrofit windows. Panning and Trim shall be extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125” wall
for panning at head and jambs and 0.125” wall minimum at sill for durability, using 0.062” wall minimum for
interior trim. “Break Metal” shall not be acceptable method of installation and waterproofing.
PART 16 -
WOOD WINDOW RESTORATION
A. Due to the extent of detail provided in this standard, the A/E may choose to edit this standard and incorporate
portions of this standard in the construction documents. To obtain an electronic copy of this standard in Microsoft
Word format, contact DPS.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 8 of 10
Update: April 2016
B. Historic windows shall be designed to maintain the appearance and profile of the original windows. Matching
window operations is required for non-airconditioned school.
C. Air conditioned schools shall have at least one operating window per classroom. Profiles and operation must match
exisiting.
D. Historic refers to buildings that have been designated by the Denver Landmark Commission as Landmark Buildings.
E. Buildings that have been designated as “eligible” for landmark designation must be coordinated with City and
County of Denver Landmark Commission and are subject to the same guidelines as those buildings that are already
designated. The Landmark Commission does not have authority to enforce regulations on buildings which are
“eligible” but are not “landmarked”. Consult with DPS for the listing of “landmarked” and “eligible” buildings and
for guidance in the approach to restoration of windows in these buildings.
F.
Historic windows in ‘landmarked’ and ‘eligible’ buildings are subject to approvals by the City and County of
Denver, the Landmark Commission and the Preservation Architect.
G. Non-historic wood window restoration shall follow the same general methods and procedures as that of historic
window, but need not gain approvals other than from DPS.
H. Tinted or special reflective glazing may only be used in non-historic windows if specifically approved by DPS.
I.
Use existing glass as much as possible.
J.
Do not use thicker glass for replacement than what is being removed without the written approval of DPS. If for
some reason thicker glass is needed, the opening that the glass is installed in shall have both pieces of wood
reworked to accommodate the new glass so that all adjustments are not made on one piece of wood. Window
weights shall be adjusted..
K. A complete evaluation survey of the existing conditions of each wood window shall be made to determine the extent
of repairs necesssary. The evaluation survey may be in the form of a schedule and shall note at a minimum:
1.
Window Location
2.
Condition of the Paint
3.
Condition of the Frame and Sill
4.
Condition of the Interior and Exterior trim
5.
Condition of the Sash ( Including Rails, Stiles, and Muntins)
6.
Glazing Problems
7.
Window Hardware and Operating System
8.
The Overall Condition of the Window
9.
Exterior caulking problems. Water entering around the edges of the frame and/or sash or the window
L. Hazardous materials may be present in exisiting windows. A/E to coordinate with DPS for method of identification
and removal.
M. An existing window of each type or scope as defined by DPS shall serve as an example/control sample of the quality
of repairs to be provided, shall be paid for by DPS, and shall be prepared for inspection and approval by DPS, the
Architect, and in Historic Buildings- Approval Agencies.
N. Epoxy consolidants shall be used only where the existing material is substantial and where deterioration can be
completely removed. Replacement of members should be considered wherever the member or any portion of the
profile is more than 25% deteriorated.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 9 of 10
Update: April 2016
O. SD, DD, CD Requirements
1.
Architect shall provide the following to DPS prior to incorporation into Construction Documents:
a) Name of Window Restoration Companies, staff experience, capacity, and number of years in business.
b) Product Data and Methods to be Utilized.
c) Locations of each window(s) to be repaired.
Design Guidelines
00 20 00
Page 10 of 10
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 21 00
SUPERSTRUCTURE
PART 0 - PURPOSE
A.
Describe broad guidelines for design of schools.
B.
Establish materials qualities and applications.
C.
Describe materials and conditions which do not easily fit into specific specification sections.
D.
See specific sections of Design of Construction Standards for additional requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
General Framing
1.
B.
C.
Roof Structures
1.
Minimum load capacity: Roof membrane dead load to be 10 pounds per square foot (minimum)
regardless of roofing system specified.
2.
Pitch: Drainage of roof areas to utilize structural slope as much as possible. See Section 07500 for
minimum slope requirements.
Floor Structures
1.
D.
Minimize use of interior load bearing walls to allow for future flexibility.
Design floor structures for future flexibility. Recommend 50 pounds per square foot design live load
minimum plus allowance for partitions.
Foundations
1.
Follow recommendations contained in Geotechnical report. Geotechnical report to include discussion
of collapsible/expansive soils and potential for sulfate attack.
E.
Verify that structural steel finishes (primer, etc.) are compatible with subsequent finishes (paint) and/or
subsequent treatments (i.e. spray or trowel applied fireproofing).
F.
Detail sloping members and splice conditions. Perform welding in accordance with AISC/AWS
procedures.
G.
Specify welding procedures.
H.
Specify storage requirements to include protection of members prior to erection.
I.
Indicate bearing plate setting tolerances.
J.
Include erection tolerances. Erection tolerances shall be established for structural integrity and aesthetic
appearance At a minimum, specify standard tolerances from the AISC Code of Standard Practice. More
stringent requirements may be required for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Elements (AESS).
K.
Coordinate joist finishes to assure they are compatible with subsequent treatments (i.e. spray or trowel
applied fireproofing).
L.
Detail bridging anchorage at masonry walls and other bridging terminations.
M.
Detail sloped bearing conditions so that bearing plates and joist bearing ends do not require shims or other
remedial actions.
Design Guidelines
00 21 00
Page 1 of 2
Superstructure
Update: April 2016
N.
Fastening of deck to structure shall be through welding washers or self-tapping screws. Weld washers are
required on decking 22 gauge and thinner. Washers are not required on metal decking greater than 22
gauge. Puddle welds are prohibited on all types of metal deck. Side lap and end lap fastening shall be
made using self-tapping screws only.
O.
Determine if shoring is required for elevated slab pours. If needed, specify requirements.
P.
Specify all required accessories including closure plates and pour stops.
Q.
Specify all restrictions on decking including:
1. Maximum openings permitted without sub-framing
2. Maximum span
R.
Coordinate finishes with subsequent treatments and/or exposures including:
1. Coordinate decking finish to receive fireproofing.
2. Coordinate decking finishes for special exposures.
PART 2 - PROHIBITIONS
A.
Steel decking shall not be used for the attachment of anchorages or supports for suspended equipment, subframing systems, substructure, ceilings, fascias, soffits, or other mounting, bracing, or fastening.
1. Exception: Attachment, anchorages, or supports specifically designed or approved by the Structural
Engineer.
Design Guidelines
00 21 00
Page 2 of 2
Superstructure
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 30 00
INTERIOR WALL SYSTEM
PART 0 - PURPOSE
PART 1 - DRAWINGS:
A. Clearly designate each wall and/or partition type.
B. Clearly define locations where wall types change.
PART 2 - WALL / PARTITION USES
A. Masonry Partitions
1.
2.
Use Masonry partitions or masonry veneer metal stud partitions (veneer on public side) in all high use
areas:
a.
Gymnasium
b.
Multipurpose Room
c.
Corridor (masonry veneer may be stopped at door head height in Elementary Schools)
d.
Kitchen (Comply with health code requirements)
e.
Toilets
f.
Other areas as directed by DPS
Masonry Corners:
a.
Bullnose at all outside corners in masonry partitions.
b.
Bullnose at all masonry window jambs, exposed door jambs, etc. (Use hollow metal frames at full
wall depth plus ¾” where possible to avoid the need for bullnose corners.)
B. Gypsum Wallboard Partitions
1.
Use in "controlled areas" such as:
a.
Classroom interiors
b.
Libraries (LMC)
c.
Offices
d.
Storerooms
2.
Studs spaced at 16” o.c. (max.)
3.
Gypsum wallboard to be standard strength or higher.
4.
Partitions between classrooms shall extend through ceilings to structure above for sound isolation.
5.
Gypboard corners exposed to high impact shall be protected with rubber corner guards, “high impact”
bullnose corner beads, or other protection to reduce the susceptibility of these areas to damage.
6.
Use only fire rated Type- X gypsum board throughout to avoid using non-rated in fire rated assemblies.
Design Guidelines
00 30 00
Page 1 of 3
Interior Wall System
Update: April 2016
7.
Use only 5/8” thick gypsum board. All other sizes will require approval by DPS.
8.
Architect shall coordinate sound and vibration issues.
9.
Architect shall provide ample control joints to avoid cracking, provide location and detail on the drawings.
10. Control joints shall not carry over structural systems.
11. Architect shall coordinate the requirements where fire rated ceiling and wall assemblies occur, where
required. Provide details for walls meeting underside of deck.
12. Architect shall verify with DPS any sound special acoustical or vibration separation requirements, i.e.
music rooms.
13. Architect shall coordinate fire treated blocking for all corner guard locations, and all other items requiring
mounting support, if used as a wall material.
14. Architect to coordinate metal framing requirements and those of this section.
15. Do not use gypsum board in exterior applications as an exterior finish material.
C. Demountable And Folding Partitions
1.
The use of demountable and folding partitions should be reviewed with DPS. Preferred systems would
include track assemblies or other “single location” arrangements so that the surrounding construction may
be designed to continue sound transmission and containment.
D. Operable Partitions
1.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS the locations and type of operable partitions.
2.
Architect shall provide acoustic separation above the track between spaces.
3.
Architect shall coordinate with the Denver Fire Department where such devices may be prohibited due to
fire ratings and occupant loads.
4.
Architect/Engineer shall make consideration for HVAC loads that may occur due to increased occupant
loads for spaces created. Provide supply and return on each side of partition.
5.
Architect shall make consideration for proper structural bracing of operable partitions.
6.
Architect shall coordinate sound transmission requirements with DPS when placing and selecting operable
partitions, but the minimum shall be 54 STC.
7.
Architect shall allow room for proper stacking of partitions when in the open position.
8.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS where motorized partitions may be required.
9.
Accordion door partitions are prohibited.
E. Structural Metal Stud Framing
1.
Architect shall coordinate with the local codes to determine where and what type of rated walls may be
required and provide UL rating number and corresponding detail on the drawings.
2.
Architect shall coordinate with the MEP to allow proper suspension of ceiling, i.e. avoid a five foot duct in
a five foot wide corridor.
3.
Architect shall coordinate where shaft wall construction is required and/or appropriate with compliance to
local codes.
4.
Corner framing to have double studs for mounting of corner guards.
5.
Architect shall coordinate locations of fire treated blocking; metal strip blocking is prohibited.
6.
Door frame jambs shall be double studs full height to structure above, double stud head detail with the head
installed at least 1/4" to 1/2" into the top of the door frame.
Design Guidelines
00 30 00
Page 2 of 3
Update: April 2016
7.
Provide double studs at all control and expansion joints to structure above. Locate and identify all control
joints and expansion joints on plans.
8.
Frame openings other than door openings in the same manner as required for door openings and install
framing below sills of openings to match framing required above the door.
9.
Architect shall coordinate door openings with overhead ductwork penetrating stud wall above ceiling to
prevent interruption of the jamb double studs.
10. Provide framing to conceal all pipes, ducts and conduits not indicated as exposed.
11. Architect shall specify gauges by unsupported length as required by applicable codes and manufacturer.
12. Architect shall coordinate special sound insulation requirements and locations with DPS.
13. Architect shall detail walls with piping and or ducts to ensure proper clearances and sound attenuation are
maintained.
14. Classrooms perimeters shall have full height partitions to structure.
15. Architect shall coordinate all sound, fire and attachment issues for occupied buildings, particularly details
where walls meet structural members and the deck.
16. Exterior soffits shall have cross bracing designed for uplift. Coordinate expected deflection of system with
structural engineer and specify tolerances.
17. Architect shall coordinate with the structural engineer all requirements for structural studs.
18. Provide details of deflection track conditions at all locations where partitions terminate at structure or deck
subject to movement. Detail fire wall deflection construction and list U.L number for assembly.
19. Coordinate wall thickness with all components to be contained within walls including piping, structure,
electrical panels and recessed equipment.
20. Coordinate with Structural Engineer to identify where cross bracing or other stabilizing construction is
required in load-bearing construction only.
Design Guidelines
00 30 00
Page 3 of 3
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 40 00
PLUMBING DESIGN GUIDELINES
PART 0
PURPOSE
PART 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
A. Assume that buildings will be enlarged and modified in the future.
1.
Make provisions for future interconnections, upgrading, and expansion of mechanical systems.
B. Designs for plumbing shall not locate any plumbing in exterior walls.
C. DPS looks with concern on new and untried materials and equipment. We are opposed to experimentation on
our projects. However, we look forward to preliminary evaluation of innovative designs.
D. For aesthetic reasons, locate or appropriately enclose large and unsightly exterior installations to be hidden from
public view.
1.
Building elevation drawings must show mechanical installations, including installations projecting above
parapet walls.
2.
If due consideration of aesthetics is not observed, the Owner will require redesign until an acceptable
aesthetic design is achieved.
3.
Historic landmark structures require design coordination with the Denver Landmark Commission.
E. For security reasons, include enclosures and barriers to protect exterior and rooftop mechanical equipment from
vandalism and unauthorized intrusion.
F.
Equipment air intake locations
1.
As high off the ground as possible to avoid vehicle exhaust and other biological contamination.
2.
As far away as possible from plumbing vents, kitchen exhaust vents, fume hood exhaust, and similar
ventilating and exhaust units.
G. Design sufficient facilities and clearances for orderly arrangements, concealment, and optimal maintenance of
equipment, piping, and conduit. Give special consideration to ceiling spaces.
H. Provide sufficient and safe access for maintenance of mechanical systems.
1.
Sufficient access implies the capability to replace major components with minor impact to the building.
2.
Clearly indicate sizes and locations of ceiling and wall access panels.
I.
Provide curbed floor areas for storage of on-site water-treatment chemicals, following water-treatment
consultant’s recommendations.
J.
When renovating or retrofitting mechanical systems or spaces, review the need to remove asbestos-containing
materials including, but not limited to, insulation.
K. Abandoned piping shall be removed in it’s entirety from existing walls or other locations. Existing valve to be
removed when new replacement valve is installed.
1.
Contractor to remove all flushometers and faucets from demolished/removed plumbing fixtures and return
to DPS.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 1 of 8
Plumbing Design Guidelines
Update: April 2016
L. Controls: Coordinate controls standards with the DPS Project Manager and the DPS Controls Application
Engineer.
M. Design temperatures for heating and air conditioning systems
1.
Winter: 78 degrees F temperature difference between inside and outside conditions (-10 degrees F outside
air temperature, 68 degrees F inside air temperature).
2.
Summer: ASHRAE Summer .04% but 92F db and 61F wb outside conditions if air intake is above a
roof, and 95/59 for systems with high make-up air intake. 76F db, 63F wb inside conditions.
3.
Consult with the DPS Project Manager for temperature and humidity requirements for special areas such as
computer rooms, etc.
N. Fan coil units and radiation will be required in specific areas to facilitate shut-down of major air handling units.
Where necessary, the controls on these units shall be coordinated with the controls on the air handling units.
O. All air conditioning systems shall have air economizer cycles. Systems which have economizer cycles shall be
capable of running the cooling equipment independent of the economizer cycle controls. Furthermore, the
economizer control shall not revert to the minimum outside air damper position for cooling season unless
mechanical cooling is available.
1.
In order to take advantage of economizer cooling to the highest temperature possible, return air (RA)
should be minimized. Therefore, RA dampers should be specified to be of outdoor sealing quality.
P. Air conditioning, heating, ventilating and exhaust systems shall be matched to the maximum required
performance.
1.
The use of variable volume supply and exhaust air systems is encouraged to compensate for diversities in
loads and to reduce equipment sizes.
2.
Space supply air outlets should be aspirating-type to prevent "dumping" of air into occupied spaces.
Q. Interior spaces requiring cooling the year around should be handled independently from perimeter areas
requiring heating during the winter and cooling during summer.
1.
Interior cooling only areas should be supplied from a variable volume cooling system utilizing an air
economizer cycle.
2.
Perimeter systems should use economizer cycles when cooling is required and minimum ventilation rates
when heating is required.
R. Provide filters upstream of all air handling coils, including heat-recovery coils. All coils shall have access for
cleaning, including re-heat coils in, for example, VAV terminals.
S.
Outside air ventilation shall be per latest approved version of ASHRAE Standard 62.1 / IMC.
T. Direct evaporative cooling may be used in kitchens. Indirect evaporative cooling may be used in gymnasiums.
Supply air temperature shall be controlled by the unit’s DDC controller.
U. Pressure gauges are required across all AHU coils and filters.
V. Elevator shaft venting: In order to minimize drafts, heat loss and elevator door "whistling", it may be necessary
to install a motorized damper where only a louver may be specified for elevator shaft venting. Review with
current Elevator Code for minimum requirements.
W. Energy conservation
1.
The District is dedicated to the principle of conserving energy and will scrutinize proposed construction for
means of reducing not only initial cost, but also long-range operating costs. Design new buildings and
remodeling of existing buildings to make the most efficient use of building materials and energy sources
available. The architect and engineers are required to work in close cooperation to design energy efficient
buildings.
2.
For new facilities, additions, and major remodeling projects, the design team may be directed to work with
Xcel Energy and participate in Xcel’s Energy Design Assistance (EDA) program.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 2 of 8
Update: April 2016
3.
In design of HVAC and electrical systems, give consideration to building use by planning for conservation
of energy during summer and winter vacations and for other periods of minimum occupancy. Spaces
which might require vacation schedule operation or 24 hours/day operation must be serviced by systems
separate from classroom systems.
4.
The capability of using alternate sources of energy is of extreme importance.
5.
Provide an updated energy budget. The budget shall show the estimated use of energy for the structure
calculated on appropriate energy units per square foot per year basis.
a.
6.
Consider constant volume HVAC systems with variable-air-volume outdoor make-up air in order to
minimize the use of re-heat coils.
Occupied-unoccupied programming of systems should be initiated to shut off ventilation air, exhaust air,
fan system, pumps, etc., wherever possible. Where shut-down of systems cannot be accomplished during
unoccupied hours, heat recovery systems should be considered. Each application should be examined
independently to determine any special sources for obtaining recovery of usable energy.
X. Vibration engineering
1.
2.
Unless specifically rejected by the DPS project team during program planning, vibration analysis is
required for buildings having:
a.
A reciprocating machine, or an air handling unit exceeding 5,000 CFM
b.
In buildings which may be used for other than storage
c.
Where equipment or foot-fall vibration will affect the users
d.
The analysis shall be done by a firm capable of performing predictive dynamic modeling of building
structures based on finite-element analysis, multi-modal structural dynamics, etc. It is typically
necessary to use a “total system” approach wherein all of the vibratory components are included.
e.
Criteria for vibration amplitudes and structural center-bay stiffness
f.
Classroom and office areas
g.
Amplitude: 300 to 900 micro-inches (peak to peak)
h.
Stiffness: 100 to 300 KIPS/inch
Bear in mind that each building is a unique combination of shape, structure, use and equipment. As such,
each should be analyzed to determine what will meet its specific requirements.
Y. Heating systems
1.
Minimum two (2) hot water heating steel tube or copper tube boilers.
a.
Boilers may be forced draft; using modulating/condensing technology. Utilize highest efficiency
possible.
b.
Boilers should be sized at: two at 65 +/-% or three at 35 to 45% of design heating load with boiler
circulating pump (BCP) on each boiler.
2.
The heating water pumping system shall be 100% redundant lead/lag stand-by system. If parallel pumping
is used, then a stand-by pump shall be provided.
3.
Heating water systems may be primary/secondary systems. The main distribution (secondary) pumps shall
be redundant. Boiler circulation pumps (primary pumps) do not need to be redundant.
4.
Do not design heating systems that utilize tertiary or circulation pumps located at the equipment. (Heating
water systems shall be designed to utilize a glycol/water fluid to prevent freezing of the heating water).
5.
Heating equipment shall be provided with control valves that fail to the ‘open’ position.
6.
Heating systems shall be provided with automatic glycol/water mixture feed tanks. Do not connect the
heating water system to directly to the domestic make-up water system.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 3 of 8
Update: April 2016
7.
Refer to specification sections Hydronic Piping and Specialties and 230993 Control Sequence of Operation
for additional heating system requirements.
Z. Cooling systems
1.
Chilled water type systems
a.
Buildings under 75 tons of total cooling load: Air cooled chillers
b.
Buildings over 75 tons of total cooling load: Water cooled chillers
2.
Water cooled chiller systems between 75 and 300 tons: Minimum of one (1) chiller and one (1) one-cell
cooling tower.
3.
Water cooled chiller systems over 300 tons: Minimum of two (2) chillers and two (2) one-cell cooling
towers.
4.
Chilled water pumping systems may be primary/secondary type systems. However, the distribution system
shall be 100% redundant lead/lag stand-by.
5.
Provide one pump per cooling tower. Redundancy is not required for cooling tower pumps.
6.
Design chilled water systems to supply 45F chilled water and return water at 55F.
7.
Provide cooling equipment with control valves that fail to the ‘closed’ position.
8.
Provide automatic glycol/water mixture feed tanks. Do not connect the chilled water system to directly to
the domestic make-up water system.
AA. Meters
1.
Unless otherwise indicated by DPS, all buildings shall be metered for all utilities including electricity, gas,
water, etc.
a.
2.
PART 2
Provide sub-meters on cooling tower makeup, cooling tower bleed water, boiler makeup water,
chiller/closed loop chill water makeup.
Meters may be connected to the IBAS for energy monitoring. Coordinate controls standards with DPS and
the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION
A. For existing structures only, the A/E may specify mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators to
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically-transmitted sound to the building structure.
B. New buildings shall have equipment directly anchored to floors, if approved by acoustic/vibration consultant.
C. Pump bases for split-case pumps shall include support for suction and discharge base ells.
D. Specify flexible connectors for all rotating and reciprocating equipment unless approved otherwise.
1.
Exception: Not required for fan-coil units with internal isolation of fans.
E. Specify flexible connectors to the following:
F.
1.
To relieve pump flanges of strain
2.
To provide comparative freedom for floating equipment
3.
If installed horizontally, to relieve equipment of piping weight
If needed, specify travel limiters for interconnected equipment.
G. Stainless steel flexible connectors are preferable in general.
H. Specify flexible stainless steel braided hoses for heating and ventilating unit connections that may be located
away from the equipment room area.
I.
Specify hoses on the equipment side of shutoff valves; require horizontal installation whenever possible.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 4 of 8
Update: April 2016
J.
Consider acoustic pipe riser anchors where interruptible water flows may cause vibrations in piping, such as
variable condenser water flows to remote cooling tower sumps or cycled pumping.
K. Interior duct lining is allowed only in short, open-ended air transfer ducts. All other ducts shall be externally
insulated.
PART 3
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
A. Assign unit identification numbers to operating units of equipment within a class or subclass during the design
phase of new buildings, additions, or remodeling of existing structures.
1.
In new structures, start the numbering system with 001, within a class or subclass.
2.
Numbers shall include building identification, system, type, sub-type and number compliant with the DPS
Facility Information System and DPS project numbering system.
3.
When new operating equipment is to be added to an existing structure, the numbering of new units of
equipment shall fit in with the existing numbering scheme.
4.
Drawings shall indicate unique numbers for all terminal units (e.g., VAV boxes). Specify that Contractor
shall label the units accordingly, including the space being served.
B. Coordinate mechanical identification with painting standards. Refer to standard Section 09 91 00.
PART 4
PLUMBING INSULATION
A. If more than one type of insulation material is available for satisfying technical requirements, then priceperformance should be evaluated and maximized in material selection.
B. Weigh need to insulate unions, flanges, valves, control devices and similar items where maintenance access is
needed. Give consideration to:
PART 5
1.
Energy conservation.
2.
Where heat gain to space or ductwork is objectionable.
3.
Where condensation must be prevented.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Point of connection is normally five (5) feet outside building line. Coordinate plumbing design with utility
design.
B. For ease of maintenance, isolate areas by section with isolation valves and provide easy maintenance access to
valves.
C. Design and route plumbing lines to minimize potential disruption due to future remodeling.
D. Vertical pipe runs shall be grouped in chases and shall not be installed in demising walls.
E. Avoid placing plumbing lines below slab-on-grade. Where sewer lines must be located below slabs, route
piping to minimize the amount of below slab piping.
F.
Domestic water supply (from flanged connection within building)
1.
Service supply pressure can reach 130 psi. Regulate down to 80 psig. Minimum supply pressure should be
60 psig.
2.
Design water distribution velocities (6-10 feet/second) for minimal noise while maintaining adequate flow.
Maximum water pressure drop shall be 4ft/100ft of pipe.
3.
Specify flange connections to valves and equipment for pressure reducing valve (PRV) stations at each end
of the legs, to allow for component replacement.
G. Whenever remodeling, plumbing systems shall be brought up to code and DPS Design & Construction
Standards.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 5 of 8
Update: April 2016
H. A/E to remove all conflicting language in their technical specifications or any variations from the DPS Design
and Construction Standards.
PART 6
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Size drains in accordance with ASPE Data Book, Volume 1, Fundamentals of Plumbing Design, Chapter 2,
Storm Drainage Systems.
B. Cleanouts
1.
Design cleanout locations and access for minimum disturbance of occupant functions and building systems
operation during cleanout servicing.
2.
Provide above urnial without/outside DF’s.
3.
Provide 2-way cleanouts on all building sewers within 5’-0” of building.
C. Hose Bibbs
1.
Provide hose bibbs with vacuum breakers in the following locations:
a)
Each equipment room
b) Kitchen areas equipped with floor drainage systems
c)
Near cooling towers and condensers
d) In public and student toilet rooms (provide locking cover recessed hose bibb)
2.
Maximum spacing shall accommodate 50’ of hose to any point within the drainage area, measured around
obstructions and equipment.
3.
Provide freeze proof hose bibs in exterior areas and unheated interior areas.
4.
Provide isolation valve on branch.
D. Water Shock Arresters
1.
Give careful attention to the prevention of water hammer in the design of water distribution systems.
E. Water Pressure Regulation
1.
F.
Average main pressure shall be determined by the A/E. The A/E shall acquire current water flow and
pressure data from Denver Water and provide the necessary analysis to ensure that adequate pressure is
supplied to the building for proper operation of plumbing fixtures. Refer to standards in Division 2 for
additional requirements.
Emergency Showers
1.
Installation shall meet ANSI Z358.1.
2.
Provide curb on floor to contain the ponding of water from the emergency shower.
a)
3.
Comply with ICC/ANSI 117.1-2003
Provide ADA shower base or floor drain positioned in 36” sloped floor area.
G. Water Meters
1.
Specify contact-closure output.
2.
Small domestic water meters
3.
These meters are used for makeup and drain lines for irrigation only.
a)
Hersey Measurement Co.
b) Niagara Meter Line
c)
MTX Series, Model 433,
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 6 of 8
Update: April 2016
4.
PART 7
Water meter controls: Coordinate controls standards with the DPS Project Manager and the DPS Controls
Application Engineer.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
A. Design parameters for equipment selection shall conform to ASHRAE, ASPE, ASME, and applicable uniform
codes.
B. Domestic hot water circulating pumps
PART 8
1.
Specify aquastat control in return line near each pump if building is expected to have extended operating
hours; otherwise, specify a timer.
2.
Provide one pump.
SUMP PUMPS
codes.
PART 9
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Point of connection is normally five (5) feet outside building line. Coordinate plumbing design with utility
design.
B. For ease of maintenance, isolate areas by section with isolation valves and provide easy maintenance access to
valves.
C. Design and route plumbing lines to minimize potential disruption due to future remodeling.
D. Vertical pipe runs shall be grouped in chases and shall not be installed in demising walls.
E. Avoid placing plumbing lines below slab-on-grade. Where sewer lines must be located below slabs, route
piping to minimize the amount of below slab piping.
F.
Whenever remodeling, plumbing systems shall be brought up to code and DPS Design & Construction
Standards.
G. A/E to remove all conflicting language in their technical specifications or any variations from the DPS Design
and Construction Standards.
PART 10
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
codes.
B. Design parameters for equipment selection shall conform to ASHRAE, ASPE, ASME, and applicable uniform
codes.
C. Provide 1050 F water to restrooms and classrooms and 1400 F water to kitchen equipment.
PART 11
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Accessibility
1.
In addition to other requirements, plumbing fixtures shall meet accessibility requirements of the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) and standard Section 00 00 05.
2.
Provide pipe insulation on waste and hot water pipes below each accessible lavatory. Refer to standard
Section 22 07 00 for pipe insulation requirements.
B. Coordinate rim heights with applicable codes, regulations, and guidelines.
C. Coordinate countertop sink heights, dimensions, and configurations.
D. Water temperature
1.
Provide hot and cold tempered water service to sinks, lavatories, mop basins, emergency eye and body
wash fixtures, showers, and other similar plumbing fixtures.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 7 of 8
Update: April 2016
2.
Coordinate water temperature requirements with applicable codes and guidelines.
E. Coordinate locations of garbage disposal units with DPS.
F.
Coordinate electric water coolers, garbage disposers, and hand wash basins with electrical requirements.
G. Hand wash basins
1.
Locate infrared scan transformer and control wiring in basin base enclosure.
2.
Include disconnect switch in basin base enclosure.
3.
Provide ground fault protection.
H. Emergency shower and eyewash units
1.
Provide emergency shower and eyewash units at the following locations:
a)
Boiler and chiller rooms
b) Science, art, technology, and vocational classrooms and laboratories
2.
Provide a floor drain or accessible shower basin beneath each emergency shower and eyewash unit
a)
I.
Eye wash to connect to building plumbing, not to floor
Electric water coolers and drinking fountains
1.
In general, provide electric water coolers in lieu of drinking fountains in DPS facilities.
a)
2.
Exception: Drinking fountains or water coolers may be provided in low traffic, special use spaces such
as music classrooms and ECE and Kindergarten classrooms.
Dual water coolers
a)
Electric water coolers shall be dual, high-low fixtures where required by ADA accessibility guidelines,
including children’s standards.
b) Coordinate design of spout heights, clearances, and accessible route requirements.
3.
J.
Water fountains (“bubblers”) mounted on sinks are prohibited in DPS facilities.
Spitters: Coordinate locations.
Design Guidelines
00 40 00
Page 8 of 8
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 41 00
FIRE PROTECTION GUIDELINES
PART 0 PURPOSE
PART 1 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
A. This design build specification shall not be modified, amended, or altered.
B. The Architect and/or Engineer shall clearly define the scope of work, and limits of construction, including but
not limited to modifications and/or additions to the existing system.
C. Nothing in this standard shall be construed to relieve the System Design Engineer and/or Contractor of their
responsibilities with respect to applicable codes, laws or ordinances.
D. If there are overlaps in, or conflicts between, the requirements of the codes, laws and ordinances and this
standard, then the requirement which provides the most stringent design criteria, which provides the highest
level of safety, shall govern.
E. While it is expected that this standard will be of assistance to the System Design Engineer and/or Contractor in
developing plans, specifications, and contract documents on particular projects, this standard shall not constitute
the complete contract documents. Include full specifications for standpipe and fire sprinkler work in the
construction documents.
F.
The guidelines in this standard apply to school and educational type occupancies. Coordinate standards for
other types of occupancies with the DPS Project Manager.
G. To ensure the accuracy of the design, the System Design Engineer shall only obtain Record Drawings of the
existing facility from the DPS Space Management Office.
H. System Design Engineer and/or Contractor shall design the system to avoid conflicts with existing windows
(including protection screens), transfer grilles, clocks, speakers, outlets, electrical junction boxes, data junction
boxes, ceiling fans, security system devices, wiremold, and all other existing wall or ceiling equipment. It shall
be the responsibility of the System Design Engineer and/or Contractor to maintain visibility of and/or access to
the aforementioned building elements and devices.
Design Guidelines
00 41 00
Page 1 of 1
Fire Protection Guidelines
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 50 00
HVAC DESIGN GUIDELINES
PART 0
PURPOSE
PART 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
A. Assume that buildings will be enlarged and modified in the future.
1.
Make provisions for future interconnections, upgrading, and expansion of mechanical systems.
B. Designs for plumbing shall not locate any plumbing in exterior walls.
C. DPS looks with concern on new and untried materials and equipment. We are opposed to experimentation on
our projects. However, we look forward to preliminary evaluation of innovative designs.
D. For aesthetic reasons, locate or appropriately enclose large and unsightly exterior installations to be hidden from
public view.
1.
Building elevation drawings must show mechanical installations, including installations projecting above
parapet walls.
2.
If due consideration of aesthetics is not observed, the Owner will require redesign until an acceptable
aesthetic design is achieved.
3.
Historic landmark structures require design coordination with the Denver Landmark Commission.
E. For security reasons, include enclosures and barriers to protect exterior and rooftop mechanical equipment from
vandalism and unauthorized intrusion.
F.
Equipment air intake locations:
1.
As high off the ground as possible to avoid vehicle exhaust and other biological contamination.
2.
As far away as possible from plumbing vents, kitchen exhaust vents, fume hood exhaust, and similar
ventilating and exhaust units.
G. Design sufficient facilities and clearances for orderly arrangements, concealment, and optimal maintenance of
H. Provide sufficient and safe access for maintenance of mechanical systems.
1.
Sufficient access implies the capability to replace major components with minor impact to the building.
2.
Clearly indicate sizes and locations of ceiling and wall access panels.
I.
Provide curbed floor areas for storage of on-site water-treatment chemicals, following water-treatment
consultant’s recommendations.
J.
When renovating or retrofitting mechanical systems or spaces, review the need to remove asbestos-containing
materials including, but not limited to, insulation.
K. Abandoned piping shall be removed in it’s entirety from existing walls or other locations. Existing valve to be
removed when new replacement valve is installed.
1.
Contractor to remove all flushometers and faucets from demolished/removed plumbing fixtures and return
to DPS.
L. Controls: Coordinate controls standards with the DPS and the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 1 of 25
HVAC Design Guidelines
Update: April 2016
M. Design temperatures for heating and air conditioning systems
1.
Winter: 68-78 degrees F temperature difference between inside and outside conditions (-10 degrees F
outside air temperature, 68 degrees F inside air temperature).
2.
Summer: ASHRAE Summer .04% but 92F db and 61F wb outside conditions if air intake is above a
roof, and 95/59 for systems with high make-up air intake. 76F db, 63F wb inside conditions.
3.
Consult with the DPS for temperature and humidity requirements for special areas such as computer
rooms, etc.
N. Fan coil units and radiation will be required in specific areas to facilitate shut-down of major air handling units.
Where necessary, the controls on these units shall be coordinated with the controls on the air handling units.
O. All air conditioning systems shall have air economizer cycles. Systems which have economizer cycles shall be
capable of running the cooling equipment independent of the economizer cycle controls. Furthermore, the
economizer control shall not revert to the minimum outside air damper position for cooling season unless
mechanical cooling is available.
1.
In order to take advantage of economizer cooling to the highest temperature possible, return air (RA)
should be minimized. Therefore, RA dampers should be specified to be of outdoor sealing quality.
P. Air conditioning, heating, ventilating and exhaust systems shall be matched to the maximum required
performance.
1.
The use of variable volume supply and exhaust air systems is encouraged to compensate for diversities in
loads and to reduce equipment sizes.
2.
Space supply air outlets should be aspirating-type to prevent "dumping" of air into occupied spaces.
Q. Interior spaces requiring cooling the year around should be handled independently from perimeter areas
requiring heating during the winter and cooling during summer.
1.
Interior cooling only areas should be supplied from a variable volume cooling system utilizing an air
economizer cycle.
2.
Perimeter systems should use economizer cycles when cooling is required and minimum ventilation rates
when heating is required.
R. Provide filters upstream of all air handling coils, including heat-recovery coils. All coils shall have access for
cleaning, including re-heat coils in, for example, VAV terminals.
S.
Outside air ventilation shall be per latest approved version of ASHRAE Standard 62.1 / IMC.
T. Direct evaporative cooling may be used in kitchens. Indirect evaporative cooling may be used in gymnasiums.
Supply air temperature shall be controlled by the unit’s DDC controller.
U. Pressure gauges are required across all AHU coils and filters.
V. Elevator shaft venting: In order to minimize drafts, heat loss and elevator door "whistling", it may be necessary
to install a motorized damper where only a louver may be specified for elevator shaft venting. Review with
current Elevator Code for minimum requirements.
W. Energy conservation:
1.
The District is dedicated to the principle of conserving energy and will scrutinize proposed construction
for means of reducing not only initial cost, but also long-range operating costs. Design new buildings and
remodeling of existing buildings to make the most efficient use of building materials and energy sources
available. The architect and engineers are required to work in close cooperation to design energy efficient
buildings.
2.
For new facilities, additions, and major remodeling projects, the design team may be directed to work with
Xcel Energy and participate in Xcel’s Energy Design Assistance (EDA) program.
3.
In design of HVAC and electrical systems, give consideration to building use by planning for conservation
of energy during summer and winter vacations and for other periods of minimum occupancy. Spaces
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 2 of 25
Update: April 2016
which might require vacation schedule operation or 24 hours/day operation must be serviced by systems
separate from classroom systems.
4.
The capability of using alternate sources of energy is of extreme importance.
5.
Provide an updated energy budget. The budget shall show the estimated use of energy for the structure
calculated on appropriate energy units per square foot per year basis.
a.
6.
Consider constant volume HVAC systems with variable-air-volume outdoor make-up air in order to
minimize the use of re-heat coils.
Occupied-unoccupied programming of systems should be initiated to shut off ventilation air, exhaust air,
fan system, pumps, etc., wherever possible. Where shut-down of systems cannot be accomplished during
unoccupied hours, heat recovery systems should be considered. Each application should be examined
independently to determine any special sources for obtaining recovery of usable energy.
X. Vibration engineering:
1.
Unless specifically rejected by the DPS project team during program planning, vibration analysis is
required for buildings having: a reciprocating machine, or an air handling unit exceeding 5,000 CFM in
buildings which may be used for other than storage where equipment or foot-fall vibration will affect the
users.
2.
The analysis shall be done by a firm capable of performing predictive dynamic modeling of building
structures based on finite-element analysis, multi-modal structural dynamics, etc. It is typically necessary
to use a “total system” approach wherein all of the vibratory components are included.
3.
Criteria for vibration amplitudes and structural center-bay stiffness.
4.
Classroom and office areas.
5.
Amplitude: 300 to 900 micro-inches (peak to peak).
6.
Stiffness: 100 to 300 KIPS/inch.
7.
Bear in mind that each building is a unique combination of shape, structure, use and equipment. As such,
each should be analyzed to determine what will meet its specific requirements.
Y. Heating systems:
1.
Minimum two (2) hot water heating steel tube or copper tube boilers.
a.
Boilers may be forced draft; using modulating/condensing technology. Utilize highest efficiency
possible.
b.
Boilers should be sized at: two at 65 +/-% or three at 35 to 45% of design heating load with boiler
circulating pump (BCP) on each boiler.
2.
The heating water pumping system shall be 100% redundant lead/lag stand-by system. If parallel pumping
is used, then a stand-by pump shall be provided.
3.
Heating water systems may be primary/secondary systems. The main distribution (secondary) pumps shall
be redundant. Boiler circulation pumps (primary pumps) do not need to be redundant.
4.
Do not design heating systems that utilize tertiary or circulation pumps located at the equipment. (Heating
water systems shall be designed to utilize a glycol/water fluid to prevent freezing of the heating water).
5.
Heating equipment shall be provided with control valves that fail to the ‘open’ position.
6.
Heating systems shall be provided with automatic glycol/water mixture feed tanks. Do not connect the
heating water system to directly to the domestic make-up water system.
7.
Refer to specification sections Hydronic Piping and Specialties and 25 90 00 Control Sequence of
Operation for additional heating system requirements.
Z. Cooling systems
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 3 of 25
Update: April 2016
1.
Chilled water type systems
a.
Buildings under 75 tons of total cooling load: Air cooled chillers
b.
Buildings over 75 tons of total cooling load: Water cooled chillers.
2.
Water cooled chiller systems between 75 and 300 tons: Minimum of one (1) chiller and one (1) one-cell
cooling tower.
3.
Water cooled chiller systems over 300 tons: Minimum of two (2) chillers and two (2) one-cell cooling
towers.
4.
Chilled water pumping systems may be primary/secondary type systems. However, the distribution
system shall be 100% redundant lead/lag stand-by.
5.
Provide one pump per cooling tower. Redundancy is not required for cooling tower pumps.
6.
Design chilled water systems to supply 45F chilled water and return water at 55F.
7.
Provide cooling equipment with control valves that fail to the ‘closed’ position.
8.
Provide automatic glycol/water mixture feed tanks. Do not connect the chilled water system to directly to
the domestic make-up water system.
AA. Meters
1.
Unless otherwise indicated by DPS, all buildings shall be metered for all utilities including electricity, gas,
water, etc.
a. Provide sub-meters on cooling tower makeup, cooling tower bleed water, boiler makeup water,
chiller/closed loop chill water makeup.
2.
PART 2
Meters may be connected to the IBAS for energy monitoring. Coordinate controls standards with the DPS
and the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION
A. For existing structures only, the A/E may specify mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators to
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically-transmitted sound to the building structure.
B. New buildings shall have equipment directly anchored to floors, if approved by acoustic/vibration consultant.
C. Pump bases for split-case pumps shall include support for suction and discharge base ells.
D. Specify flexible connectors for all rotating and reciprocating equipment unless approved otherwise.
1.
Exception: Not required for fan-coil units with internal isolation of fans.
E. Specify flexible connectors to the following:
F.
1.
To relieve pump flanges of strain.
2.
To provide comparative freedom for floating equipment.
3.
If installed horizontally, to relieve equipment of piping weight.
If needed, specify travel limiters for interconnected equipment.
G. Stainless steel flexible connectors are preferable in general.
H. Specify flexible stainless steel braided hoses for heating and ventilating unit connections that may be located
away from the equipment room area.
I.
Specify hoses on the equipment side of shutoff valves; require horizontal installation whenever possible.
J.
Consider acoustic pipe riser anchors where interruptible water flows may cause vibrations in piping, such as
variable condenser water flows to remote cooling tower sumps or cycled pumping.
K. Interior duct lining is allowed only in short, open-ended air transfer ducts. All other ducts shall be externally
insulated.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 4 of 25
Update: April 2016
PART 3
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
A. Assign unit identification numbers to operating units of equipment within a class or subclass during the design
phase of new buildings, additions, or remodeling of existing structures.
1.
In new structures, start the numbering system with 001, within a class or subclass
2.
Numbers shall include building identification, system, type, sub-type and number compliant with the DPS
Facility Information System and DPS project numbering system.
3.
When new operating equipment is to be added to an existing structure, the numbering of new units of
equipment shall fit in with the existing numbering scheme.
4.
Drawings shall indicate unique numbers for all terminal units (e.g., VAV boxes). Specify that Contractor
shall label the units accordingly, including the space being served.
B. Coordinate mechanical identification with painting standards. Refer to standard Section 09 91 00.
PART 4
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Performance Requirements
1.
Comply with the applicable procedures in the chapter on testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) in the
latest ASHRAE edition of the Systems Handbook.
2.
Comply with procedural standards for TAB of environmental systems as outlined in the latest edition of
SMACNA, NEBB, and/or AABC procedural manuals.
B. Note to Specifier: consideration should be given to each project to determine whether it is desirable to allow the
installing contractor to test, adjust and balance the systems per NEBB qualifications. If it is considered
beneficial to the conditions of the project to do so, then add the following to the above paragraph: "or, under
the direct supervision of a qualified testing, adjusting and balancing supervisor, possessing Certification from
the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)."
C. The key to the above paragraphs is the reference to "direct supervision" of a qualified mechanical engineer or
certified personnel. This paragraph not only implies the necessary credentials needed to bid the work, but also
addresses the critical area of supervision on the job. This will both help to pre-qualify prospective bidders and
eliminate the practice of an engineer or contractor, remote from the job site, "rubber stamping" the balancing
reports.
D. Note: in Submittals Section, specify that the balancing contractor shall review the contract documents and
submittals for location and type of balancing devices being installed by the mechanical and sheet metal
contractors, and shall issue a letter to the DPS that she/he is in agreement with them or shall identify
deficiencies needing attention.
E. If the commissioning agent is not available, the mechancial rngineer of record shall be on site to verify the test
and balance of the systems. The mechanical engineer shall be notified seven (7) days in advance of the test and
balance.
PART 5
HVAC INSULATION
A. Steam condensate and boiler feed water (Exception: When good engineering practice precludes insulation where
cooling of condensate is desirable to avoid cavitation of condensate return pumps).
B. Specify adjustment, lock nuts, and tolerances for hangers.
C. Specify that the contractor shall reinstall cal-seals at time of pipe installation.
D. Specify removable insulation for chilled water pumps, flexible connectors, unions, etc.
E. Detail on the drawings removable insulation covers for equipment. For example, enclose chilled water pump
bodies in insulated sheet metal split case housings to provide easy maintenance of pumps without damage to
insulation.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 5 of 25
Update: April 2016
PART 6
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC
A. Use of this Standard:
1.
Due to the extent of detail provided in this standard, the A/E may choose to edit this standard and
incorporate portions of this standard in the construction documents. To obtain an electronic copy of this
standard in Microsoft Word format, contact the DPS.
B. Mechanical Contractor Requirements:
PART 7
1.
The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the mechanical Contractor, commissioning authority
(CA), control system contractor, and others are outlined in Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning. This section
covers the specific commissioning tasks for Division 23.
2.
A/E shall edit this section to match the scope of the project.
NATURAL GAS PIPING
A. Design system in accordance with the following standards:
1.
NSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.
2.
NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) - National Fuel Gas Code.
3.
ANSI Z 223.1a - Supplement to National Fuel Gas Code.
B. A/E shall review all existing and new gas requirements to verify adequacy of gas supply (pressure, pipe size and
meter size). A/E shall indicate design criteria in the construction documents.
PART 8
HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Automatic pressure-compensating variable-orifice type regulating valves to balance flow are unacceptable as
substitutes for manual balancing of hydronic systems.
B. In all hydronic systems the District requires an inhibited propylene glycol antifreeze solution. Refer to
Specification Section 23 21 13 Water Treatment for additional requirements.
C. Automatic glycol/water feeder systems are required in DPS applications where antifreeze systems are used.
D. For glycol-filled systems, specify that all components exposed to propylene glycol shall be compatible with the
specified glycol (especially the seals and gaskets).
PART 9
HYDRONIC PUMPS
A. Pumping system design:
1.
A primary-secondary pumping system is preferred. Redundant pipes are required for chillers and boilers.
2.
Base friction head calculations on Hydraulic Institute Standards for:
a)
Chilled water systems: 15-year-old-pipe.
b) Hot water systems: 15-year-old pipe.
c)
3.
Steam condensate: 15-year-old pipe.
When pump redundancy is required, provide 100% stand-by pumping (with check valves) with automatic
change-over.
B. Base-mounted water pumps:
1.
PART 10
For primary pumping applications, split case centrifugal pumps are preferred over end-suction pumps.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Piping System:
1.
Locate and specify isolation valves for all zones, risers, branches and equipment.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 6 of 25
Update: April 2016
2.
Specify unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment and apparatus connections. Rating of
flanges shall be 150 psi.
3.
Piping systems designed with expansion loops and Z-bends to provide flexibility of pipe movement are
preferred over systems designed with expansion joints.
4.
Condensate return systems within buildings shall be gravity return to vented receivers. Lift from receiver to
condensate return shall not exceed seven (7) feet. If lift from receiver to condensate return exceeds seven
(7) feet, specify a high temperature vacuum or electric condensate pump.
5.
Specify spiral-wound, non-paper flange gaskets.
6.
Specify cast iron fittings instead of steel.
B. Condensate coolers:
1.
PART 11
Where design and energy conservation dictate, provide heat-recovery condensate coolers of sufficient
capacity to reduce condensate from 200 oF to 120oF using 40oF water input and not to exceed 90oF water
output.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Pumping system design
1.
A primary-secondary pumping system is preferred. Redundant pipes are required for chillers and boilers.
2.
Select pumps to operate at optimum efficiency.
3.
Base friction head calculations on Hydraulic Institute Standards for:
a) Steam condensate: 15-year-old pipe.
4.
When pump redundancy is required, provide 100% stand-by pumping (with check valves) with automatic
change-over.
5.
Select pump motor as non-overloading over the entire pump curve shown by the manufacturer. Consider
option of pump operation reset based on reference temperature.
6.
Specify pumps with separate pump and motor shafts and replaceable couplings for all but cartridge pumps.
7.
Mechanical shaft seals shall be specified. Gland seals are not acceptable.
B. Electric steam-condensate return pumps
PART 12
1.
Specify packaged duplex pumps or steam-powered pumps.
2.
Manual lead-lag alternator for duplex pumps.
3.
Electrical float switch to bring on second pump if flow too great for one pump for duplex pumps.
4.
Audible alarm activated when either pump fails (duplex pumps).
5.
Specify deep sump type where adequate condensate cooling to avoid cavitation of pumps is not practical.
6.
Provide a condensate cooler to avoid pump cavitation if condensate receiver is not big enough to achieve
adequate cooling.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Design Requirements
1.
Refrigerants
a) This refrigerant piping guide section is written for the typical small project using Group I Refrigerants
which are negligibly toxic and non-flammable. Use R-410a and R-134a.
2.
Oil traps
a) Ascertain that oil traps are not required, and design piping to avoid their use whenever possible.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 7 of 25
Update: April 2016
PART 13
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
A. Placement within a mechanical room is required for all major mechanical equipment. Only small units may be
roof-mounted, and shall be made as inconspicuous as possible by placing as far away as possible from edge of
roof, painting, screening or a combination of these. DPS approval is required. Roof mounted air handling units
shall be double walled insulated industrial quality units and shall be specified only with DPS specific approval.
B. Centrifugal, tubular centrifugal, axial and propeller fans may be used. The use of propeller fans shall be kept to a
minimum.
C. Specify that centrifugal fans are required to have a continuously-welded housing (spot or tack-weld or lock-seam
construction is not acceptable). Bearing life shall be stated to be L50 life of 200,000 hours at the maximum
speed for the class of fan provided.
D. Fans, motors and drives shall be located for safe and easy access for periodic inspection and maintenance.
E. Systems selected for operation above 6 inches static pressure must be approved by the DPS. Specify that fan
nameplate indicate maximum permissible fan RPM.
F.
PART 14
Before allowing or specifying synchronous drives such as the Gates Poly Chain, verify that all associated
equipment (fan, motor, fan mountings, etc.) is designed to handle the stress of starting up with this type of drive
where there is absolutely no slippage. Not recommended for across the line start.
HVAC DUCT AND CASINGS
A. Ductwork:
1.
Fibrous glass ductwork and duct liner will not be allowed. Supply and return duct shall be externally
wrapped with insulation. Duct liner shall be allowed for transfer ducts and sound boots ONLY.
2.
Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall conform to NFPA 96 and the International Mechanical Code.
3.
Ductwork for special exhaust systems shall conform to NFPA 91 and the International Mechanical Code.
B. Plenums:
1.
All materials in plenums must be in full compliance with NFPA 90A and the International Mechanical Code.
C. Sound attenuation:
1.
Refer to Section 23 05 48, Mechanical Sound and Vibration, for coordination of duct sound attenuators,
acoustical duct and plenum linings and other acoustical treatment of ductwork systems.
2.
Provide sound attenuators instead of duct liner for acoustical applications.
D. Volume Control Dampers:
1.
Show on the drawings all required locations for volume control dampers in the ductwork where required for
air balancing.
E. Take-offs:
F.
PART 15
1.
Take-offs shall be conical with a manual damper if warranted.
2.
Take-offs to VAV terminal units shall not have manual dampers.
Fire and Smoke Dampers:
1.
Indicate all fire and smoke dampers on the drawings.
2.
Drawing notes or specifications indicating fire damper or fire/smoke damper locations to be "Where
Required by Code" are not acceptable. Drawings must indicate location and type of all dampers.
3.
Fire and smoke dampers in small ducts (under 16” in height) shall have the damper blades out of the air
stream.
SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEMS
A. Laboratory Ventilation and Hazardous Exhaust Systems:
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 8 of 25
Update: April 2016
1.
Pre-design considerations:
a)
Laboratories shall be ventilated per ASHRAE Standard 62, NFPA 45, NFPA 91, ANSI/AIHA Z9.5.
b) Early in the design process, the HVAC Design Engineer responsible for the fume hood exhaust system
shall obtain a complete list of the chemicals and gases to be used and stored in the lab. This list shall be
used to analyze fume hood exhaust for flammability, toxicity, corrosiveness, and explosion hazards. In
selecting and analyzing fume hazard control techniques, the HVAC Design Engineer shall work closely
with DPS and mechanical engineer. Reference the “Educational Specification" for this information.
c)
2.
Other safety cabinets and enclosures for highly-reactive or toxic gases, and other specialized operations
will have different and/or additional requirements than those listed above. In selecting and analyzing
fume hazard control techniques, the HVAC Design Engineer shall work closely with the DPS and
Mechanical Engineer. Chemical storage cabinets located in rooms designed with negative air pressure
should not be ventilated unless required by code authorities. Where ventilation of storage cabinets is
required by the local authorities, provide powered ventilation for these cabinets.
General design criteria:
a)
Laboratory modules in which hazardous chemicals are being used shall be maintained at an air pressure
that is negative to the corridors or adjacent non-laboratory areas.
b) Air containing hazardous chemicals shall be discharged through hood/duct systems maintained at a
negative pressure relative to the pressure of normally occupied areas of the building. Air exhausted
from laboratory modules shall not pass un-ducted through other areas.
c)
Paint booth hoods, range hoods and other hazardous materials exhaust hoods shall be equipped with
individual exhaust fans and shall NOT be tied together into common exhaust systems, nor shall they be
connected to any other system.
d) Hazardous exhaust systems are not typically equipped with filters to capture contaminants. In some
cases, however, pre-filters may be installed to protect heat exchange coils or other HVAC equipment
from accumulating debris.
3.
e)
Fume hoods should be located in close proximity to where chemicals are stored, and 10’ minimum from
exits or where interfering air currents and cross drafts from doorways, windows, high traffic areas,
HVAC systems, or other apparatus, could adversely affect the proper function of the hood enclosure.
f)
Make-up air shall be provided to compensate for the air being exhausted. The location and volume of
make-up air is critical to assuring proper fume hood operation. Air distribution around fume hoods shall
be such that cross-drafts at the hood face are avoided, thereby minimizing the occurrence of back drafts
that spill vapors into the hood operator's breathing space. Care shall be exercised in the selection and
placement of air supply diffusion devices to avoid air currents that would adversely affect the
performance of laboratory hoods, exhaust systems, and fire detection or extinguishing systems. Unless
otherwise specified, supply air velocities shall be no more than 35 fpm at work stations and fume hoods.
Chemical fume hoods and storage cabinets:
a)
Chemical fume hoods must be capable of maintaining 120 fpm face velocity through the sash opening
with the sash door at 13 inches, measured from the top of the air foil. Sash stops should be installed at
18 inches above the hood working surface. Constant face-velocity fume hoods shall be capable of
maintaining 120 fpm at all sash heights below 18 inches. Special local exhaust systems, such as
snorkels or "elephant trunks", shall have sufficient capture velocities to entrain the hazardous chemicals
being released.
b) Hoods must be equipped with audible and visual low-flow alarm which should be set at 75 fpm face
velocity.
c)
Chemical fume hood ducts are generally not equipped with fire sprinklers or fire dampers, but wherever
code requires, ducts shall be in fire-rated or fire-protected shafts. Where fume hood exhaust contains
flammable vapor, DPS Standards require installation of automatic fire extinguishing systems in exhaust
ducts. However, this requirement shall be carefully addressed on a case-by-case basis, since it may
result in a variety of other potential hazards associated with fume hood operation.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 9 of 25
Update: April 2016
d) Class I - Division I interior lighting and other electrical utilities are required where internal utilities are
desired. Hazardous exhaust systems should be provided with emergency backup power and not shut
down upon activation of any alarm; however, dedicated switches may be provided in the building fire
alarm panel to allow capability for manual fan shutdown by the fire department.
e)
Sinks inside fume hoods must have a raised rim or other design feature which prevents accidental
chemical releases to the sanitary sewer.
f)
Built-in ventilated chemical storage cabinets with spill-containment should be included in hood
installations. Cabinets for flammable or hazardous chemicals should be located in close proximity to
where the chemicals will be used, preferably under or adjacent to fume hoods. Chemical storage
cabinets should be ventilated per the cabinet manufacturer’s instructions to provide a minimum of ten
(10) air changes per hour.
g) Flammable storage cabinets must be equipped with flame arrestors, but should not be vented unless
required by local code authorities. PVC piping may be used to vent corrosive and other nonflammable storage cabinets. Chemical storage cabinets, whether they are free-standing or built-in under
the hood, must be UL-listed for the materials that they contain and must comply with the applicable
requirements of NFPA 30, 45 and 99. Separate cabinets must be used to segregate acids and oxidizers
from flammables and organics. Cabinets must also be provided with spill-containment features or
devices.
1) Where vented cabinets are required by local authorities, provide power ventilation fans.
2) Where vented cabinets are required by local authorities, coordinate with code enforcement
agencies and the architect to assure that fire-rated chases are provided where needed.
3) Where power ventilation fans are provided. Provide a current sensing relay to be connected to the
DDC Controls System for fan status monitoring.
4.
Ducts, fans and control systems
a)
All chemical exhaust shall discharge through unobstructed, uncapped vertical stacks. The stacks shall
terminate at least 10 feet above roof level, away from eddy currents, air intakes and openings.
Discharge velocities should not be less than 3,000 fpm. Fan selection, stack height and discharge
velocity determinations should give consideration to preventing the reentry of contaminants into
buildings. A discharge-height exception may be made by DPS if he/she deems that adequate velocity
and dilution will be achieved by the specified fan.
b) Controls and dampers, where required for balancing or control of the exhaust system, shall be of a type
that, in event of failure, will fail open to assure continuous draft. If energy conservation devices are
used, they shall not re-circulate laboratory exhaust air or otherwise compromise the safety of the
building occupants.
c)
Methods of providing emergency ventilation shall be considered, such as variable-speed fan systems,
standby local exhaust systems, etc., to protect occupants against major chemical spills or similar
hazards.
d) Ductwork should be installed with a minimum of elbows, using round ducts and sweep ells wherever
possible. To further minimize friction loss and turbulence, the interior of ducts should be smooth and
free from obstructions, especially at joints. Rectangular elbows shall not be used unless there is no
other choice. If used, turning vanes and inspection doors upstream of the vanes shall be required.
e)
Ducts for ventilating chemical fume hoods and flammable storage cabinets must be of galvanized steel
or aluminum construction, or PVC-coated or stainless steel when used for corrosive or reactive
chemicals.
f)
Installation of ductwork must be in compliance with NFPA 91 and ANSI Z9.5, including provisions for
properly sealing penetrations, grounding and sealing duct construction materials. Penetration of fire
barriers should be avoided. If multiple hoods are on the same fan system, each should be equipped with
a balancing damper.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 10 of 25
Update: April 2016
1) Where ductwork penetrates fire barriers and/or adjacent floors, coordinate with code authorities
and the design architect to assure that any required fire-rated shafts are constructed.
g) The fan housing and components shall be corrosion resistant and meet the AMCA standard for sparkresistant construction. The motor must be vapor-tight (Class I, Division I) if it is located in the air
stream. All fans, ducts and power supplies should be clearly labeled to indicate exactly which areas
they serve.
h) Ducts for ventilating flammable storage cabinets should separate from other hazardous and general
exhaust systems.
i)
5.
Ducts for ventilating corrosive or reactive storage cabinets should be separate from other hazardous
materials and general exhaust systems.
Testing, inspecting and certification
a)
Testing, inspecting and certifying hazardous exhaust systems, fume hoods and chemical storage
cabinets will be performed by DPS and mechanical engineer.
b) Testing procedures should conform to DPS Section 15890 and Sections 4.7, 4.8, 5 (excluding 5.5.4 and
5.5.5) and 6 of the ANSI/ASHRAE 110-1995 Standard: “Method of Testing Performance of
Laboratory Fume Hoods” using calibrated air velocity measuring devices as specified in Chapter 9 of
the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation manual. Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) will use a
calibrated, direct-reading air velocity measuring device for certification and inspection purposes. If a
meter has not been calibrated for an elevation of 5,000 feet, a density-correction factor must be used
when measuring air velocities.
B. Dust Collectors
1.
Provide the following information on the Drawings.
a) Manufacturer's name and model number.
b) CFM at total pressure.
c) Horsepower and TEFC motor: 3,600 or 1,725 rpm.
d) Drive type: direct or belted.
e) Maximum footprint of the unit.
f) Overall maximum height of unit, including leg extensions and plenum silencer.
g) Capacity (in cubic feet) of storage hopper.
h) Length of legs to provide clearance under hopper without violating overall maximum height restriction
of building space.
PART 16
AIR THERMAL UNITS
A. VAV systems in general
1.
Variable-volume air distribution systems should be used in office and common areas to vary the air flow
rates as the cooling loads vary rather than falsely loading the system with reheat or mixing at the terminal
units.
2.
A simple system design using zoned-perimeter baseboard-to-finned-tube radiation (BBR) to offset the
transmission heat loss through the walls and glass or other exposed components, and a separate VAV
cooling system to balance the heat gain from solar, lights, equipment and people, is preferred, with each
VAV zone interlocked with the corresponding BBR.
3.
Since there are several types of VAV systems, manufacturers, and proprietary features, the design engineer
shall review his proposed design and qualify manufacturers with DPS in a preliminary submittal for
approval before finalizing design.
4.
Proposed VAV cooling system should include the following features.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 11 of 25
Update: April 2016
a) A 100 percent outside air economy cycle.
b) Maintenance or service requirements in the occupied space should be minimal.
c) All air filtering requirements should be accomplished in the central station equipment.
d) The amount of air balance required to make the system operate should be minimal.
e) Design for flexibility to revise zoning with only minimal changes in ductwork and controls.
f) Specify control provisions to open units to full ventilation volume if required for life safety smoke
control.
B. VAV terminal units
PART 17
1.
Show terminal unit size and design air flow rate setting on each terminal unit on the drawings.
2.
Insulation lining in accordance with NFPA Standard 90A requirements.
3.
Units capable of handling minimum 5 inches static pressure.
4.
Units independent of pressure variations and capable of operating satisfactorily throughout their range, from
minimum to maximum air flow.
5.
Volume control calibrated to identify air volume in increments of percent of maximum air flow.
6.
VAV units shall be selected so required RC sound levels in various spaces are not exceeded at 1-½” wg inlet
pressure. Both unit casing radiated sound levels (as attenuated by ceilings when present) and discharge
sound levels shall be considered in terminal unit selection.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. General:
1.
Provisions for balancing air flow from outlets or into inlets shall be included in the specifications as well as
indicated on the drawings.
2.
Air quantities and distribution pattern shall be shown on the drawings.
3.
Identify outlet and inlet types on drawings using the following basic codes:
a) Supply (S)
b) Exhaust (E)
c) Return (R)
d) Transfer (T)
e) Diffuser (D) for air pattern control (include damper for volume control)
f) Grille (G) no volume control, inlet or outlet
g) When more than one type is used, add a schedule item reference number after the code name, i.e. SD-1,
ER-2, etc.
4.
Do not specify perforated type grilles or diffusers. Specify rectangular or square louvered diffusers and fit in
the ceiling grid.
B. Intakes and Relief:
1.
Design fresh air intakes protected from the prevailing winds.
2.
Locate unprotected vertical plane intake louvers on the south or east.
3.
Specify storm-type louvers and provide sufficient distance or directional change of fresh air between the
outside air intake louver, the dampers and the filters to eliminate (or at least minimize) snow and rain being
carried to the air filters. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended inlet velocities to help minimize snow
and rain.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 12 of 25
Update: April 2016
4.
Roof-type intakes or relief are to be minimized and are only acceptable where no other solution is possible.
Where the design solution requires roof-type intakes or reliefs, design and specify hoods with hinges and
quick-release fasteners for ease of access to dampers.
a) Locate roof intakes 30 feet, minimum, from plumbing vents and exhaust outlets and 20 feet, minimum,
from operable windows.
5.
Place intake louvers on penthouses to minimize re-circulation of exhausted air (short circuiting).
a) Place intake and exhaust louvers 30 feet apart, minimum.
PART 18
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
A. The kitchen hood fire control panel is intended to provide additional safety in the operation of the kitchen range
hood. This panel interfaces between the kitchen hood exhaust fan start controls, the make-up air fan, the
kitchen fire suppression panel (Ansul Panel), under-hood power, under hood lights, electric gas valve(s), gas
reset buttons, the building fire alarm system and the kitchen exhaust hood and make-up air systems. The
kitchen hood fire control panel is field-wired.
B. The kitchen hood is furnished and installed by the contractor.
C. The kitchen hood will be a dry hood.
D. Ladder Diagram: See DPS standard drawing at the end of the section. The diagram is for reference and may
have to be modified depending on the equipment being controlled. Additional contactors, voltage changes, etc.
may be necessary to coordinate with other equipment. The electrical engineer shall coordinate the equipment
and the panel and shall show a completed panel design on the 100% CD drawings.
E. Locate the kitchen exhaust hood fan starter and make-up air starter next to the kitchen hood fire control panel,
which should be near the kitchen, but does not have to be in the kitchen.
F.
PART 19
Locate EC-1 and EC-2 contactor above ceiling in kitchen or nearby.
HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
A. In general, air filtration systems shall utilize replaceable media, 100 percent non-woven polyester synthetic
fibers, 1-½” thick blend of variable polyester fibers, permanently bonded, pre-crimped fibers in laminates, each
graduating down in diameter. The media shall be white on the air-inlet side and colored on the air-outlet side.
The downstream section shall be uniformly impregnated with a non-drying, non-migratory tackifier to assure
dust retention. Media specification:
1.
Media shall be at least UL-Class II.
2.
Minimum media performance and particle efficiency shall be:
a)
Weight: 11.0 oz. per sq. yd.
b) Minimum performance (24” x 24” x 1-1/2” media):
1) 0.21” w.c. resistance at 300 fpm.
2) 30 percent ASHRAE efficiency
3) 92 percent average weight arrestance
4) 221 gm. dust-holding capacity at 1.0” w.c.
c)
Minimum particle efficiency:
1) 46.1 percent at 1 to 5 microns
2) 86.1 percent at 5 to 10 microns
3) 89.3 percent over 10 microns
B. Built-up filter frames shall be specified to accommodate replaceable media in plastic filter frames as provided by
the equipment manufacturers.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 13 of 25
Update: April 2016
C. Plastic Filter Frames
1.
Shall be permanent-style designed for replaceable media.
2.
Frames shall be constructed of PVC channel shaped perimeter with 14-gauge 2” x 2” galvanized welded
wire back guard.
3.
Frame construction shall provide a competent seal of the filter media in order to minimize air flow bypass.
D. Media shall be supported to minimize flexing during start-stop fan cycles.
E. Firing Ranges
PART 20
1.
Provide electronic ionization filtration for firing ranges.
2.
The range shall be 100% exhausted.
HEATING BOILERS
A. Natural Gas:
1.
The properties of the natural gas available : each unit to be supplied with 936 B.T.U.H. per C.F.H. natural
gas at 7"-11" W.G., and 14” W.G. for forced-draft boilers. The boiler/burner units to be complete and
factory tested.
B. The designers shall review the type of Boiler used with the DPS for new construction and retofit projects.
C. Controls: all equipment controllers and system controllers must use BACnet protocol to integrate into the
building automation system. Provide all necessary hardware and software to interface control panels or
controllers to the Integrated Building Automation System.
PART 21
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
A. Shell and tube-type heat exchangers
1.
Use steam in shell and water in tubes to convert steam heat to hot water for Hydronic heating systems.
2.
Specify fouling factor for tubes and shell as required.
3.
Allow for glycol in water.
4.
Specify the appropriate construction for heat exchangers, including pressure and temperature ratings.
B. Condensate coolers
1.
PART 22
Where design dictates, provide steam condensate coolers of sufficient capacity to reduce condensate from
200oF to 120oF using 40oF water input and not to exceed 90oF water output. For energy conservation when
feasible, use condensate cooler to preheat domestic hot water.
COOLING TOWERS
A. Review with DPS the equipment-mounted gauges desired for diagnosis and service.
B. Provide Refrigeration Room Ventialtion in accordance with the current IMC and ASHRAE Standard 15.
C. Specifically, DO NOT require that self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) to be provided. ASHRAE
Standard 15-2001 does not require SCBA.
D. Provide low ambient controls and crankcase heaters for air cooled chillers.
E. DX Condensers:
1.
F.
For units requiring operation down to -30oF, provide low ambient control package to allow start-up and
positive head pressure control.
Controls: all equipment controllers and system controllers must use BACnet protocol to integrate into the
building automation system. Provide all necessary hardware and software to connect control panels or
controllers to DPS Integrated Building Automation System.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 14 of 25
Update: April 2016
PART 23
INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General:
1.
Medium and high velocity draw-through and built-up systems shall have transitions to achieve velocity
energy recovery.
2.
Specify maximum sound levels at the discharge, return and from casing.
B. Variable Volume:
1.
Variable speed drive control of air flows and static pressure in harmony with budget and energy
conservation requirements for project.
C. Casings:
1.
Specify access doors that are easily opened and removable for inspection and access to internal parts.
2.
Specify access door handles to be safety latch type. Thumb screws are not acceptable.
3.
Specify stainless steel drain pans for cooling coils and humidifiers to be extensive enough to catch
condensate leaving coil at highest catalogued face velocity. Bottom shall be designed to slope to drain to
minimize standing water.
4.
Condensate lines from drain pan must have deep traps to prevent either draw or blow through conditions.
Specify proper depth dimension.
5.
Specify lights with wire guards in accessible sections, factory-wired to one switch mounted on casing
exterior. Switch shall have pilot light in handle.
6.
Downstream of evaporative or humidifier sections, specify marine lights with sealed wire-and-glass.
7.
Specify windows in access doors in evaporative-pad, filter, fan, damper and humidifier sections.
8.
Specify insulation to meet NFPA-90A flame spread and smoke generation requirements.
D. Fan Section:
1.
The use of a two-fan wheel housing assembly in a common section can be a cause for shaft flexing due to
length, and should be evaluated before specifying.
2.
Fans selected for operation above six (6) inches static pressure must be approved by DPS.
3.
Original drive sheaves shall be changed when required by balancing.
4.
Specify solid steel fan shafts less than 1 ½” diameter. Shafts larger than 1 ½” may be hollow with solid ends
reduced to 1 ½”.
5.
Specify self-aligning, pillow block re-greaseable ball type fan bearings for an average life of 200,000 hours
at design operating conditions, per ANSI Code B3.15.
6.
Specify externally-accessible fittings for lubrication.
E. Vibration Isolation (only if required after consultation with the DPS):
F.
1.
Specify entire fan, motor and drive assembly to be internally spring mounted at the factory, together with fan
discharge flexible connection and thrust restraint springs.
2.
Internal factory-selected and installed vibration isolation is preferred over an alternate design requiring
external field installed deflection springs, pipe and duct flexible connections, thrust restraint springs and
spring type pipe hangers on all pipes direct connected to the unit per Section 23 05 48, Mechanical Sound
and Vibration Control.
Coil Sections:
1.
Provide for removal of coils and space coils to allow for cleaning them without removal. Clearance shall be
18”, minimum.
2.
Specify differential pressure gauge across coils.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 15 of 25
Update: April 2016
3.
All other coils shall be in accordance with Section 15790, Air Coils.
4.
Steam coils shall not exceed six (6) feet in width.
5.
Provide access section between heating and cooling coils to allow for cleaning of temperature sensors.
G. Damper Sections:
1.
Bronze or nylon bearings.
2.
Blades mechanically secured to control rods.
3.
Blades with neoprene gaskets to seal against entire stop.
H. Filter Sections:
I.
1.
Capable of accepting rechargeable media metal frame or rigid plastic frame filters. Provide the filters in
accordance with Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.
2.
Provide hinged access doors on both sides for filter replacement.
3.
Required upstream of all coils, including heat recovery.
Casing section lengths:
1.
J.
Indicate minimum lengths for access to filters, coils and dampers.
Mixing Boxes:
1.
Provide equal sized flanged openings capable of handling full air flow.
K. Spray Coil Assemblies:
1.
Not acceptable.
L. Indirect Evaporative Cooling:
1.
Is encouraged, either where direct evaporative cooling is being designed or in conjunction with
backup/complementary "mechanical air-chilling" coil.
2.
Chilled water from an absorption chilled-water source may be considered an indirect-cooling coil equivalent
when used in conjunction with direct evaporative cooling, and chilled water temperature is controlled by
supply air temperature.
M. Humidifiers:
1.
PART 24
When required, specify steam grid type to inject steam into air stream. Do not use steam from boiler plant.
PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
A. General:
PART 25
1.
Take special care to minimize sound and vibration transmissions to structure by locating units symmetrically
over columns and beams.
2.
Provide adequate clearances for servicing filters and unit components.
3.
Specify a 115-volt convenience outlet on unit sized to handle a small power load or service light.
4.
On large units, specify lights with wire guards in accessible sections, factory wired to switch mounted on
exterior of casing.
5.
Coordinate Painting Section 09 91 00 to include painting HVAC rooftop units a harmonizing color if units
are to be exposed to view.
6.
Specify painting of AHU per DPS color criteria.
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING
A. General:
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 16 of 25
Update: April 2016
1. Depending on location and user condition, designer may use any of the following types of heat rejection.
a)
DX with air-cooled condenser.
b) DX with water-cooled condenser for specific centralized computer rooms only. DPS shall approve use
of these types of systems
c)
DX with glycol-cooled condenser for specific centralized computer rooms only. DPS shall approve use
of these types of systems
2. Easily removable panels on all units for maintenance access to equipment. Compressor shall be serviceable
out of airstream.
3. Solid-state electronic control systems, easily accessible with plug-in modules, out of main electrical panel.
B. Humidifiers:
1. Humidifiers shall be provided for specific centralized computer rooms only. DPS shall approve use of these
types of systems.
2. Any of the following:
a)
Electric immersion heaters (preferred).
b) Lattice electrode steam type.
c)
Infrared-type consisting of high-intensity quartz lamps mounted above and out of the water supply (least
desired).
3. Evaporator pans arranged to be serviceable for cleaning without disconnecting water supply lines, drain lines
or electrical connections.
4. Lattice electrodes enclosed within disposable plastic cylinder and which shall not require periodic cleaning.
5. Automatic flush cycle.
C. Condensate Pumps:
1. Provide as an accessory inside cabinets for upflow condensate drain systems.
D. Filters:
1. Disposable media type in accordance with Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.
E. Floor Stands:
1. Isolate air conditioning units from raised floors with adjustable floor stands mounted on vibration isolation
pads.
F.
Air-cooled Condensers:
1. Low-profile, slow speed, multiple direct-drive propeller fan type.
2. Provide low ambient control package to allow start-up and positive head pressure control with ambient
temperature as low as -30F.
3. Outdoor design temperature: 105F if on roof.
G. Water-cooled Condensers:
1. Cleanable, shell and tube, counter-flow type with removable heads.
H. Glycol Systems:
1. Glycol-cooled condenser cleanable, shell and tube, counter-flow type with removable heads.
2. Dry cooler, low profile, slow speed, multiple direct-drive propeller fan type.
3. Provide dual pump package with automatic start of standby pump upon failure of lead pump.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 17 of 25
Update: April 2016
4. Consider glycol "free cooling" economizer coil and all controls necessary to provide winter cooling without
compressor operation.
5. Outdoor design temperature: 105F if on roof.
I.
Controls:
1. During preliminary design meetings, review with the DPS which controls are required before submitting
final design documents.
2. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System.
J.
Ceiling Recessed Units (last choice):
1. Factory assembled, completely packaged for horizontal ceiling mounting and sized to fit a 2’ x 4’ opening of
a standard "T-Bar" ceiling.
2. Air-cooled types shall have the condenser air (outside air) taken from and discharged to the outside by
means of a remote blower pack suitable for duct mounting and having a low limit outside ambient control to
operate the unit down to -30F.
3. Use of ceiling cavity to reject heat of compression is unacceptable.
K. Compressors:
1. Semi-hermetic for 5 ton units and up.
L. Water-dumping Units:
1. Water-cooled types that utilize tap water for condensation, after which the water is disposed of in a drain,
will not be permitted.
PART 26
AIR COILS
A. General:
1. Except where special design requirements might dictate, coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins,
permanently bonded.
2. Provide access areas on inlet and discharge sides of coils for maintenance purposes.
3. Provide for coil pull space and specify full-track support for easy installation and service.
4. Specify all water coils to be drainable type.
5. Provide drain piping and air venting at all water coils.
6. Specify all coil ratings to be ARI Standard 410 certified.
7. Specify fin spacing to be 12 fins per inch or less, unless otherwise indicated.
8. As a measure to improve indoor air quality per ASHRAE 62-1989, coil drain pans and drip troughs at the
bottom of coils should be designed to slope to drain to minimize standing water in the air handling unit,
plenum, etc. (Stagnant water is prime habitat for microorganisms.)
9. Specify working pressures and temperatures for coils. Be sure to allow for static head due to the height of
the building.
10. Specify type and percent of glycol in water.
11. Provide good mixing of return and outside air streams upstream of coil to minimize stratification and
possible coil freeze-up.
12. Provide flexibility in piping where connected to the coil if the coil is not isolated from fans or other vibrating
equipment.
B. Chilled water coils:
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 18 of 25
Update: April 2016
1. Design for full counter-flow of water and air with water inlet at the bottom of the supply header and outlet at
the top of the return header.
C. Direct-expansion refrigerant coils:
1. Direct expansion coils may be used on small systems and shall be piped and installed in accordance with
factory recommendations.
2. Additional design precautions shall be taken, or a field refinement procedure shall be included in the
specifications, on those installations not covered by the manufacturer's guide.
3. Specify full-face active coils in applications involving variable airflow through the coils, such as multi-zone
or VAV systems.
4. Specify face-split coils for constant volume or where humidity control is required.
D. Hot water coils:
1. Constant full-flow water coils are preferred by using face-and-bypass dampers.
E. Steam coils:
1. U-bend single-tube coils acceptable for booster coils in ductwork.
2. Specify double-tube steam distributing type for all other applications where sub-freezing air enters the air
handling apparatus, or where uniformity of leaving air temperature is required.
3. Specify vacuum breakers and steam air vents.
F.
Where coils are exposed to all outside air:
1. Provide full-flow coil circulating pumps.
2. Design the system so that the volume of heating medium supplied to the coil will not be modulated.
G. Coils in built-up plenums:
1. When cooling coils are stacked one above the other, design and specify drip troughs on the downstream side
of each of the upper coils to eliminate drip into the air stream of the bottom coil. Drip troughs shall slope to
drain as noted above.
2. Condensate drain piping should incorporate a P-trap with the height of its water seal correctly sized to
prevent trap from being sucked or blown dry by the static pressure differential between the inside and
outside of air handling unit.
PART 27
UNIT VENTILATORS
A. General:
1. Baseboard radiation is preferred for heating the exterior wall of all perimeter rooms. Use radiant ceiling
panels only as a last choice. Use of radiant ceiling panels shall be with the approval of the DPS.
2. Use convectors where architectural features cause greater capacity requirements than baseboard radiation
can provide in the available space.
3. Use cabinet unit heaters at building entrances, where greater capacity and quick response is necessary to
adequately handle rapid changes in space temperature.
4. Select cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters on low-speed capacity (of three speeds) to provide quiet
operation under normal conditions and have extra capacity at higher speeds for extreme conditions.
5. For all the product types listed in this Standard, specify the appropriate pressure and temperature ratings.
6. When providing any of the product types listed in this Standard, allow for thermal expansion and contraction
as required.
PART 28
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
A. Introduction:
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 19 of 25
Update: April 2016
1. The purpose of this document is to provide the A/E with DPS requirements for use in the design. Not all
design details necessary for properly specifying a controls system are described here. The detailed design
and specifications are the responsibility of and shall be developed by the A/E.
2. Controls provided with equipment (e.g., a chiller, RTU, etc.) are referred to as “equipment controls” in this
document.
3. Other building controls systems (e.g., fire alarm) or controls associated with other systems to which the
DDC System or IBAS is interfaced are referred to as “Subsystems” in this document.
B. Design Requirements:
1. The controls shall be provided and installed by a factory authorized dealer. The controls system shall be
Johnson Controls as installed by the Denver (JCI branch) or Johnson Controls as installed by Centennial
Controls Inc. (CCI); or Tridium/KMC as installed by Long Building Technologies (Long).
2. The DDC system shall also be provided with a full-featured operator inteface (PC and software) for on-site
system testing, operation prior to completion of the IBAS functions and during the warranty period, and for
system service capabilities (i.e., configuration programming) not available via the IBAS.
a)
The software may not need to be provided if previously provided for another DPS project.
b) The A/E shall specify the level of operator interface graphic screens needed.
c)
Consult with the DPS Controls Application Engineer regarding the above issues.
d) See Parts 2 and 3 for more information.
3. Manual timer overrides are no longer permitted. Manual overrides will be handled through a software
function. If manual override timers exist in the Facility Managers office, they shall be removed as part of
the project to install the DDC System.
4. IP communications wiring for shall be installed by the telecom contractor. Mechanical engineer shall
coordinate with the electrical engineer to locate IP wiring drops needed within the building.
5. Control drawings (i.e., system schematics with all controls field devices) and points lists (if not shown on
the drawings) shall be included in the design.
6. All mechanical equipment shall be DDC controlled unless otherwise approved by the DPS Controls
7. The A/E shall provide a schedule for the Controls Contractor listing the available pressure drop to be used
for the sizing for each control valve in the project, unless it is a reverse-return system. It is not acceptable to
list a single pressure drop to be used for all valves. For a piping system in which modulated two-way valves
are used, for example, the valves nearest the pump will have a larger available pressure drop than those
farther away from the pump.
8. The A/E shall clearly define the division of responsibility concerning the supply, installation and control of
fire/smoke dampers and elevator shaft ventilation dampers. This information shall be covered both here and
in the other relevant sections/drawings.
9. The A/E shall properly select the specific flow sensor type for each application, if any are used on the
project, and locate it on the drawings so that manuacturer-recommended installation requirements can be
met.
10. For school building addition projects:
a)
When a school already has a DDC system – Install controls to match existing DDC system
manufacturer, however, comply with the requirements in this. Remove and replace existing
Automated Logic (ALC) controls when necessary. ALC controls shall not be expanded upon nor reused for any project. Integrating via BacNet to ALC controllers is acceptable.
b) When a school already has a pneumatic system – Do not extend existing pneumatic system. Install
new DDC controls for all new systems, per this document.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 20 of 25
Update: April 2016
c)
When a school has no existing controls system - Install new DDC controls with electronic actuaion for
all new systems, per this document.
11. For new school projects:
a)
Install new DDC controls with electronic actuation for all new systems, per this document.
12. For mechanical system renovations (e.g. EMS replacement, boiler burner replacement, etc.):
a)
When a school already has a DDC system – Install controls to match existing DDC system component
manufacturer, however, comply with the requirements in this document. Remove and replace existing
Automated Logic (ALC) controls when necessary. ALC controls shall not be expanded upon nor reused for any project. Integrating via BacNet to ALC controllers is acceptable.
b) When a school already has a pneumatic system – Do not extend existing pneumatic system. Install
new DDC controls for all new systems, per this document.
c)
When a school has no existing controls system - Install new DDC controls with electronic actuation for
all new systems, per this document.
13. Equipment Controls and Subsystem Integration:
a)
All equipment controls shall be connected to the DDC system via digital communications.
b) Subsystems that do not communicate via BACnet/IP shall be interfaced to the DDC System.
c)
It is the A/E’s responsibility to coordinate the designs of the Equipment Controls, Subsystems and
DDC System so that:
d) Each equipment controller or Subsystem uses a communications protocol/interface that is compatible
with the DDC System, and that this protocol/interface is defined for the Controls Contractor.
e)
They provide the points/data and functions required by the IBAS.
14. The A/E shall select basis of design equipment controls and Subsystems, determine the type of interfaces
available, specify (in the equipment controls and Subsystem specification) interface to be used, and specify
the process for providing DDC System communications should an alternate equipment control or Subsystem
with differing communications requirements be selected.
15. Testing: The A/E shall coordinate the testing requirements in Part 3 with the relevant equipment controls
and Subsystems specifications.
16. Commissioning - The A/E shall modify the testing requirements in Part 3 to properly coordinate with and/or
define any testing requirements by the Commissioning specification.
PART 29
INTELLIGENT BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
A. Introduction:
1. The purpose of this document is to provide the A/E an overview of the IBAS and guidance on the IBAS
design tasks needed for the project.
2. Refer to the schematic diagrams at end of this section for information to supplement the text of this section.
3. The 25 50 00 Controls system, equipment controls (e.g., a chiller) or other systems (e.g., fire alarm) to which
the IBAS is interfaced are referred to as “Subsystems” in this document.
a) The term DDC (Direct Digital Control) System is used in this document to only refer to the 25 50 00
Controls system.
4. Acceptable Contractors:
a)
Centennial Controls (FX Server), Johnson Controls (ADX Server) and Long Building Technologies
(AX Server).
b) The work may be undertaken by DPS staff or another approved contractor with the permission of the
DPS Controls Application Engineer.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 21 of 25
Update: April 2016
c)
Consult with the DPS Controls Application Engineer concerning the above issues.
B. IBAS Overview:
1. The IBAS is an existing software/hardware system consisting of individual servers dedicaticated to AX,
ADX and FX building automation systems.
2. The IBAS provides a universal operator interface to all district DDC Systems regardless the manufacturer of
the system. The only requirement needed to provide this function is that the DDC System needs to be BTLlisted for BACnet/IP communications.
3. The IBAS also provides operator interface functions to other Subsystems such as fire alarm, lighting control,
etc. Again the requirement for this interface is BACnet/IP.
4. The operator interface functions that the IBAS provides includes:
a)
Graphical representation of Subsystems with associated points/data.
b) Scheduling of Subsystems start/stop schedules where applicable.
c)
Alarming and historical trending of points/data.
5. The operator interface functions that the IBAS does not provide includes:
a)
Programming and other configuration tasks that requires proprietary software (i.e., the data cannot be
created/modified via BACnet).
b) Access to any data not available via BACnet/IP.
c)
Data mapping/communications between the DDC System and any other HVAC equipment (e.g.,
chillers, RTU’s with factory controls, etc.). The A/E shall cover all HVAC integration under the 25 50
00 system design.
6. The IBAS does not have any point interface capabilities. All point connections are to the DDC System or
other building Subsystems (e.g., the fire alarm system).
7. The IBAS does not execute any control sequences. All control sequences are executed by the Subsystems.
8. The IBAS uses communications wiring, routers, gateways, switches, etc. specified/installed under other
section. Unless otherwise determined no hardware or software products/installation, (e.g., routers, gateways,
communications wiring/devices) are required in this section for IBAS operation.
C. IBAS Scope Of Work Summary:
1. The scope of work includes:
a)
Coordination with the Subsystems’ contractors concerning set up of the Subsystems’ communications
and data to be used in operator interface (i.e., point and other object naming/addressing, start/stop
scheduling, alarms, trends, etc.).
b) Mapping of this data into the IBAS.
c)
Development of all operator interface screens (i.e., color-graphics, etc.).
d) Setup of the start/stop scheduling, alarm and trending functions.
e)
Any other IBAS modifications/additions for representing/controlling data from the Subsystems.
2. The A/E shall edit the 25 50 00 point/data list to match the specific point/data types and quantities provided
by the Subsystems, and shall confirm that the Subsystems are capable of communicating the required
points/data.
3. Unless otherwise noted, no hardware and/or software products are to be provided. Consult with the DPS
Controls Application Engineer to determine if any IBAS hardware/software upgrades are to be includes in
this project.
4. No communications wiring is included in this section’s scope of work.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 22 of 25
Update: April 2016
5. Provide complete IBAS functions for all Subsystems and the Point/Data lists in 25 50 00, on the drawings,
and/or in the Subsystems’ specifications..
a)
Software programming including fully configured database, graphics, reports, alarm/events, schedules,
and trending to integrate all Subsystems as well as create graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for the
building that will appear on the IBAS.
b) The integration of Subsystems that may be be identified as add alternates include (consult with the
DPS Controls Applications Engineer):
1) The Security cameras and/or security system.
2) The irrigation T.
3) Utility monitoring.
D. Coordination:
1. General:
a)
The preferred method of Subsystem communications with the IBAS shall be BACnet/IP.
1) When BACnet/IP communications is not available the Subsystem shall be interfaced to the DDC
System.

For existing DDC Systems N1 may be acceptable – consult with the DPS Controls
2) It is the A/E’s responsibility to select and specify the DDC System interface when BACnet/IP
communications is not available.
b) Other Division 22, 23, and 25 sections of this document contain coordination information for and/or
references to the IBAS. However, all information is not necessarily shown and/or duplicated in all
sections involved. Therefore, it is the A/E’s responsibility to review all sections involved and include
requirements in the design to cover the requirements of the IBAS.
1) For example, Subsystems that require a gateway for communications to the IBAS (e.g., the fire
alarm system, etc.) shall have the gateway specified in that Subsystem’s specification (the gateway
is manufactured/provided by the Subsystem manufacturer).
2) It is the A/E’s responsibility to select a Subsystem basis of design, determine the availability of a
BACnet/IP communications, and to specify (in each Subsystem specification) the path for IBAS
communications should an alternate Subsystem without BACnet/IP communications be selected.
c)
Each Subsystem shall be set up to communicate all the required data to the IBAS.
1) Where a Subsystem is BTL-listed “communicate” means two way communications with BACnet
alarm and event messages being sent by the Subsystem to the IBAS and all other messaging
(status, file upload, backup, time synch, etc.) being initiated by the IBAS (e.g., a BACnet Read
Property service). Where possible the integration shall not depend solely on so-called “polling” of
the Subsystems by the IBAS.
d) Specify that each Subsystem contractor coordinate with the IBAS Contractor concerning all data that
must be communicated to/from the IBAS.
e)
Specify that the IBAS Contractor review all Subsystem sections to determine the complete scope of
communicated data and operator interface functions for the DDC System.
f)
The DPS intranet shall be used for communications between the building and the IBAS.
1) It is the A/E’s responsibility to coordinate the locations of all Ethernet/IP drops needed with the
Telecom designers.
2) The final Ethernet/IP wiring from Subsystems to the drops shall be provided by Subsystems’
contractors
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 23 of 25
Update: April 2016
3) Subsystems that do not use BACnet/IP communications shall be wired to the DDC System by the
DDC System contractor.
4) Subsystem communications addressing (networks, devices, objects) shall be set up per the
direction of the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
g) See Part 3 of this section for more information.
2. The IBAS supplements the DDC System, but is not a substitute for that system nor does it replace any
functions that are normally performed by and/or provided with the system. In particular:
a)
Full operator interface capabilities for the DDC System shall be provided with that system. These
capabilities are required for system setup, testing, commissioning and warranty operation until the
IBAS’s capabilities are fully operational.
b) Integration between the DDC System and any other HVAC equipment needed for execution of the 25
50 00 Sequence of Operation shall be included in the DDC System design.
3. IBAS Integration to non-HVAC Subsystems
a)
The scope of integration to fire alarm, lighting control, irrigation, security, etc. systems is determined
on a project-by-project basis. Consult with the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
b) It is the A/E’s responsibility to coordinate the design requirements for this integration with all
disciplines involved (i.e., mechanical, electrical and division 17) and to ensure that the integration
requirements are covered by the Subsystem designs.
4. Setup of Alarms, Schedules and Trends
a)
Subsystems that are BTL-listed and/or support certain BACnet objects/services shall have alarms,
schedules and/or trends set up in the Subsystem (not the IBAS).
b) It is the A/E’s responsibility to determine the BTL-listing and BACnet capabilities of each Subsystem
and to specify where alarms, schedules and/or trends are to be set up.
c)
See Part 3 for more information.
5. Testing – The A/E shall coordinate the testing requirements in Part 3 with the relevant equipment controls
and Subsystems specifications.
6. Commissioning - The A/E shall modify the testing requirements in Part 3 to properly coordinate with and/or
define any testing requirements by the Commissioning specification.
PART 30
INTEGRATED AUTO CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR FACILITY
A. Design Requirements:
1. General:
a)
The intent of this Design Guide Section is to provide the A/E with representative control sequences and
point/data lists that the District has found satisfactory to use as an example in the final design of typical
projects.
b) The typical systems described are simple solutions to typical control designs. Before using them, be
sure the control design for the project system is typical. Be aware that the final design is the
responsibility of the Design Consultant.
c)
The District requires functional performance testing of the complete control system prior to Owner
acceptance.
2. Kitchen suites with Make-up Units:
a)
Make-up air for kitchen hoods shall be controlled in sequence with the kitchen exhaust hood. (See
Division 16 for hood and make-up unit controls).
b) Make-up unit will run only when kitchen hood is on.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 24 of 25
Update: April 2016
c)
Supplemental heat shall be provided via baseboard radiation units located at all rooms with exterior
exposures. The radiation units shall be controlled by a separate thermostat.
Design Guidelines
00 50 00
Page 25 of 25
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 60 00
ELECTRICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
PART 0
PURPOSE
PART 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
A. Provide lighting load reducation capabilities on remodel projects.
1.
Load shed shall be by dual level switching for flourescent based lighting systems and full range dimming
for LED based lighting systems.
2.
Provide means to reduce lighting load by at least 50% in all spaces.
B. Design wiring and specify equipment so that electronic devices that distort the harmonics of sine wave power,
such as computer power supplies, variable frequency drives (VFDs), and solid state ballasts do not adversely
affect each other or the building power circuits, particularly the neutral and ground wiring.
C. Do not design corridor receptacles or custodial use receptacles on classroom or office circuits.
D. Provide receptacles in custodian’s closets.
E. Receptacles for school kitchen point of service (POS) shall be on a dedicated circuit with isolated ground.
F.
Do not use telecommunications rooms as pass through rooms to other rooms. Refer to Division 27 Design
Standards.
G. Coordinate placement of receptacles and other outlet boxes for TV casework and other casework for computers,
TVs, VCRs, projectors, etc. Receptacle location should be 6” above top of casework. Coordinate with the
architect the locations and sizes of grommets for equipment cables as necessary.
H. Equipment controllers and system controllers: Coordinate controls standards with the DPS Project Manager
and the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
I.
Coordinate controls standards with the DPS Project Manager and the DPS Controls Application Engineer.
J.
Design electrical distribution within the facility such that mechanical loads and kitchen loads are separately
metered from lighting and convenience receptacles.
Metering from the mechanical, kitchen, and
lighting/convenience loads shall be tied into the IBAS system. Metering shall be provided at 480/277V and
120/208V if necessary to accomplish this.
K. Design sufficient facilities and clearances for orderly arrangements, concealment, and optimal maintenance of
L. Rooftop electrical conduit over 2” shall be fastened to Unistrut stands. Stands shall be mechanically fastened to
2’x2’x2” concrete paver. Pavers shall be set on modified rolled roofing pads. One stand for every ten foot (10’)
of conduit and no more than one paver per stand.
PART 2
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Where harmonic currents exist on circuits supplying electric discharge lighting, data processing or similar
equipment, a full-sized neutral shall be provided for each single phase circuit, and an oversized neutral may be
required for each multi-wire circuit. All neutrals shall be minimum, same size as the phase conductors. The
design engineer shall determine where harmonic currents may exist and shall clearly specify and/or show on
drawings which circuits will require oversized neutrals.
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 1 of 11
Electrical Design Guidelines
Update: April 2016
PART 3
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. For specific telecommunications, data, audio/visual and safey/security system box depth, size and plaster ring
requirements, see Section 27 05 33 – Electrical Technology – Conduit and Boxes.
B. Telecommunications Conduit: Provide conduits for telecommunications systems. Coordinate locations and
requirements with Section 27 05 33 –Electrical Technology – Conduit & Boxes and 27 05 39 – Electrical
Technology – Surface Raceways. All telephone system wiring shalll be installed in conduit.
C. Audio Enhancement Systems: Provide conduits for audio enhancement systems. Coordinate locations and
requirements with Section 17300 – Audio Enhancement Systems. All audio system wiring shall be installed in
conduit.
D. Kitchen POS (Point of Service) Avoid kitchen POS locations in floors. Try and locate on walls or columns.
Conduit and floor boxes in slabs are prohibited per this Section and Section 26 05 33 unless written approval
from DPS Project Manager.
PART 4
ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
A. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical Contractor, Commissioning Authority (CA) and
others are outlined in Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning. This section covers the specific commissioning tasks
for Division 26 and 27.
B. A/E shall edit this section to match the scope of the project.
C. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 26 and 27 responsibilities in the commissioning process which
are being directed by the Commissioning Authority (CA). Electrical systems testing is required under the
direction of the Contractor.
PART 5
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
A. Transformer Cooling: Coordinate with mechanical engineer to provide adequate ventilation of rooms with
transformers. Coordinate with mechanical engineer to assure adequate air quantities for proper ambient
conditions in electrical room. Locate transformers to assure adequate air movement around transformer
enclosure.
B. Design of transformer capacities should allow a minimum 25 percent growth of electrical loads served by
transformer.
C. Do not locate transformers on or next to walls adjacent to telecommunications equipment rooms.
D. In areas with heavy computer loads , K-rated transformers shall be provided. Only non-linear loads shall be
connected to the transformer.
E. For new construction, consider specifying main transformer as K-rated. Provide cost difference to DPS Project
Manager during DD or 50% CD review.
F.
PART 6
Floor mounted transformers shall be mounted on a 4” housekeeping pad. Coordinate with architect.
PANELBOARDS
A. Design
1.
Lighting and receptacle branch circuit breakers shall be minimum 20 ampere.
2.
Provide minimum 25 percent future circuit spaces for total connected circuit breakers in panelboard.
3.
Specify minimum of 42 poles per panelboard. If more are required, specify two-section panelboards.
Where two-section panelboards are required, use full capacity sub-feed lugs. Sub-feed breakers are
prohibited except in remodel projects. Both sections shall be the same size (ampacity and number of
breakers).
4.
Panelboards which are installed in electrical equipment rooms shall not share the space with other systems
such as piping, ductwork, telephone equipment, etc.
B. Drawings
1.
The Drawings shall contain a schedule of panelboards which clearly indicates the following information:
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 2 of 11
Update: April 2016
a)
Panelboard type.
b) Number of poles.
c)
Main bus ampacity.
d) Main circuit breaker or main lug ampacity.
e)
Quantities of each size of circuit breaker.
f)
Flush or surface mounting.
g) Total connected load and demand load.
h) Design load.
i)
Panelboard short circuit rating.
j)
Calculated available short circuit at panelboard.
k) Each circuit shall have its load in watts or volt-amp (VA) shown and a description of what and where
the circuit feeds.
l)
Circuits requiring lockout device.
m) Circuits requiring specialty breakers, such as shunt trip or GFI.
C. Remodel projects:
PART 7
1.
On remodel projects, provide a full panelboard schedule with all existing devices and loads shown, and
note the vacated/reused circuits. A load study is required on remodel projects and depending upon the
project size, a load change calculation (total existing load - removed load plus new load) may be
acceptable. If existing loads are unknown, engineer shall identify existing loads and note on directory card.
Engineer shall also identify upstream overcurrent device, if not presently known.
2.
Engineer shall require contractor to make existing panels comply with the panel and circuit identification,
wire labeling, and cleanliness requirements of this specification.
WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide receptacles at maximum 40’ on center in corridors.
B. Special requirements for telecommunications receptacles are outlined in Section 271543 Communications –
Faceplates and Connectors.
C. Do not specify 15amp receptacles. Utilize 20amp receptacles in all locations.
D. Provide outdoor receptacles every 75 feet of perimeter wall space; and one at main entrance and delivery door.
PART 8
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Specify disconnects for all motors and mechanical equipment. Locate adjacent to units per NEC.
B. Coordinate fusing of disconnects with mechanical equipment electrical characteristics.
C. Create schedule of equipment to indicate ratings of disconnects and fuses for each item of equipment.
PART 9
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Utilize full-voltage starting where possible.
B. Magnetic motor starter operation configurations:
1.
Full-voltage starting.
2.
Full-voltage reversing.
3.
Reduced-voltage starting
C. NEMA-style starters shall be specified and utilized. Starters shall be capable of starting a range of motors with
no degradation of starter life
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 3 of 11
Update: April 2016
D. Locate controllers and motor control centers in acceptable environments not subject to temperature extremes
beyond UL-listing criteria. Provide appropriate enclosure rating for environments in which installed.
E. Preference is for electronic overload relays instead of individual overload heaters.
F.
Coordinate size of control center with door openings and access corridors to assure that control center can be
moved into room after structure is completed. Indicate shipping splits as necessary.
G. Preference is to not use fusible switch assemblies or MCPs.
H. Provide minimum 10% spare space or one vertical section, whichever is greater, to allow for future starters to
be installed in MCCs.
I.
PART 10
Branch circuit disconnecting devices are not specified here, but are allowed if necessary in an MCC.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Coordinate starter needs for mechanical equipment prior to 50% CD and confirm again for 100% CD submittal.
B. Coordinate temperature controls requirements with other Division 25 standards.
C. Coordinate auxiliary contacts as required for application of fire alarm system interface.
D. Coordinate available short circuit current values at connections.
E. Select type of reduced voltage motor starter and incorporate appropriate requirements from Part 2 below in
project specification.
PART 11
ENGINE GENERATORS
A. Design Requirements:
1.
This section covers the requirements for standby generators, however, design requirements are included
here for use of portable generators as well.
2.
Standby diesel generators are not required for elementary, middle, or high schools, unless a fire pump is
required for the building. Natural gas generators are not allowed per the AHJ to serve fire pumps. A
natural gas generator is required for schools that have a sump pump, sewage ejector, or for schools that are
used as emergency shelters. If a school has a fire pump and has a sump pump, sewage ejector, or is used as
a shelter, then the same standby diesel generator may be used.
3.
Standby generators shall be located on the exterior of the building, near the loading dock area to provide
adequate access for maintenance personnel and equipment.
4.
For diesel standby generators, provide adequate access for a fuel truck to fill the fuel tank.
5.
All schools that do not require a standby generator shall be equiped with one or more exterior places to
plug in a portable diesel generator. The location shall be a dedicated and adequate space for a trailer
mounted diesel generator and day tank. Each plug-in point shall be wired back to a manual transfer switch.
Individual transfer switch loads shall not exceed 100 amp, 480/277 volts.
6.
Loads that shall be designed for service by a portable diesel generator are as follows:
a)
Basic heat (boilers, etc.) to prevent pipes and systems from freezing.
b) Emergency lighting, if on a separate panel from normal lighting; otherwise all lighting, including
battery powered emergency lights.
c)
Kitchen walk-in coolers, refrigerators and freezers.
d) Loads served by the emergency panel (to keep batteries charged).
e)
7.
Other critical loads as determined by DPS Project Manager.
Engineer shall design the power distribution system within the building such that the above loads can be
isolated by a manual transfer switch and served by portable generator(s). If more than one 250KW portable
generator is required to power all of the loads above, then multiple plug-in points and manual transfer
switches shall be designed.
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 4 of 11
Update: April 2016
B. Systems Description:
1.
Interface with Other Systems: It is important to note that this system, more than any other in Division 26,
closely relates to Divisions 22 and 23 installation procedures. Close coordination with the mechanical
design engineer is required to assure that installation procedures for standby generators are contained in the
appropriate Divisions 22 and 23 sections for equipment furnished under Division 26 but installed under
Divisions 22 and 23. Close coordination is also required to ensure appropriate equipment necessary for
basic heat are included for service by a portable generator.
2.
Controls:
a)
PART 12
Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Integrated Building
Automation System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEMS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. Although battery systems are viable systems, they are usually more expensive than other systems. Accordingly,
these will only be used with DPS Project Manager approval or in renovations to existing systems if replacement
with an alternate system is not warranted.
B. Specify a forward transfer-type emergency power supply consisting of rectifier/charger unit, storage battery and
mechanical transfer switch. NOTE: If HID luminaires are to be supplied from this system, specify a static
transfer switch.
C. Optimum operating temperature for batteries shall be maintained at 77°F. Coordinate location of batteries with
HVAC to ensure proper cooling and environmental conditions are maintained. Battery life degrades rapidly if
subject to extreme temperatures.
D. DoTS supplies their own rack mounted UPS for their equipment.
PART 13
TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Locate automatic transfer switch (ATS) indoors.
B. Select switches capable of automatically transferring the load from normal to emergency source.
C. ATS will normally be used with a generator. An ATS may also be required with auditorium lighting to turn on
all house lights at full bright during a fire alarm condition. A/E shall review code requirements.
D. Controls:
1.
PART 14
Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 23 09 00 – Integrated Building
Automation System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Lightning ProtectioN System Description
1.
Design Consultant to calculate NFPA lightning probability to determine if NFPA recommends a lightning
protection system at the project site.
2.
Specify the features and the requirements for a complete UL master-labeled lightning protection system, if
a system is required. Indicate the requirement for bonding roof-mounted mechanical equipment, structural
elements, vents, etc.
B. Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
1.
This section describes the materials and installation requirements for a SPD. These devices are used to
protect AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients
and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching.
2.
Provide SPD units at the load side of each utility service entrance and each main breaker of separate
switchgear lineups.
3.
SPD unit should be purchased based upon price. The SPD unit does not have to be an integral part of the
main switchboard equipment.
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 5 of 11
Update: April 2016
4.
PART 15
SPD units on panelboards should be an integral part of the panelboard. If it is separate, the unit shall be
easily accesible and adjacent to the panelboard.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (POINT GRAPHIC SYSTEM
A. General Design Guidlines:
1.
“General Requirements”, DPS Design and Construction Standards of the Project Manual and project
specific bid documents pertain to and are hereby made part of the work of the Specification Section.
B. Description Of Work:
1.
The work under this section includes furnishing all fire detection equipment, piping and specialties and all
labor necessary for a complete installation of the Fire Detection System as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
C. Definitions:
1.
Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ(s)):
a)
State of Colorado
b) City and County of Denver
c)
2.
Fire Detection Contractor:
a)
3.
Denver Fire Department
Where DPS Design and Construction Standards refer to “Fire Detection Contractor”, those references
mean the “Work” shall be completed only by an Approved DPS Term & Supply Fire Detection
Contractor.
System Design Engineer:
a)
Where DPS Design and Construction Standards refer to “System Design Engineer”, those references
mean the “Architect, Engineer, or other Design Consultant” shall complete the “Work Product” and
shall be in accordance with the AHJ and have a minimum NICET Level-III Engineering Technician or
a qualified Professional Engineer.
D. General Design Requirements:
1.
This design build specification shall not be modified, amended, or altered.
2.
All work related to the fire detection system must be completed by an Approved Term & Supply Fire
Detection Contractor. Contact DPS Purchasing for a list of the Approved Term & Supply Fire Detection
Contractors.
3.
The DPS approved Fire Detection Contractor must contract directly with the General Contractor. If there is
no General Contractor on the project, only DPS approved Fire Detection Contractors will be allowed to
work on the fire detection system.
4.
The Architect and/or DPS Project Manager shall clearly define the scope of work, and limits of
construction, including but not limited to modifications and/or additions to the existing system.
5.
Nothing in this standard shall be construed to relieve the System Design Engineer and/or Fire Detection
Contractor of their responsibilities with respect to applicable codes, laws or ordinances.
6.
If there are overlaps in, or conflicts between code requirements, laws and ordinances, and this standard,
then the requirement which provides the most stringent design criteria and provides the highest level of
safety shall govern.
7.
While it is expected that this standard will be of assistance to the System Design Engineer and/or Fire
Detection Contractor in developing plans, specifications, and contract documents on particular projects, this
standard shall not constitute the complete contract documents.
8.
To ensure the accuracy of the design, the System Design Engineer shall only obtain Record Drawings of
the existing facility from the DPS Space Management Office, which include but are not limited to
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 6 of 11
Update: April 2016
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical drawings. These drawings are available for review at
DPS Space Management located at 2800 W. 7th Avenue, Denver, CO. Arrangements must be made
through the DPS Project Manager to gain access to the DPS Space Management Office; drawings are not
available for checkout.
9.
In areas where there is full sprinkler protection, DPS requires full detection for the fire alarm system.
10. The Architect (if applicable) and the System Design Engineer's construction drawings shall:
a) Be on separate sheets from lighting, power and special systems.
b) Be to scale, showing room numbers and room occupancy descriptions.
c) Show the placement of alarm initiating devices and alarm notification appliances. The type of alarm
initiating devices, such as smoke sensor, rate-of-rise or fixed temperature heat sensor, duct sensor, etc.,
shall be indicated.
d) Show the location of the FACP, annunciators, graphic map, zone maps, interface panel, power supplies,
DFD transmitter, transmitter antenna, IBAS connection, electrical circuits used for FACP, interface,
power supplies and risers.
e) Show a detail of the graphic annunciator panel. The detail shall show the layout of the floor plans and
the location and labeling of LEDs. The detail is not required to be actual size.
f) Include the sequence of operation, even if the sequence is included in the specifications.
g) Include a zone schedule indicating the grouping of addressable devices for the annunciator.
h) Include a schematic system one-line diagram.
11. System Design Engineer and/or Fire Detection Contractor shall design the system to avoid conflicts with
existing windows (including protection screens), transfer grilles, clocks, speakers, outlets, electrical
junction boxes, data junction boxes, ceiling fans, security system devices, wiremold, and all other existing
wall or ceiling equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the System Design Engineer and/or Fire
Detection Contractor to maintain visibility of and/or access to the aforementioned building elements and
devices.
12. The System Design Engineer and/or Fire Detection Contractor shall design the system according to the
latest requirements of IFC, NFPA, State of Colorado (AHJ), City and County of Denver (AHJ), and Denver
Fire Department (AHJ).
13. The Architect and/or System Design Engineer shall include the design and all necessary components for the
complete installation and tie-in of the existing Elevator(s) and/or Dumbwaiter(s). If the existing building is
missing or does not have a code compliant Shunt Trip(s) for the Elevator(s) and/or Dumbwaiter(s); the
Architect and/or System Design Engineer shall be responsible for all necessary components (including
electrical equipment, and tie-ins to a dedicated electrical circuit) for the complete installation of the
required Shunt Trip(s), which meet or exceed current codes established by the AHJ:
14. If the existing building elevator(s) is missing or does not have recall functions and/or Fire Hat Operation
in accordance with the AHJ; the Architect and/or System Design Engineer shall be responsible for all
necessary components (including electrical equipment, elevator equipment and circuitry upgrades) for the
complete upgrade of the elevator in accordance with the AHJ.
15. New facilities and facilities to be substantially renovated must include a fire alarm system:
a) Exceptions include very small single story buildings, sheds, and temporary facilities where coderequired systems are not mandatory and the occupancy does not warrant a system.
16. Renovations affecting existing systems shall be handled on a case-by-case basis with direct input from the
DPS Project Manager and DPS QA/QC:
a) On projects where existing systems are modified, revised, or expanded, the System Design
Engineer and/or Contractor shall meet with the DPS Project Manager and DPS QA/QC prior to
the RFP or Bid Date to verify the operating condition of the existing system (i.e., is the existing
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 7 of 11
Update: April 2016
system functioning properly, DOES THE SYSTEM HAVE ADEQUATE CAPACITY FOR THE
PROPOSED SCOPE OF WORK, etc.).
17. Where a new system is being installed to replace an existing system:
a)
The existing fire alarm systems or a temporary system shall remain fully operational until the
new work is completed and the entire new system is functional and accepted by the AHJ. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the AHJ concerning the requirements for keeping the existing
system operational or a temporary fire alarm system operational and any fire watches that the
AHJ may require.
b) Full replacement of fire alarm system shall include changing from tone based audible system to
voice alarm system to meet current code requirements. Tone devices to be replaced with
speakers. Voice alarm input panel and associated amplifiers and power supplies to be included
as necessary to accommodate change from tone to voice system.
c)
Scope of Work, includes but are not limited to the following:
i) FACP: If the FACP is not located in the Main Office, the Contractor must relocate the FACP
to the Main Office.
ii) Remove all existing FA cabling.
iii) Install new cabling throughout the building in accordance with DPS Design and Construction
Standards (new cabling color shall be determined by the DPS QA/QC department).
iv) Initiation Devices
v) Notification Devices
vi) Graphic Annunciator(s) and Map(s)
vii) Locations
viii) Magnetic Door Hold Opens
ix) Guards
x) Elevator(s): Tie-in and Upgrade
xi) Kitchen Hood System(s): Tie-in
xii) Mechanical: Fire/ Smoke Damper Controls and HVAC Systems
xiii) Fire Sprinkler System: Flow(s)/ Tamper(s) Switch Tie-In
xiv) Auditorium/ Gym: Lighting/ Sound Control Tie-in
xv) AES Subscriber Installation (if building doesn’t have an existing AES Subscriber)
xvi) Room Labeling, Re-numbering, and Signage: The Contractor shall be responsible for all
Room Labeling, Re-numbering, and Signage including but not limited to:

Updating the Graphic Maps and Annunciators

Updating the DFD Door Tags (above each door)

Updating the Wall Signage adjacent to doors

Updating all Electrical Panel Labels
18. Before the proposed scope of work begins, the Contractor and DPS Project Manager must complete the
“DPS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) STATUS & ACCEPTANCE REPORT”. This “DPS
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Status & Acceptance Report” will document the condition of the Fire
Alarm Control Panel and Components prior to the start of any construction within the building. After the
“DPS Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Status & Acceptance Report” has been executed, the Contractor
will assume responsibility and maintenance for the fire alarm system until the project is complete.
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 8 of 11
Update: April 2016
19. Comply with requirements of NFPA Standard-72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as
modified and supplemented by this standard. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the
integrity of conductors.
20. The system, its components, and installation shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed under the
appropriate UL testing standards for fire alarm applications. New equipment only. Used/re-manufactured
equipment will not be allowed.
21. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP):
a)
New Fire Detection System shall be Microprocessor-based with intelligent addressable smoke and heat
sensors, and addressable contact monitoring devices for initiating devices such as manual fire alarm
boxes, water flow switches, tamper switches, etc. in accordance with 2.03 Fire Alarm Control Panel
(FACP).
b) Annunciation: Provide a point graphic annunciator that shows each initiating device as a point with a
symbol:
i) Use high intencity LED’s in graphic.
ii) Follow current version of Denver Fire Department “Guideline for Graphic Wall Maps”.
iii) No Fire Detection Contractor logo’s allowed on graphic panels.
22. 120-Volt power supply:
a)
Power shall be provided from an emergency power branch circuit dedicated to the fire alarm.
b) Provide a Surge Protection Device (SPD) device on the incoming power. The system shall be capable
of operating the system under normal load for four (4) hours while in standby operation and then be
capable of operating the entire system in alarm continuously for five (5) minutes. Where the building
is equipped with a standby generator, the fire alarm system shall be connected to a dedicated
emergency branch circuit connected to the generator. Otherwise connect to an “EM” dedicated circuit.
23. Device and appliance layout:
a)
The Architect and/or System Design Engineer shall meet with the Denver Fire Department, DPS
Project Manager, and DPS QA/QC before submitting construction drawings, to locate control panels,
annunciators, graphic wall maps, etc.
b) Include complete detection throughout all spaces of the building.
c)
Devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush or semi-flush mounted when located in
finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
d) Provide photoelectric smoke sensors in toilet rooms.
e)
Smoke detectors shall be provided at elevator lobbies, programmed for general alarm and elevator
recall.
f)
Provide a smoke detector above the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
g) The maximum allowable distance between any smoke detector and any corner inside a room is
21.2 feet regardless of code exceptions.
h) Smoke detectors shall not be located less than eighteen (18”) inches from any light fixture and not less
than three (3’) feet from any HVAC ceiling mounted diffuser, return air grille, or fan.
i)
Locate smoke detectors to avoid dirty environments that would be prone to false alarm.
j)
Smoke detector’s are required in pockets where the depth of the pocket is 10% of the ceiling height
AND spacing of the beam pocket is 40% of the ceiling height.
k) Heat sensors in concealed and unconcealed attics (heated & unheated) and crawl spaces (heated and
unheated) in accordance with their listing with the following exceptions:
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 9 of 11
Update: April 2016
i) Sensors must be accessible from catwalks and access doors. In existing buildings, the sensors
should be located over existing catwalks, if allowed by the AHJ. It is not required to add catwalks
simply to meet spacing requirements.
ii) Spacing may be modified in order to locate sensors where they will be accessible.
iii) In crawl spaces and attics with limited access, locate heat sensors at the access to the space and at
equipment located in the space.
24. Fixed-temperature heat sensors shall be located in boiler rooms, kitchens, exterior storage rooms, kiln
rooms, and other similar spaces.
25. Provide Stopper-II model STI-1100 on all proposed and existing pull stations, except at the FACP.
26. Fire alarm audibility and visual notification is required throughout the building:
a)
Devices shall be combination horn/strobe for minor modifications to existing tone systems and shall
be speaker/strobe for new installations:
i) Horn or speaker/strobes are also required in acoustic (sound) rooms, walk-in coolers and freezers,
environmental rooms and other areas resistant to sound transmission that are regularly occupied.
ii) Ceiling mounted horn or speaker/strobes are encouraged for discouraging vandalism.

Exception: Individual strobes are also acceptable where appropriate (i.e. small restrooms and
conference rooms that receive adequate audibility from adjacent area horns).

Exception: Provide only a horn or speaker for photographic dark rooms.

Ceiling mounted horn or speaker/strobes shall not be used in areas with exposed structure and
shall not be pendant mounting in these spaces in lieu of wall mounting.
iii) Visual notification must be in compliance with NFPA-72, including minimum candela intensity:

Strobe design must include candela rating on the individual device.

Use a template for strobe design to ensure sufficient intensity providing coverage to all
required areas.

When mounted on the walls, visual alarm strobes shall be mounted eighty (80”) to ninty-six
(96”) inches above the finished floor level or within a space of six (6”) inches below the
ceiling, whichever is lower.

In general, visual alarm strobes shall be no more than fifty (50’) feet from any point in a room
or corridor.
b) Provide horn/strobe on exterior of building above the Fire Department Connection(s).
c)
Provide interconnection from fire alarm system to stage lighting system to illuminate the auditorium
upon activation of the fire alarm system to meet the requirements of the AHJ.
d) Provide interconnection from fire alarm system to Stage, Auditorium, and Gym sound system to
silence upon activation of the fire alarm system to meet the requirements of the AHJ.
e)
Provide two-way firefighter phone jacks in spaces with occupancy of one thousand (1,000) or more.
27. System Performance requirements:
a)
The connection between network control panels shall be a recognized network communication scheme
and shall be wired in a Class-A fashion.
b) Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA
Class-B Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
c)
Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B as part of an addressable device connected by
the SLC Circuit. Power for initiating devices and notification appliances must be from the main FACP
or from a Field Charging Power Supply (FCPS).
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 10 of 11
Update: April 2016
d) Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B. Power for initiating devices and
notification appliances must be from the main FACP or from a Field Charging Power Supply (FCPS).
e)
A single ground fault or open circuit on the system SLC shall not cause system malfunction, loss of
operating power or the ability to report an alarm.
f)
Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
28. Auxiliary controls:
a)
Coordinate auxiliary controls for HVAC units, fans, dampers, fire sprinklers, elevator, lighting, sound,
door control, etc.
b) Dampers:
i) The FACP must not provide power for dampers.
ii) Electric 120-VAC actuated dampers.
iii) Electric 120-VAC door controls.
iv) Control fire smoke dampers and door controls from the FACP via a supervised relay serving a
number of dampers and doors.
c)
Relays shall be accessible for maintenance:
i) All control relays must supply control to a fire alarm relay module. Only The fire alarm relay
module will switch 120 volt AC power. The control relay must be located in the same location as
the fire alarm relay module. The maximum number of door magnets allowed per control relay is
twenty (20). Control relays will not provide switching for multiple floors. All relays must be
accessible and documented on the Record Drawings.
d) To minimize duct over-pressurization, damper interface from the FACP shall include a delay
programmed into the FACP to ensure fan blades have stopped rotating.
e)
Include interface with necessary fire sprinkler components, water flow devices and valve supervision.
f)
Provide fire alarm circuits to elevator controller. Provide two supervised relays in elevator machine
room.
g) Magnetic door hold-opens and door closers with electric hold-open:
i) All control relays must supply control to a fire alarm relay module. Only The fire alarm relay
module will switch 120 volt AC power. The control relay must be located in the same location as
the fire alarm relay module. The maximum number of door magnets allowed per control relay is
twenty (20). Control relays will not provide switching for multiple floors.
ii) Shall be connected to a dedicated circuit from the building electrical system (120 volt AC) and shall
not obtain their power from the fire alarm system or convenience outlets.
iii) Door hold open release shall occur upon any alarm.
iv) For classrooms with door hold open devices, provide manual door hold open release button in each
classroom, located by the room light switch.
v) DPS does not allow 24 volt magnetic door hold-opens.
Design Guidelines
00 60 00
Page 11 of 11
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 70 00
TECHNOLOGY GUIDELINES
PART 0 - PURPOSE
C. Describe materials and conditions, which do not easily fit into specific specification sections.
PART 1 - INTRODUCTION
A. The purpose of this document is to provide additional instructions for the planning and design of a
communications infrastructure. Refer to division 27 specifications for installation requirements of each
communications system.
B. A structured wiring solution is only as robust as its weakest component, therefore all wires and connections
should be Category 6 rated on a component level. The links shall further pass a permanent link performance
test as described in this document. Multi-mode fiber links within buildings shall be of OM3 armored
designation or higher as indicated by the project documents.
C. When planning and installing a structured cabling system for Denver Public Schools (DPS) the Contractor
must pay particular attention to ensure all components used are of the same Category or optical OM level of
performance. Splicing in copper horizontal links is expressly forbidden unless part of a planned zone cabling
strategy.
D. The DPS network infrastructure design shall in all cases be a star topology unless indicated otherwise by
specific project documentation. By pre-wiring all possible locations in a new or existing building in a star
topology, all administrative moves, changes and additions will be made at patch field contained in the
Telecommunications Rooms.
PART 2 - REGULATORY REFERENCES
A. The (DPS) Department of Technology Services (DoTS) cabling standards are based on the guidelines
published by the Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) as well as the more detailed requirements
of the Building Industry Consultative Services International (BICSI).
B. Contractor is responsible for knowledge and application of current versions of all applicable Standards and
Codes. In cases where listed Standards and Codes have been updated, Contractor shall adhere to the most
recent revisions, including all relevant changes or addenda at the time of installation. A list of Regulatory
References current as of the time of this writing is shown below.
PART 3 - STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS DEFINITIONS
A. On new school build-outs and large additions, the contractor will provide DPS with a cut sheet in Excel
format that displays all of cable numbers sequentially in the first column and the corresponding room
number for each cable will be show in the second column.
B. "Structured Wiring" is a philosophy of pre-installing necessary cabling to device locations to be available to
be used as these devices come on line. Moves and changes are affected at structured patch fields with the
permanently installed links being relatively unchanging. In most basic form, a structured wiring system
consists of horizontal wiring and appropriate connecting hardware, with backbone cabling connecting the
horizontal sub-system to the main and intermediate distribution areas.
C. The following terms for various sub-systems are defined within the ANSI/TIA 568-C series of standards and
shall be referred to throughout this document.
1.
The D-Marc is the point where the outside plant cables and associated hardware is brought into the
building. The entrance facility may be used for public network services, private network customer
services or both. The demarcation points between carrier and customer and over-voltage protection
devices are located here. For new construction, the MDF will serve as the entrance facility. A total of four
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 1 of 11
Technology Guidelines
Update: April 2016
4” conduits are needed for fiber, copper, and coax services coming into the facility. Two of these
conduits need to be dedicated to one service provider, while the other two should be dedicated to a
secondary service provider. Note that service providers will not share conduit, vault space, or other
pathways inside or outside of the building.
2.
All MDF closets will be required to have a separate Air Conditioning unit installed. (IDF Closets do not
require this.) Placement of unit will be coordinated with DoTS Networking personnel.
3.
The backbone cabling provides interconnections between MDF/IDFs/D-Marc, It consists of the backbone
cables, main and intermediate cross-connects, mechanical terminations and patch cords or jumpers used for
cross-connection. The backbone may connect Telecom Rooms within a building or between buildings.
4.
The horizontal cabling consists of the physical media used to connect each outlet or device to MDF/IDFs.
Various types of cable can be used for horizontal distribution. Each type has its own performance
limitations, size, and ease-of-use.
PART 4 - COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Entrance Facility and WAN Services:
1.
The main MDF supports the incoming feeds from various service providers into the buildings.
a.
2.
It also contains the VOIP telephone system, the master data networking equipment, paging
equipment, and video amplifiers, as well as being the serving terminal for all intermediate TRs.
The feed from Century Link is terminated in this room by Century Link.
The feed from Comcast is terminated in this room by Comcast.
3.
From the D-Marc feed to the main MDF the Contractor will install one 25 pair plenum cable and two
Category 6 plenum cables.
4.
The Contractor shall install labels for all terminating hardware within entrance facilities.
B. Commissioning of Communications:
1.
Denver Public Schools and/or its designees shall periodically inspect the work of the Contractor. When
requested the Contractor shall, at no additional charge, supply an installation technician to accompany the
individual(s) performing the inspection tasks. The Contractor shall be responsible for uncovering concealed
areas in order for the work to be inspected.
2.
Denver Public Schools requires a thirty (30) day acceptance period after the completion of any project, or a
portion thereof if turned over to DPS prior to the completion of the total project. Final project completion is
the conclusion of all specified work, including all labeling, testing, documentation, site cleanup, and quality
inspection.
3.
DPS and/or its designees shall utilize this acceptance period to perform workmanship evaluations and
random testing. A representative of the Contractor shall be available to work with DPS and/or its designees
during this acceptance period.
4.
The Contractor shall be required to make any repairs or modifications deemed necessary by Denver Public
Schools and/or designees immediately, without exception or recourse.
5.
The required warranties shall begin at the conclusion of the acceptance period.
C. Communication Closets MDF/IDF Build Out:
1.
MDF Build out
a.
Room size 10’ x 12’.
b. Wrap room with 4’ x 8’x ¾” fire rated plywood installation coordinated with DOTs PM.
c.
Floor will be a clear seal on concrete. No flooring is to be installed in any closet.
d. Adequate lighting in front of rack and in the back of the racks.
e.
Typical electrical layout refer to attachment 8, 10,& 11.
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 2 of 11
Update: April 2016
f.
All doors providing access to closet needs to open outward into a common corridor.
g. Door must be keyed to a XGM1 barrel.
h. MDF will require a separate AC unit placement of this unit will be coordinated with DOTs PM.
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 3 of 11
Update: April 2016
Typical MDF Layout
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 4 of 11
Update: April 2016
2.
IDF Build out:
a. Room size 10’ x 10’
b. 1 – 4’ x 8’ ¾” fire rated plywood installation coordinated with DOTs PM.
c. Floor will be a clear seal on concrete. No flooring is to be installed in any closet.
d. Adequate lighting in front of rack and in the back of the racks.
e. Typical electrical layout refer to attachment 10
f. All doors providing access to closet needs to open outward into a common corridor.
g. Door must be keyed to a XGM1 barrel.
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 5 of 11
Update: April 2016
Typical IDF Layout
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 6 of 11
Update: April 2016
IDF/MDF Outlet Configurations
Typical 220V
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 7 of 11
Update: April 2016
Dedicated Receptacle
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 8 of 11
Update: April 2016
PART 5 - TYPICAL IDF/MDF EQUIPMENT
A. Typical:
1.
Equipment Racks and Frames
2.
Cabling (horizontal and backbone)
3.
Patch panels
4.
Network switches, routers, etc.
5.
PBX/VOIP
B. Other:
1.
Security panels and equipment
2.
Public address/Intercom
3.
CATV/MATV
4.
Distributed Antennae System (DAS)
5.
Low Voltage/Specialty
C. Electrical Considerations:
D. Load:
1.
For initial planning purposes, assume 3KVA per rack plus an additional? KVA for wall mounted equipment.
Final loads shall be defined by the Technology Consultant.
E. Electrical Panels:
1.
Do not locate electrical panel(s) within the room unless the panel(s) is dedicated to serving only the technology
equipment in the IDF/MDF.
If an electrical panel is to be provided:
F.
a.
Assume (for initial planning purposes) a 120/208 3-phase panels sized at no less than 150A.
b.
Locate the panel on the short wall opposite the end of the row of racks. If this is not possible, than
locate the panel on the long wall in a location that is not immediately in front of or behind the racks.
c.
The panel shall not be used to power the lights or convenience receptacles within the IDF/MDF
Power Receptacles:
1.
Provide convenience receptacles for each wall as required by code.
2.
Wall receptacles shall be flush mounted with the backboard (i.e. surface mounted receptacles and raceway
interfere with the mounting of ladder racking and restricts the surface area available for wall-mounted
equipment.
3.
Provide receptacles for the equipment racks mounted on the wall where the racks originate (minimum of one
per rack).
4.
For initial planning purposes, assume that both 20A and 30A receptacles will be required.
5.
Electrical Drawings should indicate that the Contractor is to refer to the Technology Drawings for receptacle
mounting requirements, types, quantities, and locations.
G. Lighting:
1.
Provide a minimum of 50 foot-candles measured at 3-feet above the floor.
2.
Provide pendant type fixtures, located in two rows above and parallel to the equipment racks (one row in front
of the racks and one row behind).
PART 6 - MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 9 of 11
Update: April 2016
A. Environmental Control:
1.
Provide independent (stand-alone) environmental control capable of maintaining temperature 24x7x365 at no
more than 80 degrees F and humidity not exceeding 50%.
2.
For initial planning purposes, assume 3 tons of cooling per relay rack will be required and 5 tons of cooling
will be required for server cabinets. Final loads shall be as defined by the Technology Consultant.
3.
Provide Monitoring of:
a.
Room temperature and humidity.
b.
Discharge temperature and humidity.
c.
Fan motor status.
d.
Overall unity status.
B. Fire Protection:
1.
If a wet pipe system is used/required, provide wire cages around sprinkler heads.
2.
Provide each IDF/MDF with smoke and heat sensors connected to the building fire alarm panel.
C. Ducts, Piping, and Plumbing:
1.
Mechanical ductwork, piping and/or plumbing shall not pass through an IDF/MDF (i.e. these systems should
be routed around the IDF/MDF, not through it.)
PART 7 - ARCHITECTURAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Locations:
1.
Locate IDFs on 150 ft. radii (with slight overlap). In practice, this will result in one IDF per
approximately 25k to 35k SF.
2.
EIA/TIA standards require a minimum of one IDF per floor. For facilities with multiple floors, IDFs should be
stacked floor-to-floor, and identically sized.
3.
Do not co-locate IDFs/MDF with Electrical, Mechanical, or Janitorial rooms.
4.
Do not locate IDFs/MDFs directly below any area where water service may be provided (e.g. restrooms,
kitchens, wet laboratories, etc.)
5.
Locate IDFs in central/core areas wherever possible.
6.
Locate IDFs in the middle of the areas that they are to serve, wherever possible (this helps reduce the overall
quantity of IDFs required by maximizing the floor space served by the remaining IDFs).
7.
Entry should be direct form a hallway or a common room/area, not through another room (such as an
Electrical Room, Mechanical Room, or Office).
8.
Close proximity to an Electrical Room is desirable, although ideally the wall of the IDF should not be the same
wall as that of an Electrical Room.
9.
Reducing the quantity of IDFs necessitates larger (longer) remaining IDFs and longer cable runs (which can
impact cost and future maintenance).
B. Walls, Doors, and Ceilings:
1.
Provide one-hour fire rated partitions and opening per NFPA 75.
2.
Provide walls to structure. Assume equipment to be mounted on all walls.
3.
Provide 11-feet minimum overhead clearance from floor.
4.
Rooms should have no more than 4 wall surfaces.
5.
Avoid columns in rooms. If not possible, locate columns in corners only and add “length’ to the room equal to
the width of the column (e.g. a 2 foot column will necessitate adding 2-feet to the length of the room).
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 10 of 11
Update: April 2016
6.
Door swings should swing out of the room – not into the room.
7.
Doors should be located on the “short” wall if at all possible.
8.
Door should be located on either end of a wall – not the middle of a wall.
9.
Inform the technology consultant if doors are expected to exceed 7’ tall.
10. Ceiling space should be left open to structure – no suspended ceilings.
11. Unless the owner requires otherwise, wall finishes should be light color.
Design Guidelines
00 70 00
Page 11 of 11
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 80 00
SECURITY DESIGN GUIDELINES
Minimum Security Standards for Systems
1. Purpose………………………………………………………………………………..
1
2. Scope………………………………………….………………………………………. 2
3. Site Perimeter…………………………………………………………………………
2
4. Parking Areas, Pedestrian Routes & Vehicular Routes Minimum Standards …
3
5. Signage………………………………………………………………………………..
4
6. Landscaping and Vegetation………………………………………………………..
5
7. Points of Entry………………………………………………………………………..
5
8. Minimum Standards………………………………………………………………….
6
9. Cabling………………………………………………………………………………… 8
10. General Design Notes………………………………….…………………………….
9
11. General Flag Notes…………………………………………………………………..
10
12. Special System Legend……………………………………..………..…………….
10
13. Preferred Equipment List…………………………………...……….………………
11
 Note:
Due to the ever changing technology associated with security systems, this is a working
document. Please obtain a new copy at the onset of each new project.
Purpose
This document defines the minimum security criteria required for DPS owned and leased facilities and the
spaces and assets within those facilities. This document applies security measures consistently throughout
all DPS spaces and is an integral part of the planning, design, and construction of all projects. An objective
of this manual is to provide cost effective design criteria that provides an appropriate level of protection to
each facility. The criteria set forth in this guide are to be taken into consideration during design process
and exist in addition to all other District policies and local, state, and federal guidelines and building codes.
It is meant as a supplement to the Denver Public Schools Design and Construction Standards,
http://fm.dpsk12.org/?page_id=90, specifically Section 17650 – Security Systems – (28 00 00 – Electronic
Safety and Security).
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 1 of 13
Security Design Guidelines
Update: April 2016
Scope
Building security encompasses how assets (i.e., people, information, and property) can be protected from
the effects of malevolent acts carried out by individuals or groups of individuals. Design guidelines shall
include forethought to include the following components; deterrence, delay, and detection.
This document is designed to be a guideline which applies to any DPS educational or administrative
facility. It does not differentiate between elementary schools, middle schools, high schools, or charter
schools. Architects can make specific adjustments based upon the unique needs of the facility. These
standards apply to new construction and all additions, alterations, and modernizations. The criteria used in
this document is based on risks common to educational facilities and are consistent with other standards
developed for these types of facilities. Additionally, this document recognizes risks are unique to each
facility and the assets that they may house. Therefore, the criteria developed will vary by facility type,
space usage, and risk categorization.
Site Perimeter
The site perimeter is part of the school grounds contacting the street and adjacent property. It defines the
initial impression of a school and communicates to the public a message of accessibility or inaccessibility.
The perimeter also marks the outermost line that can be protected by security measures incorporated during
the design process.
Design Considerations
• Establish a defined perimeter around the school building from the building as feasible. Use layered edge
treatments such as fencing, landscaping, and ground surface treatments.
• Use symbolic markers such as archways, entry posts, and student artworks to create psychological
boundaries.
• Minimize the number of vehicle access points.
Joint-Use or Shared Facilities
Special consideration should be taken in the design of schools with joint-use or shared facilities such as
playgrounds and recreational areas which are accessible to the community during and/or after school hours.
It is critical to create boundaries between the community and the school by establishing a distinct perimeter
for both the school and the joint-use facilities with separate and secure access points. Properly designed
joint-use facilities can reinforce ownership and territorial integrity. Consider the following when
establishing perimeters for shared facilities:
• Separate entries for facilities with frequent public use (e.g., gymnasiums, multipurpose rooms, libraries,
auditoriums, and swimming pools).
• Zone alarms for after-hours activities.
• A separate perimeter for after-hours activity areas, play field, and common spaces to keep other parts of
the school secure.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 2 of 13
Update: April 2016
Entrances
• Clearly establish and define school property lines with limited access at select entry points.
• Design the campus perimeter so visitors and guest must pass through a particular point of entrance.
• Locate entry points in highly visible areas so they can be monitored by staff and students in the course of
normal activities.
Physical Barriers
• Use physical barriers to deter unauthorized access and resist vandalism.
Fencing
• Use fencing that does not permit footholds. Chain link fence shall utilize small mesh 1-inch to 1 ½inches).
• Carefully choose materials for fences and landscaping that provide opportunities for natural surveillance
and access control.
Parking Areas, Pedestrian Routes & Vehicular Routes
Vehicular routes and parking areas include the primary entry drive, parking lots, bus loading zones, parent
drop-off/pickup areas, and service and delivery drives. Safe and convenient access to the school for
students, parents, visitors, and community users must be a priority in designing a school site. The following
areas of a school should be separate, distinct, and marked well to avoid potential problems:
• Student walkways
• Bus unloading and parent/student drop-off areas
• Special needs student drop-off
• Delivery areas
• Parking for students, staff, visitors, and community users
• Outdoor activity area access for students
• Separate vehicular and pedestrian routes by creating barriers and well-defined routes.
• Ensure parking areas and vehicular routes are adequately lit with vandal-resistant lighting.
• Designate separate parking lots for student use, especially for high schools, in order to monitor students
who may leave campus during school hours. Secure these parking lots and, if possible, supervise during
peak- use times.
• Avoid long, straight parking layouts that allow cars to speed through the lot endangering pedestrians or, if
unavoidable, use speed bumps.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 3 of 13
Update: April 2016
• Place parking areas in close proximity to school buildings to facilitate visual surveillance from classroom
and administration area. Provide the administrative areas and classrooms with windows overlooking
parking areas
• Locate windows in school buildings along exterior pedestrian routes wherever possible to encourage
surveillance and reduce the potential for undetected trespassers, vandalism, etc.
Signage
Signage is a critical element for controlling access on school campuses. Proper signage can reduce
confusion over site circulation, parking, and entrance locations, thus reducing the number of people
wandering into restricted areas.
Consider posting the following signs:
• Clearly marked entry signs to school grounds and/or school buildings indicating to visitors what is
expected of them, including rules governing access and impermissible behavior as well as applicable local
and state regulations.
• Signs numbering each entrance to the school to assist emergency responders during an incident.
Signage
• Traffic regulatory and directional signs controlling traffic flow and directing
vehicles to specific appropriate
points.
• On-site directional, parking, and
cautionary signs for all who utilize
the campus.
• Welcome signs directing visitors
to main entry and administrative
office as well as to an emergency
contact point.
• Signs declaring school grounds as
drug-free and gun-free zones.
• Signs indicating the penalty for trespassing.
Sign Elements
Keep the following points in mind when designing
campus signage:
• Do not block vision at intersections.
• Display street addresses or building numbers instead of
detailed descriptive information about the school grounds.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 4 of 13
Update: April 2016
• Include other commonly spoken language(s).
• Post warning signs at intervals of no more than 100 feet.
• Ensure signs do not block lines of sight.
• Provide lighting designed to enhance natural surveillance near signage.
• Use large lettering and bold graphics with simple directions.
• Design signage to eliminate spaces permitting concealment.
Landscaping and Vegetation
Without proper planning and maintenance, landscaping may become a security problem by creating places
to hide, blocking lighting, and interfering with lines of sight necessary for natural surveillance. Misplaced
landscape elements may also encourage vandalism. Many landscape features, however, can be used in
school design to enhance security. Elements such as landforms and vegetation can be used to define or
designate space, provide some level of blast shielding, and to deter or prevent unwanted surveillance and
unauthorized access.
Landscaping can also be a cost-effective method of access control. A row of trees with low-level plants can
define an edge leading to an opening or entrance. Landscape materials such as boulders, mulch, and timbers
can also effectively delineate spaces and control access at a lower cost than fencing or walls.
• Keep trees at least 20 feet from buildings to prevent window and roof access. If possible, do not plant
trees near building, keep around site perimeter.
• Where planting is used next to windows or doors, use only low growing plants or high-branching
deciduous trees at a distance which will not allow roof access.
• Avoid using dense vegetation close to buildings, as it may screen illicit activity.
• Grout landscaping stones and masonry materials so they cannot be removed by hand and used as weapons
or in the commission of crimes.
• Limit shrubbery to a maximum height of 3 feet and trees to a minimum height of 6 feet at the lowest
branches to ensure unimpaired visibility between three and 6 feet from the ground.
Points of Entry
The most effective way to prevent points of entry from being a security threat is to minimize the quantity.
Providing only one entryway is not realistic nor safe for schools, other mitigation measures are necessary to
secure multiple points of entry.
All points of entry must incorporate features to enhance security and control who enters and leaves the
buildings. When designing an entrance, keep the following points in mind:
• Control entry access with a combination of direct supervision, limited points of entry, and security
technology.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 5 of 13
Update: April 2016
• Minimize the number of unmonitored entrances into the building.
• Locate entries so key areas (i.e. parent drop-off, parking, waiting zones, administration, have multiple
points of surveillance.
• Provide adequate space at entries for security screening, queuing, equipment, and thorough investigation
of students if necessary.
• Provide adequate illumination with vandal
resistant fixtures.
• When using a campus-plan design, secure all
entry points
• Require visitors to pass through at least one
close-up visual screening before they can access
to bathrooms, service space, stairwells, or other
amenities inside the school.
• Control access into the building through
designated, supervised, or locked entry points,
including windows and service entries. Grant entry by permission of supervising staff or by use of
proximity cards, keys, and intercom devices.
Minimum Standards
This section lists the minimum standards that should be applied.
Burglar Alarm
The burglar alarm includes motion detection and door contact sensors. These devices provide
alternative methods to detect actual or attempted intrusion into protected areas through alarm
components, monitoring, and reporting systems.
Bosch main panels currently in use, see approved system equipment below.
• Motion detectors


360° technology at entrances, main office, and classrooms as needed.
Long range technology in hallways.
• Door Contacts/Position Switches on every door allowing entry/exit to the building. Mount position
switches on the latch edge of the door within six inches of the latch edge. With double doors, fit each door
with a separate contact sensor. Doors controlled by entry control devices require coordination of intrusion
detection with authorized accesses to preclude nuisance alarms for authorized entries. Surface mounted
position or balanced magnetic switches shall have armored cabling from the sensor to a junction box
location adjacent to or above the opening.
• Labs and computer rooms require a 360° motion detector and keypad connected to main intrusion panel
and programmed as a partitioned alarm.
• Duress Alarm Switch in Main Office.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 6 of 13
Update: April 2016
• Water backflow control devices required. See 28 16 00-1 one-line drawing.
Video Surveillance
Video Insight video management system currently in use, see approved system equipment below.
Proper placement of surveillance cameras is crucial and must be included in the following areas:
• Cafeteria – serving area, seating area, designated entry and exit areas.
• Student restroom entrances. Consider restroom design placement where natural surveillance can also
occur (i.e. primary corridors and administration areas).
• Stairs and Stairwells. Provide open or see-through handrails and guardrails on stairs, balconies, ramps,
and upper-level corridors to allow natural surveillance and eliminate hiding places.
• Labs and computer rooms.
• Main office.
• Elevator landing/lobby.
• Parking lots, roof top mounted cameras.
• Playgrounds, roof top mounted cameras.
• Student and visitor entries.
• General coverage for building exterior.
Access Control
The function of an access control system is to permit authorized personnel into or out of a controlled
area. All access control systems control passage by using one or more of the three factors of
identification (something a person knows, something a person has, or something a person is or does).
Automated entry control devices based on these factors consist of two (2) categories: code and credential.
Undetermined manufacturer at this time.
 Equip identified access doors with conventional key and lock systems for manual override in case of
system failure.
 Install latch guards to protect the electric strike and door bolt that are susceptible to tamper or picking
from outside the protected space.
• Main Entrance(s)
• Visitor Entry
• Staff Parking Entry
• ECE Classroom Entry
• Kaleidoscope/ECE Program Entry
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 7 of 13
Update: April 2016
• Playground/Cafeteria entry.
• Elevators, floor call only unless specific floors are restricted, then include exit as well.
• All Telephone/Data Rooms and any doors leading to these rooms for after-hours access.
Intercom
Aiphone AX series products currently in use, see approved system equipment below.
• Master intercom control




Main office (one per secretary)
Principal office
Vice-principal or counselor office
Kaleidoscope/ECE program area.
• Door or substations




Designated visitor entries
Playground/cafeteria entry
Kaleidoscope/ECE program entry
ADA entry

Install AED (Automated External Defibrillator) outside of Main Office mounted at ADA level
(See parts list for current model)
AED
Wi-Fi
• Cover all exterior parking lots with DPS wireless network technology. Use external WAP’s.
Cabling – All Systems
 All Cabling shall be Plenum rated.
• Video Surveillance – To include Special System Legend icons (Security Camera, PVM). Panduit
Category 6. Install cabling to closest telephone/data room.
• Burglar Alarm – To include Special System Legend icons (MS, MS1, KP, C, DC, 4 conductor/22 AWG
stranded for door contacts. 6 conductor/22 AWG stranded for motion detectors and keypads. 6
conductor/18 AWG stranded + shielded for panel to module and module to module. Category 6 from panel
to data rack for phone line. Install cabling to closest telephone/data room.
• Access Control – To include Special System Legend icons (ELR, ELRK, Panduit Category 6. Install
cabling to closest telephone/data room.
• Intercom – To include Special System Legend icons (AP, MIC, AX). Panduit Category 6. Home run
master intercoms and door intercoms to location of Aiphone control unit (AX), maximum distance 980 feet.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 8 of 13
Update: April 2016
General Notes – All Drawings
A. All cabling shall be routed in concealed accessible ceilings, raceway, or cable tray.
B. All conduit sleeves and fire-stopping necessary for a complete system (not already provided) are the
responsibility of this contractor.
C. Cables shall be supported from a structure via approved J-hooks where no cable tray is present. Do not
support solely from structural elements. All cable shall be in conduit or supported by cable tray or j-hook.
D. Provide conduit sleeves as required, not shown. Any penetrations through walls shall be sleeved. Provide
fire-stop on all sleeves. Provide bushings on all sleeves.
E. Vinyl tie straps are prohibited. Utilize blue, plenum rated, Velcro tie straps to bundle cables throughout the
facility.
F.
Cable ends shall be labeled.
G. At CCTV camera locations, provide J-box above accessible ceiling or provide rough-in at wall. Provide
plenum rated patch cord for above ceiling locations. Provide (1) data drop. Data jack to be terminated in Jbox for interior applications and inside building prior to exterior wall penetration for exterior applications.
Use patch cord from exterior CCTV to data jack inside building. Provide required mounting hardware.
H. Exterior double door preparation – all exterior double doors and frames to be supplied with and prepared
for precision ept-5 power transfer. (1) - ½” conduit from EPT to J-box above accessible ceiling. Provide
Styrofoam blocking in frames that will be filled. ELR on one door only; right hand side looking at door
from outside.
I.
Exterior single door preparation – (1) - ½” conduit from frame mounted electric strike to j-box above
accessible ceiling. Provide Styrofoam blocking in frames that will be filled.
J.
All exterior doors – (1) - ½” conduit from recessed door contact switch to interior accessible ceiling.
K. Access controlled doors/frames and related power supply shall be identified by a door tag number with
nameplates in accordance with section 10426 – signage and graphics.
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 9 of 13
Update: April 2016
Flag Notes – All Drawings
❶
11
11
11
❷
11
11
11
❸
11
11
11
Exterior wall mounted camera with flush mount, single gang, weatherproof J-box for camera. ¾” conduit
into accessible interior ceiling space w/bushing. Mounting height within 12-14’ unless otherwise noted.
❹
11
11
❺
11
11
11
Data jack at security panel. Mount within panel.
Interior wall mounted camera with flush mount, single gang, J-box for camera. ¾” conduit into accessible
ceiling space w/bushing. Mounting height within 8-10’ unless otherwise noted.
Parapet mounted J-box for camera. Provide 1” conduit through roof into accessible ceiling space,
terminated in weatherproof box mounted to Uni-strut framing for parapet camera. Verify mounting
location with DPS prior to rough-in.
Duress alarm switch, connect to security system.
Special System Legend
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 10 of 13
Update: April 2016
Preferred Equipment List
All equipment including monitoring devices, card readers, power supplies, burglar alarm panels, recording and
storage, cameras, and related data processing equipment and computer hardware are defined in this Preferred
Equipment List.
The purchase of all equipment will comply with this list. The compliance policy is exception based and requires
clear documentation from procurement to justify any purchase that deviates from the list. Approval must be obtained
in writing from the Project Manager.
Manufacturer
Part Number
Description
Cameras
Sony
Sony
Sony
Pelco
Pelco
Sony
Sony
Sony
Rohn
Rohn
Rohn
Vigitron
Vigitron
TWLinx
SNC-EM602R
SNC-EM632R
SNC-DH260
PP451
PP450
UNI-MDB3
UNI-PMA1
UNI-CMA1
FRM238SP5
FRMPAD
FY253
Vi2301
Vi0012
2090-192-30B
1.3MP Dome Camera w/IR
1.3MP Dome Camera w/IR
Exterior 3MP Dome Camera w/IR
Roof Top Sled “Gravity” Mount w/weight material
Parapet Mount
Wall Mount
Pole Mount Adapter
Corner Mount Adapter
Gravity Sled
Gravity Sled Mat
Mast
PoE Ethernet Extender (1,4,8,16 port-change last letter in part #)
12 VDC Wall-mount Power Supply
SurgeGate 1Gb CAT6-75 suppressor for exterior cameras
Power Supply’s
Lifetime Series Pro
Altronix
Altronix
Altronix
Axis
Axis
Sony
FPX200A/100-A8D8E2 Dual Voltage Power supply
AL400ULX
Main Control Power Supply/Charger
AL400ULXB
Main Control Replacement Power Supply/Charger Board
AL400ULB
Electric Strike Power Supply Replacement Board
5014-204
PoE Power Injector-30W
0226-004
PoE Power Injector-15W
PBU1
WIFI weather proof power box
Signal Transmission Equipment
Aruba
Aruba
MST2H13NO-US
MST200 Exterior wireless mesh node TX
MSR2K23N1-US MSR2000 2x2 dual radio receiver, Polarized outdoor
antenna (ANT-2x2-5614), Lightning Arrestor (AP-LAR1), 1M
7D Antenna Cable (AFC7DL01-00)
NVR and Accessories
Video Insight
Video Insight
Video Insight
Video Insight
Video Insight
LG
Pelco
NVR-R-1-1-4TB
NVR-R-1-1-8TB
IPSv5
VP-1
VP-4
32LD452B
PMCL-WM2A
Dell R210 1U Rack Server 4GB, 4TB
Dell R320 2U Rack Server 4GB, 8TB
IP camera license
1 Channel Encoder
4 Channel Encoder
32” 1080P Monitor (or Comparable model)
Tilt/swivel dual-arm wall mount (or Comparable model)
Panduit
UPTCP*ORY
Orange 5e Patch Cords, sub* for length, 7’,10’,14’,20’
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 11 of 13
Update: April 2016
MinuteMan
YUASA
E1500RM2U
NP7-12
1500 VA UPS
7.2 Ah Replacement Battery
Access Control – Intercom
Aiphone
Aiphone
Aiphone
AX-8MV
MCW-S/A
AX-DV
Aiphone
Aiphone
Aiphone
Aiphone
Aiphone
Aiphone
SBX-AXDV30
AX-DVF
AX-084C
PS-2420UL
RY-24L
IE-SS
8 Door Audio/Video Master Control
Desk Mount Stand for Master Control
Video Door Station, Surface Mount, use when mounting next to
door on same surface
30 Degree Angle Surface Box for AX-DV
Video Door Station, Flush Mount, comes w/mounting box
Main CEU for 8 Doors, 4 Masters, AX
24V DC Power Supply for CEU (2 Required)
Door Release Relay, 24V DC Input
Door Station, audio only, (replaces LEDA)
Access Control – Card Key
Open Options
*Mercury
Open Options
*Mercury
LifeSafety Power E5M
HID
HID
RCI
RCI
Mulberry
Mulberry
Dorma
HES
HES
HES
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
IR-Schlage
IR-Schlage
GE/Interlogix
Command Access
SSP-D1 IP-Based Intelligent Door Controller (one required each site)
EP1501
NSC-100
IP-Based Network Sub-controller (all other doors)
MR51e
Access Controller/Power Enclosure
900NNNNEK2037P
iClass R10 Mullion-mount reader
921NTNNEK00000
iClass RK40 Keypad Reader (elevator use)
0162
Electric Strike, Continuous Duty, Surface Mount
ICEPK
Heat Reducer for Continuous Duty Strikes
97951
SS 1G Box, w/ 5/8” centered KO for HiD R10
30671
1G weatherproof outdoor gasket
ES62
Electric Strike
2006M
Electric Audible Buzzer
1006C
Electric Strike, for Cylindrical Locksets
2005M3 SMART Pac III for HES 1006C
CM150-08
Door Control Board
ELR151 Power Supply w/1 control board
ELRK3
2100 Series Electric Lock Retrofit Kit
EPT-5
Door/Frame Power Transfer
1625
Latch Guard
798C-18 Armored Door Cord, 18”x1/2” w/4-cond wire
798-18
Armored Door Cord, 12”x1/2”- less wires
RCR-REX-W
Request to Exit
CMAETH4W5.0X5.0-626 (CH-BB68) Heavyweight 4 Wire Power Hinge
AED
Phillips Heartstart FRx
861304
Automated external defibrillator
Emergency Notification System
Video Insight
Video Insight
Honeywell
TD-650
TD-642-DIO
270R
Network Media Player
Input/Output Adapter
Duress Panic Button – activates system
D7412GV4
B208
B426
D8103
D101
Panel w/transformer, D8103 Enclosure, lock & key
8 Input module for SDI2 bus
Conettix IP Ethernet Interface
Universal Enclosure
Lock & key set
Intrusion
Bosch
Bosch
Bosch
Bosch
Bosch
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 12 of 13
Update: April 2016
Bosch
Honeywell
GE/Sentrol
GE/Interlogix
Honeywell
Hoffman
Bosch
Bosch
Bosch
Bosch
Ademco
B920
Alpha numeric keypad
985
Overhead Door Contacts
1076
Steel Door Contact
2505A
Wide gap surface mount, steel armored cable
960
Door Contacts-wide gap
A12N126
NEMA 1 Hinged cover enclosure, 12”x12”x6” w/standard latch
DS860
Motion detector - 60’ x 60’
DS778
Motion detector – 200’ x 15’ Long Range
DS9360 Motion detector – 360 degrees
DS970
Motion detector
Wave2
Siren
DPS Security Vendors List
LINX
Ken Beckey
[email protected]
9900 E. 51st Ave.
Denver, CO 80238
303-307-3669
Red Hawk Fire & Safety, LLC
Randy Kerr
[email protected]
6840 N. Broadway Unit A
Denver, CO 80202
720-357-3593
Design Guidelines
00 80 00
Page 13 of 13
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 90 00
SITE DESIGN GUIDELINES
PART 0 - PURPOSE
C. Describe materials and conditions, which do not easily fit into specific specification sections.
PART 1 - SAFETY
A. Site:
1.
2.
Retaining Walls: Use only if necessary and at minimum height.
a.
Provide guard rails if walls exceed 30 inches in height, and as required by Code.
b.
Provide ADA handrails if retaining walls are adjacent to walks.
Winter Ice: Site design to consider possible icing conditions at:
a.
Playgrounds
b.
Parking lots
c.
Sidewalks
d.
Service Drives and Docks
e.
Snow removal storage areas adjacent to paved areas or walks.
3.
Curbing: areaways shall have curb at least 6 inches above surrounding grade.
4.
Avoid use of areaways where possible.
a.
Grating :
1) Areaways and site drains shall be covered with appropriate grating including padlock or bolt-down
securing features.
2) Gratings in playgrounds and other foot traffic areas must have pedestrian safe grating with closely
spaced bars. Maximum clear spacing will be 1/4 inch.
3) Access:
a) If areaway gratings are large, provide at least one smaller section within the grate that can be
opened manually by one person.
b) If areaway is over 4 feet deep, provide fixed access ladder on interior of secured portion of
areaway.
c) Provide drainage piping or provisions for sump pumping from areaway floors.
b.
Floor:
1) Areaway floor shall be minimum of 4-inch thick concrete slab.
5.
Parking: Design parking and service drives so that there is a traffic separation between these areas and the
playground surfaces. Provide direct access for students to go from buildings to playground areas. Students
should not be required to cross through vehicle drives or parking areas to reach playgrounds.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 1 of 20
Site Design Guidelines
Update: April 2016
PART 2 - SECURITY
A. Lighting: Provide security lighting:
1.
At areas subject to vandalism.
2.
At building entrances and exits.
3.
At building recesses or yards screened from street lighting.
4.
General security lighting shall be provided remotely located from building and directed toward building.
Lighting shall illuminate all portions of the building.
B. Screening
1.
Avoid designing building recesses or courtyards, which could provide hiding areas, which are not visible
from the street.
2.
Avoid low, thick shrubs, which could provide hiding areas.
PART 3 - LOADING DOCKS
A. Kitchen:
1.
Elementary:
a.
2.
Kitchen: Provide a 6 inch high concrete platform unless site conditions and budget allow for full height
dock similar to Middle School and High School criteria.
Middle Schools And High Schools:
a. Kitchen: 4'-0" high concrete with bumper protection
b. General Service Locations: Review proposed service locations with DPS Engineering and DPS.
PART 4 - OTHER DELIVERY AREAS
A. Equipment and Supplies to be delivered at appropriate location(s) specified by DPS.
B. Boiler room and major mechanical equipment spaces may require vehicle access to adjacent doors or designated
loading docks.
C. Delivery of books and educational supplies should be considered.
PART 5 - DUMPSTERS
A. DPS must approve location and material colors and types for dumpster enclosures.
B. Gates are prohibited at dumpster enclosures. A/E shall work with the City and County of Denver to design
dumpster enclosures that will be accepted without gates.
C. Obtain trash truck configurations (front-loading or side-loading) and dimensions from the DPS. Design
dumpster access drives and facilities to accommodate turning radius and loading configuration of trash trucks.
D. Heavy concrete pavement is required in areas of trash truck wheel loads adjacent to trash pads and enclosures.
E. Coordinate dumpster pad dimensions with A/E team and DPS.
F.
Obtain dumpster container quantity and dimensions from the DPS.
G. Locate near kitchen or other designated building access points for custodial use.
H. Used by custodial staff for routine trash disposal.
I.
Serviced by front-loading trash collection truck.
J.
Pads for dumpster enclosures will be heavy duty concrete. Refer to Division 3, Concrete and Section 32 13 13,
Concrete Paving.
1.
Minimum depth: 6 inches, or as specified in geotechnical report.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 2 of 20
Update: April 2016
2.
Minimum reinforcement: #4 rebar, 18 inches on center, each way, or as recommended in geotechnical
report.
K. Provide landscape screening where possible (no gates or other operable screening devices).
PART 6 - EXCAVATION AND FILL
A. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve A/E of contract responsibilities.
B. Soils report:
1.
A report of subsurface investigations, completed by a DPS-employed Geotechnical Engineer, will be made
available for inspection (by appointment only) at the office of the A/E, the Geotechnical Engineer and the
Owner. A copy of this report will be provided to the Contractor upon request.
2.
Geotechnical report to provide discussion of the following structural recommendations:
a)
Allowable soil bearing capacity for soil-supported foundations or allowable rock bearing capacity for
rock-supported foundations.
b) Deep foundation allowable design capacities and estimated embedment depth (if required by project).
c)
Deep foundation requirements such as anticipated drilling/driving obstacles, whether casings are
required and potential for groundwater.
d) Lateral soil design values including at-rest, active and passive pressures along with coefficient of
friction.
e)
Potential of collapsible or expansive soils.
f)
Potential for sulfate attack.
C. Hazardous materials
1.
Standards for hazardous materials are located in standard Section 01 35 43, Hazardous Material
Proceedures.
2.
Owner will test on-site soils for hazardous materials prior to export.
a)
DPS will schedule testing with DPS Hazardous Materials Specialist.
b) DPS will consult with DPS Hazardous Materials Specialist to determine frequency of tests and optimal
number of tests that will be required.
c)
3.
A/E shall assist the Owner in determining location and frequency of testing.
Contractor is responsible for testing of off-site soils for hazardous materials prior to import.
a)
Contractor shall use DPS Hazardous Materials Specialist for testing of import materials.
b) Contractor shall consult with DPS and DPS Hazardous Materials Specialist to determine optimal
frequency of tests.
D. Existing buried structures:
1.
A/E shall coordinate with the DPS-employed Surveyor in the attempt to identify existing building
foundations that may be present in excavation areas.
2.
Indicate existing foundations in the construction drawings.
3.
Removal of existing buried structures shall be included in the construction contract.
E. Work involving structural fill material shall not commence until the Geotechnical Engineer has issued written
acceptance of proposed import material.
1.
Contractor shall bear the cost for testing and verification of off-site materials to be used as structural fill.
2.
The Contractor shall provide access to the borrow site to permit the Geotechnical Engineer to observe the
site conditions and remove samples of the proposed structural borrow fill material as required by the A/E.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 3 of 20
Update: April 2016
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for locating all existing utilities (including depth), both public and private, that
may conflict with the proposed construction.
1.
Contractor shall physically verify location of all buried utilities within 20 feet of proposed excavations.
2.
Physical location of utilities shall be accomplished by hand excavation and potholing until the utility is
encountered. Restore existing pavements and other surfaces damaged by potholing in accorrdance with
related Sections 01 73 29, Cutting and Patching and 02 41 00 Demolition.
3.
If utility is reported to be within 20 feet of the excavation and is not found by potholing, the Contractor
shall contact the Owner and A/E for instructions.
4.
Utilities with uncertain location shall be brought to the attention of the A/E and the Owner.
5.
Contractor shall stop excavation upon encountering unexpected subsurface utilities during excavation or
trenching, and the A/E shall be notified immediately. Work shall not resume until the A/E has issued a
directive.
PART 7 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
A. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve the A/E of contract responsibilities.
B. Indicate anticipated bottom and actual top elevation of each drilled pier on the foundation plan or other
appropriate drawing within the Contract Documents. The bottom elevation shall be identified as +10%. These
anticipated lengths will be used to establish total length of all piers for bidding.
C. Cost Adjustments
1.
NO EXTRA COST WILL BE ALLOWED NOR CREDIT EXPECTED FOR OVERRUN OR
UNDERRUN OF DRILLED PIER LENGTH EXCEPT AS INDICATED BELOW.
2.
Unit prices are not allowed in lieu of indicating anticipated lengths (see above).
3.
Unit price should be included with bid to minimize future disputes regarding overrun/underrun of pier
lengths.
4.
The Owner’s Testing Agency will determine the depth required to reach satisfactory bearing.
5.
The Owner will not consider requests for additional payment for pier lengths unless the total installed
length of all piers collectively exceeds 10% of the total length of all pier lengths indicated in the Contract
Documents.
6.
Owner reserves the right to request credit for pier lengths not installed when the total length of all piers is
less than 10% of the total length of all pier lengths indicated in the Contract Documents.
7.
Measurement of pier lengths shall be to the nearest 0.10 feet.
PART 8 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
A. Accessibility: Coordinate site design, including playground areas, with ADA accessibility requirements.
B. Playground Areas:
1.
Refer to Section 00 92 00 - Playground Standards.
2.
Refer to Learning Landscapes Standards and website:
http://www.activeenvironments.com/schoolyards/learning-landscapes/
3.
Fixed playground equipment and furnishings shall be included in Construction Contract (backstops,
basketball goals, tetherball posts, etc.).
C. Site Grading and Drainage:
1.
Refer to other Division 32 standards for stormwater quality and detention requirements.
2.
For safety reasons, standing water of any depth greater than ½-inch is not allowed on any area of the site.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 4 of 20
Update: April 2016
3.
Provide trench/chase drains across walks where concentrated stormwater runoff is likely to occur (i.e.,
roofdrain downspouts or grass swales).
4.
Minimum Slopes (refer to these standards unless greater slope requirements are indicated by soils report or
by ADA accesability requirements).
a)
The first 10 feet from buildings and other structures in landscaped or otherwise impervious areas: 10.0
percent minimum directed away from the building face.
b) Sodded play fields: 2 percent minimum.
c)
Asphalt play area: 2 percent minimum.
d) Concrete play area: 1.5 percent minimum.
e)
Concrete V-Pans: 1.5 percent minimum.
f)
Concrete walks and pavement: 0.5 percent minimum.
g) Parking: 2 percent minimum.
i)
Design parking lots to drain toward curbs and away from building entries where possible.
ii) Design so that drainage collects outside of pedestrian and vehicular traffic patterns.
h) Channelized drainage: 1.5 percent minimum.
i)
Provide cross drainage on walks, steps, and ramps.
D. Lawns, trees, planting beds, and shrubs:
1.
Design lawns in shapes and dimensions that large (10’) riding mowers can easily negotiate.
2.
Steep grades, sharp transitions, tight corners, and dead ends that are not likely to be mowable with a riding
lawn mower or that will get scalped by the mower should be avoided.
3.
Keep site furnishings a minimum of 8 inches from lawn edges to prevent accidental damage from mowers.
4.
For security reasons trees and shrubs should be selected and placed to avoid screened or concealed areas.
5.
Locate and space trees and shrubs so that adjacent grass areas can be mowed with a 10’ wide mower.
Fences, curbs, buildings, and other obstructions to mowing and pruning operations shall be considered
when placing trees.
E. Planted Berms:
F.
1.
Use of berms is discouraged and is only allowed with the approval of DPS.
2.
Slope maximum is horizontal to vertical ratio of 3:1.
3.
Plant material should be selected to limit erosion and maximize slope retention.
Pads:
1.
Provide concrete pads at site fixtures and furnishings such as bleachers, tables, seating, bike racks, trash
cans, etc. in minimum 6-inch thickness or other minimum thickness specified by the geotechnical report.
2.
Pads are to be sloped to drain.
3.
Pads shall extend a minimum of 12inches beyond the furnishing that will be placed on them.
4.
Trash cans are to be surface mounted on concrete pads in asphalt or on concrete pavement.
G. Mowing strips:
1.
Provide minimum 12-inch wide concrete apron adjacent to building at sodded areas.
2.
Provide 12-inch wide concrete mow strip beneath fencing located within lawn areas.
a)
Mow Strip shall be centered along the length of fence.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 5 of 20
Update: April 2016
b) Mow strip shall accommodate (not impede) drainage flowing beneath fence. Add drains or chases if
necessary to ensure water does not accumulate or pond on or around the mow strip.
3.
Provide concrete aprons around other site features that are located adjacent to or within lawn areas,
including but not limited to, area drains, water system valve boxes, cleanouts, site monuments or marquis
signs, [site specific examples], etc.
4.
Provide 24-inch wide concrete “mow band” where vehicle overhang would otherwise extend over an
irrigated landscape area.
H. Design exterior door stoops and subgrade to prevent frost heave and excess settlement. Refer to standard
Section 32 13 13, Concrete Paving.
I.
Ramps: Meet District Accessability Requirements.
J.
Vehicle Parking: Refer to DPS Parking Standards for specific parking lot guidelines.
1.
Coordinate quantities and types of parking with DPS Educational Specifications, the City and County of
Denver, and DPS.
2.
Standard stall size: 9' wide x 20' deep.
3.
Aisles: 24' (for 90 parking).
4.
Include paint striping in construction contract and engineering drawings.
5.
Wheel Stops:
a)
Are only required in cases where the protection of adjacent site features is required.
b) Maximum height of 6 inches.
c)
Pre-cast concrete having a minimum 4,000 psi at 28-day strength.
d) Vertical gap on the underside to promote drainage.
e)
Secure in place with #5 rebar at either end to 18-inch minimum depth. Apply sealant to holes in
pavement as specified in related pavement Sections.
6.
Where vehicle parking abuts ECE (Early Childhood Education) playgrounds, protective bollards must be
installed between the two areas.
7.
When resurfacing a parking lot, evaluate the opportunity to meet the required accessible parking spaces
required by the AHJ or ADA whichever is more stringent.
K. Bicycle parking:
1.
Provide number of bicycle parking spaces required by Denver zoning.
2.
Coordinate number of bicycle parking spaces and locations with DPS.
L. Curbing:
1.
6” high concrete with 18” to 24” pan
2.
“Spill pans” and “Catch pans” shave have same gutter width.
3.
Transitions between catch and spill pans will be maximum of 5 feet.
4.
Specify depth of catch and spill, typically 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches.
M. Permanent Site Fencing: Refer to Section 32 31 13, Chain Link Fences and Gates, for more information.
N. Public Utilities:
1.
Gas meters: Provide gas meter fencing and concrete pad.
2.
Transformers: Enclosures at pad-mounted transformers are not required.
3.
Refer to Section 33 00 00, Utilities.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 6 of 20
Update: April 2016
O. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: Provide enclosures where required for equipment protection and safety.
1.
Chain link fencing and roof is required to completely enclose cooling towers at grade and on open roofs.
2.
Refer to Divisions 22, 23, 25 and 26 standards.
P. School Buses: Obtain quantity and dimensions of school buses for the school site from DPS and incorporate
into the design of the bus lanes and related transportation plans.
Q. DPS delivery vehicles: Obtain dimensions of other DPS delivery vehicles from DPS.
R. Sustainability: Water quality (LEED), Denver water board, urban storm water, storm water, take drainage pit
info from safety group.
PART 9 - NEW TENNIS COURT AND RENOVATION OF EXISTING
A. Coordinate scope of tennis court surface work with DPS. Scope may include patching and re-finishing of
existing tennis court surface or complete removal of existing structural substrate and replacement with posttensioned system.
B. Tennis court design is dependent upon several factors including soil characteristics and other engineering
factors. It is recommended that a licensed Professional Engineer be retained for design considerations for tennis
court reconstruction.
C. Coordinate requirements for geotechnical soils investigation and soils testing and inspections with DPS.
D. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve A/E of contract responsibilities.
E. In the absence of other information, the following publications will assist in the design process for tennis court
construction.
F.
1.
USTC&TBA, United States Tennis Court and Track Builders Association Guidelines for Tennis Court
Construction, web site: http://www.ustctba.com/guidelines-tennis/contents.html.
2.
Post-Tensioning Institute, Post-Tensioning Manual.
3.
Post-Tensioning Institute, Design and Construction of Post-Tensioned Slabs-on-Ground.
Pads: Refer to other Division 2 standards.
G. Signs:
1.
Signs shall be provided under the construction contract.
2.
Include sign locations, dimensions, and text in the Contract Documents.
3.
Coordinate signage design with DPS.
PART 10 - CONCRETE PAVING
A. Extensive A/E cross-coordination is needed between this standard and other standards, including but not limited
to Divisions 31 and 32.
B. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve the A/E of contract responsibilities.
C. Indicate all concrete paving, including walks, curb and gutters, steps, ramps, other flatwork and drives in
construction documents. Plans shall include dimensions, radius centers, and coordinates, etc., of sufficient
detail that all items can be located and verified in the field. Use enlarged plans if necessary. Detail special
conditions such as curved edges.
D. Material Resource:
1.
Fly ash is not allowed in concrete mix designs.
2.
Recycled on-site concrete from demolition may be used as course aggregate and/or base course if
applicable and approved by geotechnical engineer. Submit material per Section 01 33 00, Submittal
Procedures.
3.
Concrete pigments.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 7 of 20
Update: April 2016
a)
Acceptable pigments include recycled glass, aggregates and powder.
E. Fire truck access around buildings must be considered. This could be on concrete walks, concrete or asphalt
drives or asphalt play areas.
1.
F.
Use of Grass Crete an acceptable means of minimizing width of concrete with DPS and local fire
department approval.
City Property and Right-of-Way:
1.
Design walks, curbs, driveways, gutters, curb chases, wheelchair accessible curb ramps, and other elements
on City Property according to City requirements.
2.
If DPS requirements exceed City requirements, then work performed on City property shall be completed
to DPS requirements.
G. Maintain a minimum slope of 1.5% on all concrete surfaces.
H. Clearly indicate control joints and expansion joints.
1.
Scored joints:
a)
¼ inch deep by ¼ inch wide.
b) Saw cut preferred.
c)
2.
Maximum spacing: 10 feet or as recommended by geotechnical report.
Provide expansion joints at the following minimum locations:
a)
Between buildings and walks, steps, ramps and other exterior concrete.
b) Where concrete paving is confined (i.e. between building and curb or in building courtyard).
c)
Where piping penetrates concrete paving.
d) Maximum distance between expansion joints: 100 feet.
I.
Acceptable surface treatments:
1.
Stamping.
2.
Metal insets.
3.
Acid wash finish.
4.
Brush finish.
5.
Sandblasted:
a)
J.
Must specify epoxy resin applied following sandblasting to prevent silting.
Consult with DPS and Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer to determine paving thickness requirements for various
locations.
1.
Walks: Minimum 4 inch thick with glass fibermesh reinforcement and/or rebar reinforcement.
2.
Fire truck, bus, delivery truck and trash truck accesses require heavy duty paving thickness: Minimum 6
inch thick with fibermesh reinforcement and/or rebar reinforcement per engineering requirements.
3.
Walks which may be crossed by drives or to fire access on playgrounds, etc.: Minimum of 6 inch thick
concrete paving (or equivalent asphalt paving) per engineering requirements.
K. Edges and transitions: Provide a minimum of 6 inch thickened edges with #4 rebar at edges abutting lawns, at
each side of expansion joints, and for the following special conditions:
1.
At building entrances (door stoops), provide slip joint dowel through expansion joint between building
floor slab and exterior concrete, or other method designed to prevent frost heave or excessive settlement.
L. Sleeving:
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 8 of 20
Update: April 2016
1.
Refer to Section Irrigation, for sleeving requirements under paved areas for irrigation piping and wiring.
2.
Refer to Section 33 00 00, Utilities, for sleeving requirements under paved areas for underground utilities.
M. Reinforcement:
1.
A/E shall coordinate with DPS for determination of areas where fibermesh reinforcing, welded wire fabric,
and rebar reinforcement are required.
PART 11 - ASPHALT PAVING
A. Extensive A/E cross-coordination is needed between this standard and other standards, including but not limited
to Sections 31 23 00, Excavation and Fill.
B. Inspection by Owner’s Testing Agency does not relieve the A/E of contract responsibilities.
C. Design asphalt pavement according to recommendations of the geotechnical report.
D. Reference Standard: Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Colorado Department of
Transportation (CDOT).
E. Environmental compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations
pertaining to asphalt paving systems.
F.
Indicate and fully detail areas of new asphalt pavement, asphalt overlay, and patching of existing pavement.
G. Fire truck access around buildings must be considered. This could be on combinations of concrete walks,
concrete or asphalt drives and/or asphalt play areas.
H. City property and City Right-ofWay:
I.
J.
1.
Design asphalt pavement work on City property according to City requirements.
2.
If DPS requirements exceed City requirements, then work performed on City property shall be completed
to DPS requirements.
Consult with DPS and Geotechnical Engineer to determine paving thickness requirements for various locations
at each project site.
1.
Fire truck, bus, delivery truck and trash truck accesses require heavy duty paving with increased paving
thickness (a minimum of 6” thick).
2.
New pavements in driveways and parking lots shall be a minimum of 4” thick. Where thicker pavements
are required, the base course thickness shall be not less than 60% of the total pavement thickness and the
maximum surface course thickness shall be 3” thick.
3.
Paving overlay thickness shall be a maximum of 3 inches and a minimum of 2 inches on the designated
driveway areas. Refer to plans for specified thickness of driveway overlays. All other paved areas shall
receive a 2-inch thick overlay.
Edge Details: Asphalt-paved playground areas shall terminate in concrete ribbon curbs. Typical concrete
ribbon curbs will be flush with the edge of asphalt pavement, 6 inces wide and 18 inches deep.
K. Sleeving: See other Divisions 31 and 32 standards for information regarding required sleeving under paved
areas for irrigation piping and wiring, and for information regarding required sleeving for gas, electrical, and
other utilities.
L. A minimum slope of 2% is needed for asphalt paving.
PART 12 - BRICK UNIT PAVING
A. Masonry Paving shall not be permitted without approval of DPS. DPS will consult with the DPS Structural
Shop before issuing approval for masonry paving.
B. Acceptable masonry paving units include brick, stone, concrete, grass pave or other decorative unit paving.
1.
When stone is used, specify name, type and source.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 9 of 20
Update: April 2016
2.
Minimum strength: 4,000 psi for concrete based masonry units and 2,500 psi for brick.
C. Masonry paving units are recommended, but not limited to, plaza and pedestrianareas where vehicular traffic is
limited or prohibited.
D. Brick Masonry paving shall be placed on minimum 4 inch concrete slab bed with paving units laid on mortar
bed with grouted joints.
E. Sand set masonry paving shall be limited to where units must be removed for functional reasons such as the
placement of engraved unit for fund raising purposes. Sand set areas shall be no larger than 10 feet in any
dimension and must be contained by concrete curbs or abutting permanent structures. The containing border
materials shall be so constructed that they will be permanent and shall withstand normal wear and
environmental conditions.
F.
Brick Masonry paving materials intended for installation over concrete beds shall be dense, impervious
materials designed for exterior, horizontal installation.
G. Porous Paver and “Grasscrete” bed systems will be designed per manufaturer’s recommendations
PART 13 - IRRIGATION
A. Observations and inspections by Owner do not relieve the A/E of contract responsibilities.
B. Irrigation system water supply and metering
1.
New irrigation systems shall be designed with a dedicated irrigation tap and independent meter.
2.
Where irrigation system must be tapped off of domestic water service (after the meter), provide a
check meter compatible with Denver Water Departement’s requirements.
C. Design entire irrigation system in detail, whether new or modification to existing system. Design-build delivery
of irrigation system work is prohibited.
D. Verify with DPS the allowable time-of-day watering times and total time allowed to irrigate the entire site.
E. Comply with imposed restrictions for water use by authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Minimum acceptable sprinkler head coverage is 100%.
G. Water service pressure and flow
1.
Test and evaluate water service prior to design, and employ test results in irrigation system design.
Refer to standard Section 33 00 00among other standards.
2.
Design system to allow for full buildout of local area and take associated pressure drops into account.
3.
Design pressure shall be indicated on drawings.
4.
Consider design pressure and flow at connection to the mainline pipe and at last head in zone.
5.
Evaluate the need for an irrigation booster pump. Where irrigation schedule, supply pressure and/or
water volume indicate the possible need for a booster pump, provide analysis to DPS prior to including
a booster pump in the project. Irrigation booster pumps may be designed only with approval of DPS.
6.
Require the Contractor to retest existing water service conditions at the point of connection prior to
irrigation system construction. Verification of existing pressure is to determine if design pressure
matches existing pressure
H. Consider need for an irrigation system for seeded and dry-land grass areas.
I.
Irrigation zoning
1.
Play fields shall have separate zones from non-play field irrigated areas.
2.
Tree RWS and shrub spray zones shall be isolated from turf zones.
3.
Spray heads and rotor heads shall not be on the same zone. Do not mix items of different precipitation
rates in one zone.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 10 of 20
Update: April 2016
J.
To the greatest extent possible, avoid location of valve boxes within active play zones of ball fields.
K. Coordinate and detail depth of bury of pipes.
L. Lay out main irrigation lines for loop feed system. Provide mainline isolation valves to separate the irrigation
system into logical areas.
1.
This practice is to be applied where compatable with site layout and existing conditions
2.
Get DPS approval when not installing a loop system
M. Coordinate routing of irrigation to minimize lines below drives, walks, asphalt paving, and other obstructions to
removing and re-installing the irrigation lines in the future.
1.
Coordinate routing of irrigation mains and control wiring to minimize the number of conditions where
irrigation crosses other buried underground utilities.
2.
Provide sleeves for irrigation lines and control wiring where they run below paving, walks, and any
other hardscapes.
3.
Irrigation pipes and control wiring shall not be installed in the same sleeve.
4.
Control wiring sleeves shall be minimum 1-1/2” PVC CL-200.
5.
Provide wiring sleeve for wires not in mainline trench.
N. Coordinate backflow preventer, irrigation controller and meter locations.
1.
Backflow preventer standards are in Division 15.
2.
Backflow preventer, controller and meter locations should be installed close together where possible
and shall be approved by DPS at the start of design.
3.
The preferred backflow preventer location is inside with a floor drain Reference BACKFLOW
PREVENTER DETAIL for cover.
4.
The backflow preventer may be installed inside provided it is very close to an adequate drain
5.
The irrigation backflow preventer shall be served from a domestic line connection upstream of the
“primary containment” backflow preventer, unless the irrigation system has its own tap or service line.
The irrigation backflow preventer shall be the primary containment for the irrigation system.
6.
The irrigation water meter shall be located upstream of the backflow preventer. If the meter is outside,
locate inside a pre-cast valve pit with freeze protection.
7.
Supply piping for the backflow preventer and the meter shall be equipped with tees and valves so
water can be removed from the backflow preventer using compressed air or gravity drainage and only
gravity drainage for the meter. A tee shall be located in a heated space between the irrigation system
isolation valve and the exterior and a second tee, and valve shall be located above ground, downstream
of the backflow preventer for winterization of the irrigation system. Refer to DPS detail drawing
8.
The master control valve shall be the first valve downstream of the backflow preventer.
9.
Coordinate responsibilities for furnishing and installing the backflow preventer. Responsibility
normally is with the plumbing subcontractor or installer other than the irrigation system installer.
10. The irrigation controller shall be located so that the maximum area of irrigated landscape is visible
from the controller location. Exterior, wall-mounted controllers are preferred. Exterior controllers
(wall or pad mounted) shall be in a lockable enclosure.
11. DPS to coordinate with Denver Water where reclaimed water is available.
O. Garden Irrigation:
1.
No permanent irrigation is to be installed in gardens. Garden area should be defined, potable water-line
required w/ proper shut off valve. Do not use reclaimed water source. Frost proof hydrant as well as
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 11 of 20
Update: April 2016
drain between building and hydrant. Hydrant to have galvanized pipe below grade to detour vandalism
and “T” with 2 hose bibs.
P. Drawing Details:
1.
Standard irrigation details are available in AutoCAD format for DPS irrigation systems.
2.
Use the DPS standard details in the contract documents.
3.
No changes to the standard drawings shall be made without approval of DPS.
PART 14 - CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
A. Requirements vary. A/E shall consult with DPS to determine extent and type of permanent site fencing to be
installed.
B. Provide fencing from all hazardous areas, either on site or at property line to protect from hazards on other
adjacent properties.
C. Fence all gas meters (meters to have concrete base and fence).
D. Provide separate fenced area for ECE/Kindergarten play areas.
E. Permanent fence shall not be used as construction fence except where pre-existing and when approved by DPS.
F.
Chain link fencing is preferred to be vinyl-coated in black. Exposed galvanized chain link fencing is only
accepted if vinyl-coated is not feasible, consult with DPS approval.
G. Ornamental fencing must be reviewed for safety and entrapment threats and approved by DPS and risk
management.
H. Garden Fencing- Same rules apply for garden fencing as for other DPS site fencing.
I.
Barbed wire is not permitted on DPS projects.
J.
Where a chain link roof structure is required, include roof fence support structure in construction documents.
Peaked chain link roof preferred for strength and to keep balls or other sporting equipment from getting stuck
on top.
K. Gravel stops:
1.
Should be made of recycled plastic products such as Trex board.
2.
Design anchorage of products to control the significant thermal expansion experienced with synthetic wood
products.
L. Wind Screen:
1.
Coordinate wind screen need and location with DPS.
M. The type of gate or vehicle barrier structure for any access opening in excess of 10 feet shall be coordinated
with DPS. Avoid larger openings wherever possible. Preliminary gate types are as follows:
1.
Clear opening < 20 feet and > 10-foot, rolling gate.
2.
Clear opening > 20 feet, cantilever gate.
N. Fencing heights:
1.
Overall, fencing should be kept to the minimum amount necessary to meet the objectives of their intended
purpose stipulated by DPS. Fencing should be located within or on the school property boundary. All
fencing and backstops should include a flush concrete mow strip. The following are the minimum required
fencing locations and heights are outlined below. Heights may be increased where deemed appropriate and
approved by the district.
a)
Elementary Schools:
i)
Parking lots: Review with DPS.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 12 of 20
Update: April 2016
ii) Playground to surrounding street: 6-foot.
iii) ECE/Kindergarten play area: 4-foot.
iv) Play apparatus areas (swings, etc.): ECE: 4-foot, Primary: 6-foot.
v) Backstops: 12-footwith 4-foothood.
b) Middle Schools and High Schools:
i)
Parking lots: Review with DPS.
ii) Tennis courts: 12-footwith court wings extending 10 feet into court from entrance.
iii) Basketball courts: 12 feet.
iv) Backstops:

Softball: 18 feet with 4-foot hood.

Baseball: 24 feet with 5-foot hood.
PART 15 - SITE FURNISHINGS
A. Related Sections and Documents; Section 03 31 00: Structural Concrete, Section 32 13 13: Concrete, Section 32
95 50: Playground Equipment, Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Contract, and Division-1
Specification sections apply to work of this section.
B. Paved pads are required beneath site furnishings. Under some circumstances, inorganic compacted granular
material may be substituted for pavement pads. Only with DPS approval. Refer to other Division 2 standards.
C. Bike racks shall comply with Denver Zoning regulations.
D. Ensure that site furnishings are accessible per DPS accessibility standards and the ADA.
E. Tree ring grates are discouraged and may be designed only when landscape trees are required within walkways,
courtyards or hardsurface play areas and with approval of DPS.
F.
Gonza Drums are not permitted.
G. Boulders are not permitted. Refer to Learning Landsacpe Standards for exceptions.
H. Coordinate with other Division 0 and Division 2 standards.
I.
Storage sheds are to be constructed to meet group s occupancy standards.
J.
Wood storage sheds will be allowed on a very strick limited basis.
K. Location and design of the site storage structures shall be submitted to DPS and DPS grounds department
supervisor for review and approval.
L. Wood storage shed structures shall be located a minimum of 30 feet from any permanent structure.
PART 16 - PLANTINGS
A. General Design Guidelines
1.
Descriptions contained herein are general in nature for landscaping and may apply to new construction as
well as restoration of existing areas which are disturbed, damaged or destroyed as a result of construction.
2.
Refer to other standards for playground safety surfacing and play sand.
3.
Coordinate surface mulch materials and systems with DPS.
4.
Minimize size and quantity of shrub and perennial beds, for maintenance reasons.
5.
Do not specify projectile-size rock for groundcover or mulch. Rocks larger than squeegee are prohibited
unless keyed into place.
6.
Proposed plant list shall be presented for review at Design Development and finalized by 50% DD.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 13 of 20
Update: April 2016
7.
In the interest of avoiding monocultures the design shall have a variety of trees and plants.
B. Prohibited Plants:
1.
State of Colorado listed noxious and/or invasive plants are prohibited.
a)
This is a link to the Colorado noxious and invasive species list.
2.
Plants that produce thorn and spikes are prohibited anywhere on a DPS site.
3.
Any tree prohibited for planting by the City and County of Denver.
a)
This is a link to the City and County of Denver
http://www.denvergov.org/ForestryandTrees/RecommendedTrees/tabid/432238/Default.aspx
C. Recommended Plants And Plant Areas By Classification:
1.
Lawns and Playground Areas:
a)
The following trees are recommended shade trees for lawn and playground areas on DPS sites:
i)
Maples – all maples except Acer saaccharinum.
ii) Locust – Gleditsia species; only thornless species are acceptable.
iii) Oaks – Red, White, Swamp, and English are preferred.
iv) Pear Trees (standard and ornamental) – Pyrus species; only fruitless varieties are acceptable.
v) Lindens – all species.
vi) Sycamore.
vii) Cottonwood – Lanceleaf or narrowleaf are acceptable in areas that may require immediate shade.
Location and quantity must be approved on a case by case basis with DPS.
2.
Habitat Areas:
a)
Habitat areas should use native or indigenous species that promote foraging and nesting of urban
wildlife.
b) These areas should be located away from highly active areas subject to play or school traffic. Where
this is not possible some form of barrier is needed such as a fence or raised planter. For these
exceptions DPS approval is required.
c)
Butterfly habitats are recommended and shall provide both nectar and host species.
i)
For more information on Butterfly Gardens here is a link to the Butterfly pavilion web site.
d) A desginated crusher fine path shall be provided and shall be installed to DPS specs.
e)
3.
Plant list will be reviewed on a case by case basis and must reflect an educational theme or ecosystem.
Bio swale/ riparian zones:
a)
Where ever possible bio swales/riparian areas shall be use to enhance the storm water drainage system
and water quality.
b) These zones can also provide filtered visual screening from parking areas and alleys with DPS
approval. DPS Safety and Environmental also needs to review screening landcape features for safety
reasons.
c)
Plant selection should enhance urban habitat opportunities.
d) Low flow channel should be designed with appropriate surfacing to enhance flow and prevent mud.
Also consider drainage if necessary.
e)
4.
Use check dams when necessary.
Cultivated Gardens:
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 14 of 20
Update: April 2016
a)
Cultivated gardens shall be fenced with a four foot fence. For fence standards see section 32 31 13.
b) One-in-four beds will be a raised concrete block or cast-in-place concrete wall.
i)
Raised beds should be at a working height for students in wheel chairs.
ii) Top course of brick and top cap stones to be securely glued down to prevent vandalism.
c)
Compost bins are to be constructed of chain link per the fencing standards in section 32 31 13.
d) Paths shall be stabilized crusher fines.
e)
Tool enclosures will be reviewed on a case by case basis by DPS and the grounds department.
f)
Fruit bearing trees are allowed within the fenced cultivated garden area after review by DPS. Dwarf
species are recommended.
D. Irrigation System:
1.
Receive approval of landscape concepts before development of irrigation plans.
2.
Desire is to use less water and design landscapes as such. Coordinate planting zones with irrigation plan to
achieve low water usage.
E. Topsoil Test:
1.
Contractor will test soils for areas to be planted before design. Soil test shall be complete nutrient Test to
include PH, conductivity tesxture, lime, organic matter with fertilizer recommendation. Turf shall be tested
as well.
2.
Topsoil test by A/E is required for projects where soil may be stripped for later use. Test shall determine
soil amendments and preparation required to avoid using import top soil.
3.
Minimum requirements for acceptable topsoil or amended soil used for topsoil include:
a)
Organic matter content: Above 3%
b) PH: 6.5 – 7.6
c)
Conductivity: Less than 2 mmhos/cm
d) Nutrients: N, above 15 ppm; P, above 10 ppm; K above 80 ppm
e)
Soil texture: Sandy/clay, clay, silty clay loams; loam; or silty, sandy loams
PART 17 - TURF AND GRASSES
A. Soil requirements: Coordinate seed mix selections to soil type from soil test results of Section 32 91 13.
B. Lawn and grass areas shall be included in the construction contract unless otherwise directed by DPS.
C. Six inch (6") minimum topsoil is required under lawn areas.
D. Specify proper soil preparation for the growth of lawn materials.
E. Xeriscape considerations may be warranted.
PART 18 - OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE OF PLANTINGS
A. Specify 24 months of landscape maintenance by the Contractor for these landscape components
1.
Irrigation system
2.
Sodded and seeded areas
3.
Trees, shrubs, groundcover plants, perennials
4.
Organic and inorganic mulches
5.
Erosion control materials
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 15 of 20
Update: April 2016
6.
Painted hard surfaces
a)
7.
Re-stripe playground and parking lot stripes and designs at the end of the warranty/maintenance period
so the site is not handed over with faded and peeling paint.
Specify which areas are to be maintained by contractor during the Maintenance period.
a)
Determine if it is more practical to have contractor maintain the entire site even if work area is half of
the site.
i)
The intent of this is to avoid finger pointing issues between the contractor with the
warranty/maintenance and the maintenance shops.
ii) This is also to be more efficient if a large percentage of a site is under maintenance to keep the
shop from having to travel to the site to maintain a small piece of the site.
iii) The final decision on what will be included in the maintenance plan will be made by DPS and
Facility Management.
B. Require the Contractor to submit written reports to the Owner of landscape maintenance work.
1.
Provide a written report to Owner for each maintenance activity.
2.
Provide at least one report per month regardless of extent of problems or activity, through landscape
maintenance period.
3.
Report form should include inspection for each type of plant, license number, etc.
C. Require the Contractor to submit to the Owner the name and composition of herbicides, fertilizers, fungicides,
growth retardants and other chemicals and mixtures used in landscape maintenance operations.
D. Require the Contractor to notify the Owner minimum one (1) week prior to the following:
1.
Request for irrigation system adjustment (Contractor requests adjustment; DPS plumbing/irrigation shop
performs controller adjustment).
2.
Irrigation system spring start-up and fall winterization.
3.
Fertilization or the broad application of any chemicals or insecticides of any kind.
E. Contractor is responsible to review the maintenance activity with the Owner throughout the landscape
maintenance period and notify the Owner, in writing, of deficiencies in desired operations. Failure to notify
Owner of deficiencies will prohibit Contractor from relief of responsibility for dead or damaged work.
1.
F.
Contractor shall make no repair or take corrective action for discrepancies unless authorized to do so by
Owner in writing.
Contractor shall replace, at no cost to Owner, plant material that dies. This guarantee includes plant materials
that are damaged due to Contractor’s operations.
G. Warranty for replacement plants shall be extended for an additional year beyond replacement planting date.
PART 19 - UTILITIES
A. General Design Guidelines
1.
Indicate existing and proposed utilities and utility easements on the construction plans.
2.
Existing utilities
a)
Show existing buried utilities in areas of construction, based on best available information.
b) DPS will provide existing Record Drawing information and survey information.
c)
Verify the accuracy of information provided by DPS and visually examine actual conditions to the
extent indicated in the A/E’s contract.
d) Require the Contractor to call for utility locations prior to excavation on site.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 16 of 20
Update: April 2016
3.
Inspection by DPS’s Testing Agency and by others does not relieve the A/E of contract responsibilities.
4.
Coordinate the necessary survey work, legal descriptions and application submittals to verify utility
easements will be in place and approved to prevent interruptions of the construction schedule. This is of
particular importance to the water utilities and installation of fire hydrants.
B. Design Coordination
1.
Coordinate site utilities with interior utilities to establish connection points.
2.
Lay out utilities to minimize utility routing below pavement, walks, etc.
3.
Lay out utilities to minimize utilities crossing other buried utilities.
crossings.
4.
Plan adequate separation of utilities such that excavation for repair of one utility will not disturb another.
5.
Route buried utilities to avoid permanent playground structures.
6.
Avoid running utilities within tree root limits.
7.
Avoid planting trees above existing or new buried utilities.
8.
Avoid running utilities in areas where future building additions are likely.
9.
Maintain 10-foot separation between public utilities and building faces, or greater as specified for public
utility easements. Additional separation recommended for utilities exceeding 6 feet in depth.
Coordinate depths of all utilty
C. Natural Gas (Xcel Energy)
1.
Refer to Division 32 31 13 for gas meter fencing.
2.
Buried gas service line (from meter to building entrance) which passes below paving, building or other
surface construction shall be installed in a conduit and vented at each end.
3.
Provide a buried conduit and wire from the gas meter to the main telephone equipment room for remote
meter reading.
a)
Coordinate with Division 40 standards.
b) Xcel Energy will provide telephone cable termination at the gas meter.
D. WATER (DENVER WATER Or Other Local Water District)
1.
Test and evaluate water service pressure and flow prior to water and irrigation system design.
a)
Obtain system pressure and flow available from the Denver Water/Water District in writing.
b) Distribute pressure and flow test results to DPS and to the designers of the water and irrigation system
utilities.
c)
Consider system losses and water service characteristics in design of water and irrigation system
utilities.
i)
Include pressure and flow losses due to pipe, backflow prevention, meters, etc., to point of
connection, in design calculations.
ii) Design shall reflect historic and projected periodic fluctuations in water service.
d) Irrigation water service: Refer to Section 32 80 00 and other related Sections.
2.
Water easements
a)
Coordinate water easement characteristics, locations, and dimensions with DPS. DPS will coordinate
water easements with the DPS Real Estate Asset Manager.
b) Provide necessary civil engineering and documentation as required by the Denver Water
Department/Water District in order to negotiate water easements.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 17 of 20
Update: April 2016
c)
Water easement surveys and legal descriptions will be provided by either the A/E or DPS’s Surveyor,
according to terms of the A/E’s contract.
d) Document granted easements in the contract documents and coordinate so that other site utilities and
structures do not violate the conditions of the easement.
3.
Water taps
a)
Irrigation water taps
i)
At new buildings, irrigation water service shall be provided through a separate tap dedicated for
irrigation.
ii) At existing buildings where a separate irrigation tap is not provided, consult with DPS regarding
whether new tap is to be included in project.
b) Water main taps for fire hydrants
i)
Provide calculations and data required by the Denver Fire Prevention Division or Denver Fire
Department.
ii) Consult with DPS to schedule a meeting with the Denver Fire Prevention Division as soon as
preliminary information is available.
iii) Fire hydrant locations will be determined by the Denver Fire Department. Number of hydrants
required will be based on Denver Fire Department needs and compliance with International Fire
Code (IFC), latest edition. Calculation for minimum number of hydrants will depend on whether
building is fire sprinkled type of building construction, allowed distances between hydrants,
calculated fire flow requirement and other criteria detailed in the IFC.
c)
Fire main taps for building fire sprinkler system: Fire Prevention Division or Denver Fire Department
will locate Siamese connection point.
d) Domestic water taps: Tap size shall be determined by A/E based on fixture unit counts and other
pertinent information, with review and approval by DPS and Dever Water Department.
e)
Combination taps: Combination taps are prohibited unless approved by DPS and Denver Water
Department.
4.
Signal wire may be required on Denver Water/Water District water mains.
installation shall meet Denver Water/Water District standards.
5.
Irrigation backflow preventers: Refer to Division 21, 31 and 32 standards.
Materials, location and
E. SANITARY SEWER (DENVER WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT Or Other Local Wastewater District)
1.
Provide gravity sanitary sewer system to greatest possible extent. Avoid pressure sewers and lift stations if
at all possible.
2.
Grease traps
a)
Review grease trap size requirements with Denver Wastewater/Wastewater District.
capacity causes grease to go rancid and necessitates frequent pumping of the grease trap.
Oversized
b) Garbage disposals shall not be connected to grease traps.
i)
This bypass is a violation of State of Colorado requirements. A variance request through Denver
Wastewater will be initiated by DPS for each proposed installation.
ii) Provide facilities to override the bypass in the future. Obtain design recommendations from DPS.
F.
Storm Sewer And Storm Water Quality Treatment (Denver Wastewater Management)
1.
Surface drainage and discharge to public storm sewers shall comply with requirements of Denver
Wastewater.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 18 of 20
Update: April 2016
2.
DPS prefers all roof drainage be discharged directly to on-site storm sewers for conveyance to detention
pond(s) or the public storm sewer (in the absence of a detention pond).
3.
Provide gravity storm sewer to greatest extent possible. Avoid lift stations if at all possible.
4.
At appropriate stages of design, prepare calculations and plans and schedule meetings with Denver
Wastewater to review the design and to document requirements. DPS shall be notified of meetings.
5.
During design development, prepare preliminary drainage characteristics including calculations.
a)
Surface drainage using method prescribed by Denver Urban Drainage and Flood Control District
(UDFCD) and based on proposed grading.
b) Maximum hourly rainfall expectation as required by Denver Wastewater and UDFCD.
6.
Extended Detention Basins, retention ponds and water quality ponds
a)
DPS policy is to avoid extended detention basins and retention ponds at schools serving elementary
grade students (ECE and Kindergarten through Grade 5). Denver Wastewater has historically waived
this requirement on sites serving elementary grades. Coordinate with DPS and Denver Wastewater for
pond requirements for individual projects and alternative best management practices for storm water
quality.
b) Elementary schools: If storm water detention or retention is required by Denver Wastewater, then
pond(s) shall be located away from playgrounds and be completely fenced with a six (6) foot chain
link fence.
c)
Middle and high schools: Design detention and retention pond(s) to minimize impacts to ball fields
and other recreational portions of the site.
d) Pest control: Design ponds to discourage pests such as mosquitos and waterfowl. “Micropools”
within the water quality outlets may be an option acceptable to Denver Wastewater. Per Denver Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District standards, water quaity ponds will be designed to drain in less
than 40 hours.
e)
Extended Detention Basin and Pond safety
i)
Detention and retention pond safety should be reviewed carefully.
ii) Inlet and outlet structures shall be designed with gratings and secure covers.
iii) Depth of detained storm water and side slopes of ponds shall be reviewed carefully during design.
7.
Subsurface drainage trenches less than 30 inches in total depth shall have woven filtration fabric (Mirafi
brand is prohibited in this application) installed 12 inches below final grade elevation. Woven filtration
fabric is not required for trenches greater than 30 inches in total depth.
8.
Consider the use of Nyloplast drainage systems for private on-site storm sewer systems with 15-inch and
smaller drainage piping.
G. Sewer Cleanouts
1.
Cleanouts shall be two-way unless otherwise approved by DPS.
2.
Locate and space two-way cleanouts per Denver Wastewater requirements and at each storm and sanitary
sewer exit from the building. Locate cleanouts along length of each sewer lateral at every 135-degrees
accumulation in bends and every 100-feet in run.
3.
Design cleanout sizes and cap details. Provide concrete collar where cleanout is in sod or planting bed.
Install cleanouts inside of irrigation type boxes with bolt-secured covers where cleanouts occur in sodded
areas.
4.
DPS will coordinate cleanout locations and styles with DPS Maintenance.
H. Primary Electrical (Xcel Energy)
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 19 of 20
Update: April 2016
1.
Provide load information to Xcel Energy as soon as available, no later than the initiation of Design
Development documents.
2.
Review electrical service requirements with Xcel Energy.
3.
Coordinate with DPS and Xcel Energy for determination of:
a)
Locations and extents of electrical and gas service easements.
b) Locations of street lighting.
4.
I.
Street lighting is typically installed by Xcel Energy and paid for by DPS. Confirm requirements for each
project.
Telephone, Cable Television & Other Telecommunications (Qwest & Comcast)
1.
Reference standards in Divisions 26 and 27.
2.
Telecom entry service underground conduits:
a)
For new buildings, design three 4” conduits with pull rope and measured pull string from the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) room to the farthest corner of the site; two conduits for Qwest
communications and the third conduit for Comcast cable television.
b) Specific locations of the Qwest and Comcast pedestals will be determined during construction.
c)
3.
J.
The construction contract amount will be adjusted by deductive Change Order to reflect actual conduit
length and routing.
DPS will coordinate with the DPS Department of Technology Services (DoTS) for routing and design of
underground telecom utilities.
Closeout Certification By A/E
1.
A/E certification is required for storm and sanitary sewer facilities, in addition to inspections made by
authorities or other utility companies having jurisdiction.
2.
Upon construction completion, the A/E is responsible for furnishing Denver Wastewater a certificate of
inspection prepared by the Colorado registered Professional Engineer who performed or supervised
construction inspection; certifying that:
a)
A construction inspector was on the job site at all times sanitary sewer or drainage facility work was
performed, and
b) All storm and sanitary sewer facilities, detention or retention pond grading, and outlet works (if any)
were constructed in compliance with the plans and specifications approved by Wastewater
Management, and
c)
The Record Drawings provided accurately depict the final installation of the sanitary sewer and/or
storm drainage system.
K. Record DOCUMENTATION BY A/E
1.
Include all easements on RECORD DRAWING site plans.
2.
Include all public utility services on RECORD DRAWING site plans.
Design Guidelines
00 90 00
Page 20 of 20
Update: April 2016
SECTION 00 91 00
PLAYGOUND STANDARDS
PART 0 - PURPOSE
PART 1 - SAFETY: SAFETY REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) designation F 1487 – 98 (or current issue) “Standard Consumer
Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use”
1.
U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) “Handbook for Public Playground Safety” (Publication No.
325) (based on ASTM F 1487) Internet address: www.cpsc.gov/CPSCPUB/PUBS/325.pdf
2.
CPSC “Playground Surfacing Materials” (Publication No. 3005)
PART 2 - GENERAL
A. Safety surfacing shall be installed under all play apparatus and within all play apparatus fall zones, use zones, and
safety zones.
B. Safety surfacing materials shall have a Critical Height value (see CPSC guidelines) of at least the height of the
highest accessible part of the play apparatus.
C. DPS Operations and Maintenance will provide engineered wood fiber (EWF) maintenance tools for each site,
including “corn cob forks” and “clam rakes.”
PART 3 - UNACCEPTABLE SAFETY SURFACING MATERIALS
A. Sand.
B. Wood chips, bark mulch, or wood mulch not certified by ASTM.
C. Any type of gravel including squeegee.
D. Loose mats (except “wear mats” indicated below).
PART 4 - ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER (EWF) SAFETY SURFACING
A. EWF system design:
1.
2.
3.
Depth of EWF:
a.
Minimum compacted (aged and used 90 days) depth of EWF is 12” in all safety surfacing areas.
b.
Initially install EWF to a minimum depth of 15” in all playground areas requiring safety surfacing. It is
anticipated that the EWF will compact over time to the minimum required 12” depth.
Drainage layer beneath EWF:
a.
Provide a minimum 3” deep layer of drainage rock beneath the entire EWF surface.
b.
The subgrade beneath the drainage layer shall be designed to direct water to a storm water drainage system.
Containment of EWF:
a.
Design perimeters of EWF areas with a minimum curb height of 4” and a maximum curb height of 6” above
the surface of the compacted EWF.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 1 of 10
Playground Standards
Update: April 2016
4.
5.
b.
Do not include geotextile fabric between the drainage layer and the EWF material.
c.
Geotextile fabric needs to be placed between compacted subgrade and drainage layer, as well as wrapping
any drainage material associated with a dry well system.
Ramps
a.
Landscape Architect or Civil shall design ramps for accessible transitions between play area perimeters and
surface of EWF. Refer to the play pit ramp drawing.
b.
In some circumstances, it may be necessary to use a resilient safety surface other than EWF for access path
surfacing. In this case poured-in-place surfacing may be specified.
Access
a.
All EWF pits need to be accessible by the Grounds Department’s maintenance trucks for the delivery of
materials and future maintenance.
B. Drainage System Design: Site Drainage
1.
EWF drainage system shall be designed by the Landscape Architect or Civil Engineer.
2.
The Landscape Architect or Civil Engineer shall design a subsurface drainage system sufficient to prevent
standing water in EWF areas.
3.
Design drainage system to remove a 3 inch rainfall within 4 hours.
4.
Design drainage system so that no free water remains 12 hours after precipitation ends.
C. Certifications:
1.
The architect is to pull the current standards for the playground equipment and fall zones at the time of design
and apply those to the design and specs.
a.
EWF and resilient tiles or poured-in-place material shall meet impact attenuation requirements of ASTM F
1292 - Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground
Equipment.
b.
Meet requirements of ASTM F 1951, Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface
Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
c.
Meet accessibility requirements of the ADAAG.
D. Submittals (provided by Supplier to Playground Designer and DPS):
1.
Product Data:
a.
Submit product data for poured-in-place safety surfacing.
E. EWF System Material Specifications:
1.
2.
Acceptable EWF Systems:
a.
“Fibar”.
b.
“Soft Fall / Soft Step”.
c.
“Woodcarpet”.
d.
or pre-approved equivalent.
Resilient Tiles Or Poured-In-Place Material:
a.
Playground Designer shall research and specify current available products.
b.
Thickness shall be determined by manufacturer, as appropriate to fall height and to meet certification
requirements noted above.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 2 of 10
Update: April 2016
PART 5 - PLAY APPARATUS
A. Overall Design Criteria:
1.
Play apparatus standards apply primarily to elementary school level playgrounds, for children through 12 years
of age. If play apparatus is designed for middle school or high school level students, minimum requirements
contained in this standard shall apply.
2.
Separation of play apparatus in separate pits and by age group is recommended Combinations of composite play
structures and individual elements of play apparatus are anticipated.
3.
Accessible play elements shall be integrated into every play area.
B. Safety:
1.
2.
Safety Certifications:
a.
Design, materials and installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F 1487-98, including associated CPSC
Guidelines.
b.
Manufacturer’s certification: A manufacturer’s representative shall provide an on-site inspection and
written certification that play apparatus has been installed according to specifications, including safety
surfacing.
Safety Zones, Fall Zones & Use Zones:
a.
Determined by Playground Designer and Manufacturer.
b.
Shall be indicated for both existing and new play apparatus.
c.
Shall be indicated on construction drawings.
d.
Shall be indicated on manufacturer’s shop drawings.
C. Accessibility:
1.
Certifications:
a.
2.
3.
4.
Play apparatus identified as accessible shall be in accordance with the ADAAG.
Wheelchair Transfer Points:
a.
Grade level access surface and transfer platform, steps and ramps on play apparatus shall be large enough to
be useful. Meet minimum dimensions recommended by accessibility standards referenced above.
b.
If feasible, locate wheelchair transfer points in close proximity to the bottom of slides.
c.
A primary goal should be wheel chair access of play equipment without the need to transfer from the
wheelchair.
Accessible Paths Within Composite Play Apparatus Structures:
a.
Meet minimum dimensions recommended by standards referenced above.
b.
Consider the possibility that a mobility impaired student may be able to crawl up steps from the transfer
platform. Maximum four steps are allowable from one platform to another.
c.
Where a wheelchair accessible ramp is provided for access onto a composite play structure, a continuous
accessible route shall be provided to another accessible exit from the play structure. Where a separate
accessible exit is not feasible, a platform of sufficient size shall be provided to allow a student using a
wheelchair adequate space to turn around in order to exit.
Building Access To Playground:
a.
Design at least one ADA ramp from the asphalt playground (if one doesn't exist) to a building entry point.
D. Heights Of Play Apparatus:
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 3 of 10
Update: April 2016
1.
General:
a.
Playground Designer shall design apparatus “fall heights” to meet “critical height” limitations of safety
surfacing materials. Refer to CPSC Handbook Table 1.
(i.) On all DPS playgrounds, safety surfacing is to be installed at minimum compacted depth of 12 inches.
b.
“Critical height” of safety surfacing is defined in the CPSC Handbook part 4.2.
c.
“Fall heights” of equipment are defined in CPSC Handbook part 4.3.
d.
Maximum heights for DPS play apparatus:
e.
In addition to apparatus height limitations recommended by the CPSC Handbook, DPS recommends the
following maximum play apparatus heights:
(i.) Pre-Primary (Ece) And Primary Play Apparatus Maximum Heights:

Maximum platform or access height: 1’-0” lower than recommended height in CPSC Handbook

Height of swing set top rail:

Pre-primary (ECE): 1’-0” lower than recommended height in CPSC Handbook.

Primary: 8 feet.
(ii.) Intermediate Play Apparatus Maximum Heights:

Maximum platform or access height: 8 feet.

Height of swing set top rail: 8 feet.
E. Playground Safety Signs:
1.
F.
The playground apparatus manufacturer shall provide a permanent sign at each play area that indicates the age
groups that the play apparatus is designed to accommodate.
Specific Play Components:
1.
Sand Box / Sand Table:
a.
Strongly recommended for every elementary level play area.
b.
Provide raised area to allow student in wheelchair to transfer into sandbox.
c.
Provide shade over portion of play sand area.
d.
Design must provide custom fit cover for sand pit to meet health code requirements. (example: Sandlock).
e.
Provide straps or stakes at midpoints to retain shape of sandbox.
G. Play Sand:
1.
Application:
a.
2.
3.
Use for sandboxes only.
Specifications:
Sieve
% Passing
#4
100%
#8
40-85%
#16
0-30%
#200
0-2%
Slides:
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 4 of 10
Update: April 2016
4.
a.
Slides (except spiral slides) shall face north.
b.
No covered slides.
Activity Panels:
a.
Unacceptable types of activity panels include:
(i.) Activity panels that contain only painted graphic images.
(ii.) Panels containing clear acrylic windows or mirrors.
b.
Acceptable types of activity panels include:
(i.) Steering wheels.
(ii.) Tic tac toe games.
(iii.) Games such as picture match, number sequences, shape and color sequences.
5.
6.
Swings:
a.
Provide a minimum one accessible swing at each playground.
b.
An accessible swing should not share a bay with a standard swing.
Non-traditional Play Elements:
a.
Non-traditional play elements such as logs, boulders, mounds, etc. are encouraged for playgrounds,
provided they comply with DPS and CPSC safety standards.
b.
Boulders (real or manufactured), logs, and non-traditional climbing equipment within playgrounds shall be
considered as individual pieces of play apparatus. Provide safety surfacing. Provide safety zones and fall
zones per CPSC guidelines.
c.
Any artificial rock/boulder shall not have a hollow cavity whereby students can hide in or become trapped
in.
H. Minimum Apparatus Requirements To Promote Developmental Skills: Coordinate with DPS.
1.
I.
New play apparatus shall be provided to promote specific developmental areas, including: gross upper body,
gross lower body, fine motor, social, imaginative and cognitive skills.
Play Apparatus To Avoid:
1.
Track rides, track slides.
2.
Roller slides.
3.
Open bed slides 8 feet high.
4.
Multi-occupant swings.
5.
Rope swings.
6.
Merry-go-rounds.
7.
Seesaws and teeter totters.
8.
Trampolines.
9.
Gliders.
10. Solid-wall crawl tubes.
11. Triple shot/ Triple shootout from Playworld systems.
12. Certain Types of Dome climbers that lack support in the middle and bend down. Example would be the super
satellite from Playworld systems.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 5 of 10
Update: April 2016
13. Rope climbers.
14. Diggers without stop pins (only allow 180 degrees of rotation).
J.
Existing Apparatus:
1.
2.
3.
Evaluation:
a.
Playground Designer shall evaluate existing apparatus that may be affected by a construction project.
Evaluation shall be relative to these standards.
b.
Evaluation will be used to determine whether individual pieces and assemblies of play apparatus should be
left untouched or modified in place, relocated, or demolished.
Relocation:
a.
When it is feasible to relocate existing play apparatus, responsibilities for removal, modification, and
reinstallation shall be clearly indicated by the Landscape Architect or Civil Engineer in the construction
documents.
b.
DPS Maintenance will be assigned the responsibility of relocating or modifying existing play apparatus only
with prior approval of DPS.
Modification:
a.
4.
5.
6.
When it is feasible to modify existing play apparatus, the Landscape Architect or Civil shall assure that the
designed modifications meet all current applicable safety and accessibility guidelines and requirements.
Traveling Rings (also called “Ringers” or “Giant Stride”)
a.
This type of play apparatus is no longer manufactured.
b.
Do not relocate traveling rings.
c.
If new steps are needed for traveling rings, steps will be provided by DPS Maintenance.
Unacceptable Materials:
a.
Wood.
b.
Concrete.
c.
Rubber vehicle tires.
d.
“Home made” apparatus that do not meet DPS and CPSC standards.
Materials And Fabrication:
a.
Support Posts, Uprights:
(i.) Material: Galvanized steel, minimum 12 gauge:

Yield strength: 55,000 psi

Tensile strength: 50,000 psi
(ii.) Size: Minimum 4 1/2” outside diameter (5” outside diameter preferred):

Smaller diameters may be approved for Pre-Primary (ECE) playgrounds only, and only by DPS
approval.

Note: No posts on DPS sites shall be smaller than 3-1/2” diameter.
(iii.) Finish: Baked on, polyester powder coated paint:

b.
Epoxy or hybrid paint is not acceptable.
Other Structural Members, Including Handrails And Guardrails:
(i.) Material: Galvanized steel.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 6 of 10
Update: April 2016
(ii.) Size: Diameter of steel tubing will vary according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Minimum 1
5/16” outer diameter.
(iii.) Finish: Baked on, polyester powder coated paint:
c.

Epoxy or hybrid paints not acceptable.

On handrails, textured or knurled surfaces are preferred for better grip.
Plastic Components:
(i.) Material: Rotationally molded, linear, low density polyethylene with UV inhibitors.
(ii.) Minimum wall thickness: 0.250” (Except as allowed for roofs).
d.
Decks, Including Platforms, Ramps, Walking Surfaces, Bridges, Slide Ladders:
(i.) Vinyl coated.
(ii.) Fully welded.
(iii.) Perforated 12 gauge steel horizontal surfaces.
e.
Slides:
(i.) One piece double wall plastic (two pieces acceptable for 8’ high slides).
(ii.) Stainless steel preferred, minimum 16 gauge, if budget allows.
f.
Chain:
(i.) Vinyl coated galvanized steel.
(ii.) Chains for swings shall NOT be vinyl coated.
g.
Roofs:
(i.) Metal preferred, for durability.
(ii.) Rotationally molded plastic acceptable.
(iii.) Tensile fabric on a case by case basis.
h.
Hardware, Accessories, Fittings:
(i.) Post Caps:

Cast aluminum.

Finish: Baked on, polyester powder coated paint.

(ii.) Clamps:

Cast or die cast aluminum or stainless steel.

Finish: Baked on, polyester powder coated paint.

(iii.) Fasteners:

All fasteners shall be tamper-proof stainless steel.

All nuts shall be lock nuts.

Lock nuts shall have safety caps.
(iv.) Permanent Labels:

Apply to apparatus, or on sign close to apparatus.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 7 of 10
Update: April 2016

Identify play apparatus manufacturer.

Include appropriate safety warnings.

Indicate age appropriateness of equipment.
(v.) Elevation Of Safety Surfacing:

7.
Manufacturer shall permanently mark optimum safety surfacing grade level on every post.
Marking shall be a simple line and shall not be identified.
Installation
a.
Landscape Architect or Civil Engineer and Installer shall ensure that all potential underground utilities and
structures are located prior to digging.
b.
Installer shall verify that sub grades are properly prepared and compacted.
c.
Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions.
d.
Installer shall field verify locations of all apparatus with DPS representative before proceeding with
installation.
e.
Installer shall provide concrete footings to dimensions indicated by play apparatus manufacturer.
(i.) Concrete shall meet DPS standards.
f.
Protect all excavations from erosion and flooding during apparatus installation.
PART 6 - OTHER PLAYGROUND LANDSCAPE COMPONENTS
A. Edges And Containment:
1.
Fences:
g.
2.
Refer to DPS specifications Site work, and Chain Link Fencing.
Curbs:
a.
Playground Designer shall design retaining curbs at perimeters of EWF, squeegee.
(i.)
Top of curb shall be minimum 4 inches above finished surface of material to be contained.
b.
Curbs shall be cast-in-place concrete
c.
Play pit design shall not have any shape that renders portions of the play pit unsuitable for play equipment
placement.
B. Walks And Paving:
1.
Some schools need sidewalks within playgrounds for tricycles and other rolling play equipment.
a.
If sidewalks are placed for rolling play equipment consider wavy walks and rumble strips
(i.)
b.
If wavy walks are used ensure the play area and walk are still ADA accessible.
Sidewalks are to be designed to DPS standards
2.
Avoid use of asphalt for sidewalks.
3.
Refer to DPS Standards Division 32 Sections for additional requirements.
C. Plant Materials:
1.
Refer to DPS Standard Specification 32 90 00 – Plantings.
D. Irrigation:
1.
All plant materials on all DPS sites shall be irrigated by automatic irrigation systems. Refer to DPS
Specification 32 84 00 for irrigation system standards.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 8 of 10
Update: April 2016
E. Water
F.
1.
Exterior drinking fountains are discouraged on DPS sites.
2.
If possible, locate student playgrounds close to building entrances where interior drinking fountains may be
accessed easily.
3.
If water play features are desired, the Playground Designer shall coordinate all such designs with the DPS.
Standing water will not be allowed in water play features. Safety and long term operations and maintenance
considerations will prevail over other design considerations.
Landscape Furnishings:
1.
Refer to DPS Standard 32 40 21 – Site Furnishings.
2.
Place site furnishings on pavement or other inorganic surfacing.
G. Bicycle Parking:
1.
Need and requirements to be determined by individual schools. Not mandatory, except as required by Denver
Zoning Administration.
2.
Refer to DPS Standard 32 40 21 – Site Furnishing.
H. Athletic and Recreation Equipment
1.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS the sports to be played at each school.
2.
Architect shall coordinate recreation program requirements with DPS for each school.
3.
Architect shall coordinate with Education Specification for quantity and size of equipment, playing fields and
courts not covered in the Playground Standard.
4.
Architect shall coordinate with DPS Section 32 18 23.
5.
Both outdoor and indoor playgrounds are possible. Coordinate with DPS Playground Standard 32 18 23 for
guidelines.
6.
Architect shall coordinate layouts, power supply, and mounting requirements for all FF&E items purchased by
DPS related to this section, i.e. cardiovascular equipment.
7.
Architect to coordinate requirements of a Learning Landscape with DPS.
8.
Architect shall coordinate equipment design with accessibility (ADA) requirements and applicable codes.
9.
Equipment shall be age appropriate, and may require physical separation of ages.
10. Architect shall coordinate all equipment design with DPS Playground Standard 32 18 23.
11. Architect shall coordinate school colors and logos for incorporation into project.
12. Architect shall coordinate floor anchorage and in-floor mounting requirements for all indoor equipment with
area to be used.
13. Architect shall provide for proper structural blocking and support for all indoor mounted equipment.
14. Architect shall coordinate in-floor mounting and power requirements of equipment.
15. Architect shall coordinate requirements of game striping and sizing, both interior and exterior.
16. Architect shall coordinate equipment storage requirements.
17. Architect shall coordinate with DPS items that are to be fixed and/or moveable.
18. If a pool is involved, a pool consultant shall be hired and include associated equipment requirements for lanes,
diving boards, starting blocks, etc. Reference NFHS Swimming Rules for construction standards.
19. All outdoor poles in paved areas shall be painted safety yellow, coordinate with Section 09 91 00.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 9 of 10
Update: April 2016
20. No motorized rigid partitions shall be used to divide interior recreation space.
21. Architect shall coordinate the requirements for an electronic scoreboard with DPS.
22. Coordinate with DPS if indoor Basketball goals are fixed or foldable.
23. If shooting and archery ranges are to be part of the scope, a specialized consultant shall be required for the
design of it.
24. The following materials are not permitted to be used on exterior play areas or equipment.
a.
Wood.
b.
Recycled Plastic.
c.
Synthetic Lumber.
d.
Concrete: Unless used for Structure.
e.
Rubber Tires.
f.
Non-commercial: ‘Home made’ equipment.
Design Guidelines
00 91 00
Page 10 of 10
Update: April 2016

district procedures and design guidelines

Transcription

Similar documents

11790_3_2-25 Superintendent - Office of Family and Community

standard food and beverage concession agreement

Page 1 Proving a triangle is a right triangle Method 1: Show two

usc department of public safety - Los Angeles

USC Department of Public Safety University Park Campus Patrol

August-December, 2011 - The Nanhi Chhaan Foundation

New Employee Orientation

News Letter III-X.cdr

The Denver Post

IMO Guidelines for Vessels with Dynamic Positioning Systems